Knowing the true purpose of democracy

TOPICS: When people think their government is good enough – The responsibility to protect the people – The right to freedom from exploitation – Democracy and power elites – A benevolent power elite – What is the purpose of democracy? – Exploitation by disinformation – Public debate about exploitation – Programmed to accept limitations – How can people accept the golden age? – The real goal of democracy – Why elites cannot rule – What kind of beings are we? – Universal spirituality that unites people – The most severe form of exploitation –


Listen to a recording of this dictation (subscribers only) 

Ascended Master Saint Germain, June 2nd, 2017, through Kim Michaels. This dictation was given at a conference in Holland

I AM the Ascended Master Saint Germain. It is my privilege and my choice to be the primary ascended master working with earth for these next 2,000 years. My beloved, in my ongoing unfoldment of the vision I hold for the golden age, and how the golden age can be brought about, I wish to bring to your attention a topic that is of quite large importance.

When people think their government is good enough

Now, one of the primary shifts in consciousness that happened in most democratic nations when they became democracies was that people in general started having more faith in their governments. They started having the sense that their governments were not out to dominate them, to abuse them, to enslave them, to take advantage of them. They started having a sense that they were living in a more benevolent time, a more benevolent society, where there was not the obvious abuse and enslavement that they had known in the past. This of course is a positive and necessary development. There is, however, a downside of everything when it comes to the human consciousness, the consciousness of duality, and its uncanny ability to take everything into an unbalanced state.

What has happened in many, especially of the older democracies, is that there has developed this consciousness that has become very powerful and often takes over the minds of those people who are part of the democratic government, whether they are among the elected representatives, the bureaucracy, the media, the educational system, whatever. This consciousness is that these people, who are the leaders of democratic societies, basically believe that what they are doing now is good enough. They are fulfilling their responsibility towards the people by ensuring a somewhat peaceful and stable society and a stable economy, and so forth and so on. The perception is that as long as a democratic society is functioning reasonably well according to the standard, then the leaders are fulfilling their obligation and their responsibility towards the people.

Now, what is the standard you are using to judge whether a democracy is functioning well? Well, it is often that you look at other democracies. You look at the history of democracy and, of course, you look at societies that do not have a democratic form of government, and they may not have the same freedoms that you supposedly have in a democratic society. Based on this comparison, then people say: “Well, our democracy is doing quite well, isn’t it?” And the other people say: “Yes, yes, we are doing quite well compared to how it was before we had democracy and compared to this other nation.” You build this sense that what you have done is good enough.

The responsibility to protect the people

What I would like to point out to you is that, when I look at the state of democratic nations, I see very clearly that there is not a single democratic government that is anywhere near to fulfilling its responsibility towards its people. Why is this so, my beloved? It is because it is the responsibility of a government to protect the people. Well, we should say this is one of the responsibilities, but it certainly is a primary responsibility.

You think that, if you have some kind of army, if there is not war and the threat of war, if you have a police force, if you have various services in terms of health, and so on, if you have an educational system, this is good enough. But is that truly protecting the people? Well it is, but is it sufficient protection? We need to step up here and recognize that there has always been two kinds of evil on earth. One is the obvious one that everyone sees and sees as evil. The other is a hidden one that most people do not see. We have the more obvious forms of evil, and most democratic nations think they are protecting their people against those, and many of them are to a large degree. How many democratic nations have honestly and openly acknowledged the hidden forces of evil, and have acknowledged that they are not protecting their people against them? How can you protect your people against something that you don’t even know exists, and you don’t understand the nature of it and therefore, what chance do you have? How could you protect your people against cholera before you knew that there is a bacteria that creates this disease?

The right to freedom from exploitation

I am not at this point envisioning that most people in the democratic world are ready to step up and consciously acknowledge the teaching that we have on fallen beings and dark forces. Naturally, the gap between the understanding that people have been given, either from materialism or Christianity, is very large. But there are universal aspects of our teachings that certainly can be grasped. If you look at democracy, you see that a very important idea behind democracy is that all people have certain rights. You have a right to happiness, life, liberty.

What has not so far been defined in any democratic constitution, but which needs to be defined, is that all human beings have the right to live in freedom from exploitation. You will see that democratic nations have, to some degree, freed their people from the more obvious forms of exploitation. You do not have a dictatorial leader who has a right to kill anyone he wants. There is a rule of law, there is a certain protection against the abuse of power. There is a certain protection against being exploited by other people for various purposes. But these are not the only forms of exploitation. They are only the forms that have been recognized by society or by people at large.

It is necessary for the golden age to be manifest that there is a rising awareness that there are many more subtle forms of exploitation that are being imposed upon the people. I will therefore attempt to express this without referring to fallen beings and dark forces, but simply referring to what most people in democratic nations can lock in to, namely that there has throughout history been various power elite groups who have attempted to exploit the people.

Democracy and power elites

It is not so difficult for a critical mass of people to step up and realize that just because you enact a democratic form of government, this does not mean that you automatically get a society that is free from all power elites. This is not difficult to grasp for many, many people who have already started grasping this. What we need to envision, what we need to make calls for, is that they will be raised to a higher vision of this than what they get through the conspiracy theories and various websites that are always trying to be sensationalist. They are often portraying this in such a way that people don’t think they can do anything about these hidden elites that are seeking to manipulate and take over society. The reality of the matter is, of course, that people can indeed do something about any power elite group. But they can do it in only one way: through awareness.

The people cannot free themselves from any power elite until they become aware that the power elite exists, that it has certain intentions, that it has certain methods, and that it has used certain ideas to hide from the people and hide its intentions and methods from the people. Naturally, you have seen in history how people in various nations have become aware of a certain power elite, and they have done what has happened so many times: used violence to defeat the power elite. This, of course, will in no way bring the golden age. Violence and force cannot bring Saint Germain’s Golden Age into manifestation, for it is a golden age based on an entirely higher vision.

We need to step up and recognize that the key to overcoming the power elite, the key to freeing yourself and the people from exploitation by a power elite, is to raise awareness. Why is this so? Why is it not enough to just know that a power elite is there so you can put them all under the guillotine? Well, it is because if you put one power elite under the guillotine, my beloved, another power elite will immediately start forming. Was that not the lesson you can learn from the French Revolution? Was it not the lesson you can learn from many other situations in history?

What will it take for the people to be free from the power elite? It is that you recognize the influence of consciousness. The power elite can never suppress the people only through violence and force. There must be some mental idea, as Mother Mary explained, that is fooling the people into thinking that they cannot do without the elite, or into simply not seeing what the elite is doing. There is always a limited awareness in the people that creates the opening for the power elite to step in and exploit the people. Therefore, raising awareness is the key, but the awareness needs to be raised beyond simply knowing about the power elite.

My beloved, this is also the main reason why most conspiracy theories have no constructive role whatsoever. They attempt to raise people’s awareness as this or that secret conspiracy, but they never raise the awareness further, even if it’s true what they are saying, which it often is not. They never raise the awareness to the point where the people start seeing what is the element of their own consciousness that allows the formation and existence of that elite. This is the vision I am asking you to hold, and of course make the calls that we can enter a spiral where more and more become people become willing to reach for this increased awareness.

The rest of this dictation, along with an invocation based on the dictation, is found in the book: Accepting Saint Germain’s Golden Age.

 

Copyright © 2017 Kim Michaels

A Healing Exercise in Divine Love

Listen to a recording of this dictation (subscribers only) 

Ascended Master Presence of Love through Kim Michaels, June 2, 2017. This dictation was given at a conference in Holland.

I AM the Presence of Love. You may have noticed that when you receive a dictation from the ascended masters, they often present themselves as: I AM the Ascended Master so-and-so. I am naturally a Being in the ascended realm, but I choose not to present myself as an ascended master, for I have not ascended from earth or even from the sphere in which you exist. I ascended in a previous sphere and therefore, I hold a higher position in the cosmic hierarchy than any of the ascended masters that you have so far heard from.

This is to let you know where I am in the cosmic hierarchy. It gives you the understanding that, as part of what we have called progressive revelation, there can come those points where a particular dispensation, where the ascended masters who have released light on earth, can reach a level where the students of that dispensation have been willing to study and apply the teaching to the point where they can receive a teaching from a higher level of the cosmic hierarchy than has been released before on earth.

I come in recognition of the fact that so many people have taken the teachings that have been given in this dispensation about non-duality and duality, about the epic mindset, about the ego, and about love and unconditional and conditional love. I come in recognition of the fact that enough people have applied these teachings, have sincerely looked at themselves, looked at the conditions they have, and struggled with what all ascended beings go through: struggling to come to see what is what, what is real, what is unreal, what is the ego, what is not the ego. All of these questions that it is natural for beings to have, especially on a planet as dark as earth.

What is anti-love?

Why is the earth so dark? Well, in large part because it has been so affected by anti-love. Now, my beloved, what is anti-love? In a sense, we could say that here we hit against the limitations of earth, the limitations that this planet has such a low level of consciousness that even words have become charged with duality, infused with duality. When you hear the word “anti-love,” you think that anti-love must be in opposition to love.

Of course, there can be no opposition to real love. It has no opposite. This is one of the illusions that the ascended masters have taught you. It is brought about by the fallen beings who seek to define an opposite to love and then they say that the opposite is anti-love but “love” is love, is real love. Of course, in defining an opposite, you are not defining one opposite; you are defining two. What most people, the vast majority of people on earth, call love, is not Divine love. It is the opposite of anti-love and both have been defined by the dualistic mindset and the fallen beings.

What I come to give you is not just a teaching, but also a tool and an exercise whereby I will offer my assistance to anyone who gives this exercise, who listens to this dictation, reads it, applies the exercise. I will be there with you anytime you do so, for I am naturally not restricted by time and space. Now, the very purpose of this exercise is to help you shift your mind so that you come to be free of one of the major issues that people on earth face. This is a complex issue, but it all revolves around the love from God the Father.

The father image of God

Many of you have grown up in the West where God has been portrayed as being exclusively male, a man, often an old man, often an angry, judgmental man sitting on a throne in the sky, willing to condemn you to an eternity of torment in hell if you do not obey his commands. Is it possible to love such a God with all your heart, mind and soul? Well, there are those, for example in the Christian movement, who claim that you should be able to love this God, and if you cannot, he may send you to hell.

They are not willing to recognize that the image of God that they have taken over was not given to them by Jesus. It came from the fallen beings who defined the image of the angry, judgmental God in the sky simply as a means to get people on earth to obey them. People were so afraid of being punished by the angry God that they were willing to follow the fallen beings in embodiment and even those in the three higher realms. So you have a completely false image of God.

What is the reality, my beloved? We have, for example in this magnificent invocation you have just given, the concept of God the Father and God the Mother [Invocation for Loving Yourself, available on www.transcendencetoolbox.com]. As the ascended masters have explained to you, God the Father is the Creator, the Being who created this world of form. Therefore, as the Creator, as the one out of which the entire world of form sprang, as the one who has embedded its Being in the entire world of form, this is the active principle in the sense that it was the Creator who started the entire world of form. Therefore, when you apply the feminine/masculine polarity, which is what people can fathom on earth, then God the Creator is the father principle.

A realistic view of God

Does the Creator love you? Well, first of all, you need to recognize that the Creator is not the God of official Christianity, of Judaism or of Islam. Nor is it truly the God of any other religion, including the Hindu Brahma. They are all seen as these remote gods. Is God remote? Is there a place in the highest realm where the Creator sits on a white throne, looking down upon its creation from on high? There is not, my beloved. How could there be? I am the Presence of Love. I am existing in a sphere that is higher than not only earth, but any aspect of this material universe or the four realms of this sphere in which you live. I can tell you that from my perspective, there is a vast distance in vibration between the earth and the place where I normally reside, or rather the sphere where I reside. From where I reside to the Creator, there is an even greater distance.

Where I go with this is to give you, not the sense that the Creator is so remote from you, but to give you the realistic assessment that earth is a planet with a very low level of collective consciousness compared to the vibration of the Creator. Therefore, if the Creator’s light was to be focused on earth, it is not simply that the earth would be blown apart by the intensity of the light. It is that matter itself, the very atoms and molecules of the earth, would be annihilated because it would be raised in vibration instantly. All of the matrices that have been put upon the Mother light in order to create the earth in its present form, would be obliterated in an instant and the light would be freed.

You understand that the Creator cannot manifest itself on earth. This means that you need to come to the realistic assessment that there is absolutely no image that you could ever create on earth that gives you an adequate or an accurate depiction of the Creator. That is why I say, my beloved, that there is no place where the Creator sits in a discernible form. The Creator is the originator of form and, as such, either has no form or has every form. You see the difficulty in taking the linear mindset on earth and wanting to apply it to the Creator.

You sense that there is something higher than the earth. People have projected that there must be some kind of progression, and this progression must end up in some highest point, like you see in a pyramid. There is a point, a single point at the top, and that must be where the Creator sits, then, and looks down on everything below it. In reality, these are just images that is all that you can fathom with the linear mindset that dominates earth. They have no bearing on the Creator, whatsoever. What I ask you to contemplate, not simply now but in general, is that the Creator has no specific form and there is no form on earth whatsoever that can in any way represent the Creator. There is no form you can imagine with the consciousness that you have on earth that could represent the Creator.

The Creator is more than any form

I also ask you to contemplate the enigma, in a sense, that the Creator is the originator of all form. Now, in a sense the Creator, when creating a form, does not become that form, yet the form is created out of the Creator’s Being. The Creator is in the form. It is just that a form must of necessity have limitations in order to be defined, and even though the Creator can create a defined form, this does not mean that the Creator’s Being is limited to that form. Since the Creator is all there is and since the Creator creates everything out of its own Being, then the Creator is the form but is also more than form. It is not defined by the form, even though it has defined the form.

This, my beloved, is the essential principle of creation. You create a form. Your being is in the form but your being is not confined to the form because your being is more. This, my beloved, is also the essential principle of co-creation where you are individual lifestreams created out of the Creator’s Being. Even though you were not created directly by the Creator, you have come out of a lineage that all comes from the One Mind of the Creator. That is why we say that you are co-creating because you are co-creating within the sphere defined by the Creator. Still, though you are co-creating, the principle applies to your co-creation.

The rest of this dictation, along with an invocation based on the dictation, is found in the book: Healing Your Spiritual Traumas.

Copyright © 2017 Kim Michaels

Talking your way into the golden age

TOPICS: Free communication – Communication without expecting a certain return – Fallen beings limit communication – You can overcome the programming – Recognizing the flow of the Spirit – Changing people through the flow – Speaking from the heart is always safe – A shift in the media – Are ideas more important than individuals? – Ideas block genuine communication – The cause of Brexit – You cannot unite people through ideas – The most precious human commodity –


Listen to a recording of this dictation (subscribers only) 

Ascended Master Mother Mary, June 1st, 2017, through Kim Michaels. This dictation was given at a conference in Holland

I AM the Ascended Master Mother Mary, and it is with great joy that I come to you today. The joy that I feel is the joy of watching you as you have come together for this gathering. Not just the fact that you are physically together, but the fact that you are so spiritually together as well. You are so openly and freely talking to each other, sharing of your hearts, talking about your personal issues and you feel free and safe to talk about things that you normally would not feel free to talk about with many other people. Strangely, if you observe yourselves, you will see that in many cases you have talked to a person that you have never met before, but still felt free to share something deeply personal about yourself without fearing that it would be used against you or misunderstood.

Free communication

Why I am bringing this to your attention is that I want to show you that what you have here at this gathering is in one sense, a glimpse of heaven on earth because, naturally, we communicate freely in the ascended realm. You also have a glimpse of the future for what the golden age will be like. My beloved, how can we bring a golden age if people cannot freely communicate; if they cannot communicate at the level of the heart rather than communicating, as is so often the case, at the level of the outer mind or the ego.

Consider your conversations and the way you interact with each other here compared to the way, in many cases, you yourselves have to interact with people out in the world. See how many games are being played around people that prevents a free and open communication at the heart level. There was always some agenda, there was always some unresolved pattern of psychology that is being outplayed, and this prevents people from connecting at the heart level.

It is obvious, is it not, that there needs to be better communication for there to be a golden age. This is obvious to you once you have experienced a more free level of communication that is actually a heart-based level of communication rather than being based on the ego or the outer mind. You see, my beloved, what I desire to see for you, as the one who holds the Mother Flame, is that all of you can feel free to share yourselves, to share who you are. This does not mean that you need to go out in the world and talk about deeply personal issues with every person you meet, but I wish you could be free to share more of yourself regardless of the reaction you get from other people.

You see, my beloved, here, in a community like this where you feel safe because you feel you will not be attacked for sharing of yourself, it is much easier to share. What I am seeking to point out to you is that the sharing from the heart is a flow that comes from the higher part of your being through your outer mind. Truly, it is a flow that, once you establish it, is independent of how the other person receives it. In other words, you can learn by a relatively simple switch of the mind, to disconnect the flow through the heart from the desire to have a certain reaction from the person with whom you are communicating.

Communication without expecting a certain return

You can actually learn to come to the point where your real goal is not to change the other person, or to convince the other person of anything. Your real goal is to establish the flow from your higher being through your heart and having it be expressed in this world. You can learn to find the joy in feeling that flow. You can learn to find satisfaction, fulfillment and completeness in having the flow go forth from you without having any expectations of what the other person’s reaction should be, and what kind of a return you will get.

Surely, as you have experienced yourselves, when the other person responds positively, then two or more people who are freely sharing, can very quickly build an upward spiral that uplifts all of them and pulls you higher and higher. Many of you have experienced this today, even in this brief time you have been together. Yet, still, there is a joy in feeling the flow go out regardless of whether anything positive comes back to multiply the flow. You can learn to be willing and daring to share from the heart no matter what other people’s reactions might be. You can come to the point where you are not expecting a particular reaction from other people. You are not wanting them to react a certain way. You are not needing them to validate or affirm you because you have come to that point, as the messenger described, where you realize that the best gift you can give on this planet is to be yourself, to share of yourself, and to have a flow from your higher being through your heart.

As was also said, it is very important for you to realize, my beloved, that you do not need to have any particular state of perfection. You do not need to reach a certain level on the spiritual path, although you generally need to be above the 48th level, which all of you are. You do not need to reach a certain level of Christhood in order to have the flow through the heart. It is truly a matter of being willing to have that flow by opening yourself to allow the flow to happen. In order to allow it to happen, most of you will have to find a way to neutralize this concern for other people’s reactions.

Fallen beings limit communication

Now, my beloved, we have given many, many teachings in these last few years about dark forces seeking to limit you, about fallen beings seeking to manipulate you. My beloved, there are many ways that the fallen beings have attempted to manipulate you in order to prevent you from expressing your Christhood, but if there was one overall simple mechanism that is very easy to understand, it is simply this: They have managed to get you into thinking that when you express yourself on this planet, you should be concerned about their reactions. Therefore, you should adapt your expression to other people’s reactions. You may think this is the people around you, but really when you step back, my beloved, you see that it is a mechanism created by the fallen beings where they want all people to think that they have to adapt the expression of their hearts to the expectations and standards of the fallen beings.

You do not know this consciously, of course. Most people do not know this consciously but this is what they have managed to create, my beloved, so that you do not feel free in expressing yourself. If you do not feel free in expressing yourself, well, then it is very difficult to have the flow because the flow needs an open door to flow through. It needs freedom to express, because many times when you are in the flow of the spirit, you find yourself saying things that you had not planned, that you had not thought out, that you had not even thought about before. Suddenly, they come out and you realize that this is not your little concerned, frustrated, angry, afraid mind that is saying this. This is your higher being that this is coming from. Sometimes you become surprised yourself at what wisdom and insight can come from you in these situations when you allow the free flow.

Sometimes this is how you have the greatest learning experiences, not by hearing some external being speak through a dictation, or another person, or by reading a book, but actually when you have that flow from your higher being and it is your higher being speaking through you. It is speaking exactly in a way that goes right into your mind and resolves one of these enigmas you have had, resolves one of these limitations. Suddenly, it helps you see something you could never see before because nobody had expressed it in words that were exactly right for you and that clicked in your mind so that you were instantly seeing this mechanism, and instantly free from it. The greatest teacher you have, my beloved, is actually your own higher being, the teacher within yourself. The being that you already are but that you have been manipulated by the fallen beings into thinking that you are not allowed to express while you are in a physical body on a planet as limited and as dark as earth.

The rest of this dictation, along with an invocation based on the dictation, is found in the book: Accepting Saint Germain’s Golden Age.

Copyright 2017, Kim Michaels

Solving the enigmas of the path to Buddhahood

TOPICS: Seeing contradictions or seeing beyond them – Misunderstanding non-attachment – Seeing the limits of the linear mind – When enlightenment blocks enlightenment – The limitations of understanding – Enlightenment is not a concept – Mind over matter – Attaining mental freedom from the past – Everything is appearances – Taking the teachings too seriously – The trap on each stage of the path – Enlightenment is not a goal – 


Listen to a recording of this dictation (subscribers only)

Ascended Master Gautama Buddha, May 6th, 2017, through Kim Michaels. This dictation was given at a conference in Seoul, Korea.

The Buddha I AM, Gautama is my name. I would like to take this opportunity to talk about some topics that may not seem to be saying anything about Korea. But perhaps in not saying anything about Korea, I shall nevertheless be saying something about Korea for those who are able to grasp it.

If you study the magnificent discourse given by Jesus on the Path to Christhood, you will see, my beloved, that there are certain stages of this path. Especially, when you approach and go beyond the 96th level, then there will be some challenges that you will be facing, that you will have to deal with, in order to climb higher towards the 144th level. We can consider these challenges as certain paradoxes, as certain enigmas, that you will need to resolve before you can rise to a higher level of the path. There are a number of these enigmas, and I will not go into all of them but I will comment on some of them.

Seeing contradictions or seeing beyond them

Now, you see, my beloved, when we of the ascended masters approach unascended humankind and attempt to give you a teaching, then we face a very specific challenge that few people in embodiment have understood. The fact of the matter is that when you are an ascended master, you have transcended the linear, dualistic, analytical mind. Therefore, you have a more spherical awareness; you do not see everything through this filter of polarities, of extremes, of value judgments and a value scale. You do not have a linear mind that compares one statement to another and perhaps sees a contradiction because the two do not seem to be saying the same.

We know, of course, that people who are unascended are indeed in this state of mind of very easily seeing contradictions because they interpret everything with the linear mind. They think they have to take this statement literally, they think they have to take that statement literally; and when you take two statements literally, they seem to be in contradiction. Now my beloved, there are many spiritual students who have begun to study spiritual, or for that matter religious, teachings and then they have seen what they perceived to be contradictions. Many in the western world have used the seeming contradictions of religious scriptures to reason with science or materialism that all religion is made up and that none of it really makes sense.

This of course is the extreme outcome of using this linear mind. Even many religious or spiritual people do find contradictions, often between two different spiritual teachings. This makes them think they have to choose that one of them is right and the other one is wrong. There are even those who begin to see contradictions within one spiritual teaching and it confuses them, it even causes some to give up on the path. My purpose here is to give you some remarks that can help you get beyond this stage, for it is indeed a stage on the path where, in a certain sense, you have risen above the linear mind but you have not consciously broken through and freed your conscious mind from the linear way of thinking. You are not consciously seeing the limitations of the linear way of thinking and therefore you can still be disturbed by these seeming contradictions.

At a very general level, my beloved, I can tell you that, of course, there can be certain instances where there may be statements that are contradictory. We cannot, when we bring forth a teaching through an unascended messenger, guarantee that there could not be certain errors that creep in and there might be a few contradictions here and there. But when you come to a more mature level of the path, you will not let one error or one contradiction cause you to reject the part of the teaching that is still valid. That having been said, in the vast majority of cases, what seems like a contradiction only seems like a contradiction because it is viewed through the filter of the linear mind.

The constructive response when you see a contradiction is to say: “I need to raise my consciousness so I can gain a higher perspective on the issue. There must be something I have not seen, something I have not understood and when I see it, it will resolve what right now seems like a contradiction.” Then, you open yourself up to direct, intuitive guidance from the ascended masters, from your I AM Presence, from your Christ Self to resolve the enigma. Or you study further teachings because you realize there may be other teachings that could help you resolve the enigma.

Misunderstanding non-attachment

As one example of what many people have seen as contradictory, you can take the mission of the Buddha itself. I taught, even 2500 years ago, that the goal of my teaching was to give you a path that could help you rise above the normal state of consciousness by attaining complete non-attachment. Yet my beloved, if I personally had achieved complete non-attachment, why would I bother to teach?

In other words, many people interpret the concept of non-attachment to mean that you do not care what happens on earth. They reason that if the Buddha truly had non-attachment he should not care what happened to other people so why bother to go out and give them a teaching that might help them escape the wheel of suffering? Why would the Buddha not simply be non-attached and move on, leaving people to make the same discovery he had made and thereby free themselves if they could. If they could not, he would leave them to continue on the wheel of rebirth, suffering until they had finally had enough and awakened themselves.

You see my beloved, non-attachment is not the same as not caring. It is, however, not a caring that is a human caring. It is not based on fear. It is not based on wanting to force other people or wanting to force a change in the world. The fact that you are non-attached does not mean that you will choose to do nothing. It means that you might choose to do something to help others, or you can choose to move on. If you choose to help others, you are not coming from the human level of wanting to see a specific result. You are actually not teaching for a specific purpose, you are not seeking to achieve a specific result from your teaching. You are teaching because you want to share what you have discovered, you want to share who you are. You are therefore not seeking to force others; you are offering them an alternative to the prevalent state of consciousness on earth.

There are those for whom this will seem like a subtle, perhaps even nonsensical distinction. This, I recognize, is the case. I cannot help you resolve these paradoxes if you are not at the level where you are willing to do what I just described and raise your consciousness. If you are always projecting out that the problem is out there, that the problem is with the teaching or the teacher, then you cannot resolve these paradoxes. You will then have to enter the School of Hard Knocks and receive a sufficient number of knocks until you become willing to say: “Perhaps it is me that needs to change, perhaps the block is in my consciousness rather than being a fault with the teacher or the teaching or other people or the world?”

Seeing the limits of the linear mind

Some of you might know the story told about my life that after I had qualified for Buddhahood, after I had entered nirvana and considered going out of nirvana in order to teach, I was confronted with the entire force of this world, saying that there was no point in me going out and teaching. The state of consciousness I had reached was so fundamentally different from the state of consciousness that all people are in, that there was no way they could understand or grasp my teaching. In other words, it could not make a difference.

My response to this was: “Some will understand.” During the past 2,500 years, some have understood but only a few. We are, however, now at a point in time where many more are ready to understand and that is, of course, why I now present myself as an ascended master, as one among many ascended masters and attempt to give you a teaching that is adapted to the modern age.

Again, before I decided to do this, I had to face this force that is not a conscious being. It is simply that when you as an ascended master consider what you can do for unascended mankind, you need to tune in to where mankind is at in consciousness. Then, you are confronted with the difference between the collective consciousness and your own state of consciousness and there is a certain moment where you feel the impossibility of bridging the gap. Therefore, you have to deal with that, you have to in your mind find a way around it so that you look at where people are at in consciousness and you consider ways of helping them rise above that and tune in to some aspect of your Presence, your Being.

This dictation is one expression of this, as all of my other dictations have been and as all dictations from ascended masters are. What I am seeking here is to help you see the limitations of the linear mind because the linear, rational, analytical mind is indeed much more dominant in today’s world than it was 2,500 years ago.

The rest of this dictation, along with an invocation based on the dictation, is found in the book: Healing Your Spiritual Traumas.

Copyright © 2017 Kim Michaels

You have earned our gratitude

TOPICS: A new invocation – The conference was a success – The goal of the ascended masters – 


Listen to a recording of this dictation (subscribers only) 

Ascended Master Elohim Astrea, May 6th, 2017, through Kim Michaels. This dictation was given at a conference in Seoul, Korea.

I AM the Ascended Master Astrea, Elohim with Purity on the Fourth Ray. I come to congratulate you with the fact that you have earned a special dispensation from me. The invocations and the decrees that you have given here in Korea before the last conference, during the last conference, between these two conferences and at this conference, have reached a critical mass where I have decided to multiply the light that you have invoked by a factor of ten. I have decided to release this light in one concentrated burst of energy that can then accomplish a purification of the Korean peninsula that would not be possible when the light is released in increments. Thus, I invite those of you who are willing, to be the open doors for this release of light to spread throughout Korea in the physical octave.

I therefore ask you to visualize that I am standing high above the earth as a human-like figure but radiating a very bright white light. I have in front of me a ring that is covered in flames of brilliant white and brilliant sapphire blue. I have a sword that also is covered in flames of white and sapphire blue. The ring is situated horizontally and I now place the sword on the ring so they lock together almost like a wheel. I now, with my hand, grip the sword and I use it to spin the circle and sword in a very quick radiating circular motion. It spins so quickly that it quickly becomes too fast for the human eye to see it, and thus you see it just as a radiation of white and blue.

Then I direct this circle and sword of Astrea to descend vertically towards the physical octave. It creates a shaft of light as it descends and then as it reaches the physical octave, it instantly splits into millions of copies of itself and they radiate in all directions out from this point, covering the entire Korean peninsula.

It is not that this action is meant to accomplish one particular task. It is actually meant to reinforce everything that we have given during these two conferences and to purify the collective consciousness, to purify not only the physical octave but also the emotional, mental and identity octaves of these two nations of Korea and all of the people who live here but even beyond Korea to the other nations that are involved with this situation, primarily China, the United States and Japan. This is a very powerful action that will create a domino effect that will gradually break through these barriers of impurity that are preventing the spread of the light and the spread of a new awareness that there is a new way to look at the situation of the divided Korea.

A new invocation

Having now completed this action, my beloved, I wish to give you another dispensation, namely that I, Astrea, will sponsor a new invocation that can help you purify any nation and that you, of course, here in Korea can use to purify your nation. I will direct the messenger to make this invocation in a universal way that can be used by any nation and I will therefore vow that, when two or three people come together to give this invocation for their nation, I will multiply the light they invoke by a factor that I will determine as I see the dedication of the people and the needs of the nation. This will be a significant opportunity for all those who are willing to make that effort to purify their nation.

The conference was a success

I also wish to congratulate you who are the students of Korea − all of you who have given our invocations and decrees, studied our teachings, whether you were able to come to a conference or not – I wish to congratulate you for having brought us to the point where we have now had these two conferences, the Alpha and the Omega thrust in Korea. You have, at this particular conference, just as you did at the last conference, exceeded our goal. As we have said, we always have a lowest potential and a highest potential, and at this conference you have gone beyond even the highest potential we envisioned. For this I wish you to feel our gratitude and our recognition that you have been willing, not just to make the physical effort but also to make the effort to shift your consciousness along with the dictations we have released.

My beloved, there is a very simple dynamic that is taking place when we are having a conference and we are giving dictations in front of an audience of a certain size. We are always releasing a certain amount of light but the question really is: “Can those who are experiencing that release of light, can they send it out through their chakras so it goes into the mass consciousness?” The factor that determines how effective you are at sending out the light is how much you are willing to take in the ideas we released during a dictation and shift your consciousness based on those ideas.

We have sometimes seen students who sit there and listen to our ideas but they resist the shift in consciousness that we are seeking to bring about. That, of course, diminishes the effect because then your chakras cannot serve as loudspeakers or broadcasting stations for the impulse coming from us. This will then limit the effect on the collective consciousness of our release of light. But at this conference you have had a more homogenous group, as you have been aware yourselves, and therefore you have been much more willing to come into oneness by all of you shifting your consciousness individually. At least many of you have been willing to do this so that when you have been listening to a dictation, you have taken in more than just the words, more than just an intellectual understanding. You have actually shifted your four lower bodies to align yourself with not only the words of the master who is dictating but the vibration, the Presence, of the master. It is this alignment with the master that opens your chakras so that we can release light through them into the collective.

My beloved, we consider this conference to be a complete success and we congratulate you upon having been willing to come to this point where we Above and you below can have that figure-eight flow that is the most powerful impetus for change yet seen on this planet. There is, as we have said, always the Law of Free Will. We of the ascended masters have the power to instantly consume all impurities on this planet. I am an Elohim, my beloved. As a human being, it is simply impossible to fathom the creative power of an Elohim. I could, at this very moment, release so much light that it would consume all of the perversions of the Fourth Ray on this planet. If the other six Elohim did the same, it would consume all of the perversions of all of the Seven Rays and instantly transform the planet but what would humanity learn from this? Absolutely nothing, for most people.

The goal of the ascended masters

That is why my goal as the Elohim of the Fourth Ray, is not simply to purify the planet and raise up the planet. My goal, as is the goal of all Elohim and all ascended masters, is to assist embodied human beings in raising their consciousness so that you become more conscious of your situation on earth, your potential to change that situation, your potential to co-create a Golden Age with Saint Germain, with all ascended masters. It is our goal to help as many people as possible reach the level where you are consciously co-creating with us a Golden Age on earth. It would serve no purpose if we created the Golden Age for you, for how would that assist you in becoming more aware of your co-creative abilities? You becoming aware of your co-creative abilities is the entire purpose for the existence of the Earth and for the entire world of form, especially this unascended sphere.

We naturally see that purpose, and we are dedicated to promoting that purpose. Therefore, we have not the same vision as many human beings who, when they begin to see a certain problem on earth, they instantly want that problem to be removed or the condition to be destroyed, including sometimes being willing to destroy other human beings in order to further this cause that they now see as being of epic importance.

The only truly important thing is the growth of consciousness of the individual co-creative being. That is the entire purpose for your existence, for our existence, for the existence of this world of form that has been so lovingly and beautifully provided for us by that wonderful Being that is the Creator of all of us.

With this, I once again express the gratitude of the ascended masters for your coming together that allowed us to come together with you and form that figure-eight flow that is an aspect of the River of Life, an aspect of the Holy Spirit and truly is our greatest joy in our service to life.

 

Copyright © 2017 Kim Michaels

A Buddhic perspective on the military

TOPICS: The demons behind the military-industrial complex – Why war is never justified – War seeks to destroy people’s spiritual potential – War never has a benign purpose – Dark forces behind the military – Forces against reunification – The potential for dramatic changes – The agenda of destroying human beings – The military is based on hatred of the Mother – A balanced way to look at the military – 


Listen to a recording of this dictation (subscribers only) 

Ascended Master Maraytaii, May 6th, 2017, through Kim Michaels. This dictation was given at a conference in Seoul, Korea.

The Buddha I AM, Maraytaii is my name. As the path of the Buddha is open to both men and women in embodiment, naturally once you become an ascended master, you can continue to raise your consciousness until you reach the level of Buddhahood. I would, however, caution you that even though we present ourselves as male and female masters, what you transcend when you ascend is the concept of men and women that you have on earth.

Thus, you should not think that you can project those earthly concepts upon us, for we are not nearly as tied into the roles that are defined on earth for men and women. We have a much greater flexibility and can take on an appearance that is suited for a particular purpose.

We generally do not switch between male and female roles in order to avoid confusing you, but in the many tasks we perform in the ascended realm, we naturally do take on the appearance or the concentration of our Beings that is required for the task.

The demons behind the military-industrial complex

What I wish to discourse with you on today is an aspect of society in virtually every nation on earth that is very much a hindrance to the progress and transcendence of that society. My discourse is, naturally, very relevant to the situation between North and South Korea but it is truly applicable to any nation on earth.

What I wish to make you aware of is the role of the military and the businesses that are making a profit off of supplying what the military needs. This is what has sometimes been called, the military-industrial complex.

If you take a look at world history, you will see that in many cases the military has decided to stage a coup where they have taken over the government. This has even happened in a number of democratic nations, such as you have seen here in South Korea as well. In most cases where this has been done, the military has played a very conservative role, in other words being against major changes to society that would spread the power. Thus, what has in most cases happened is that the military instead of defending the people has defended the power elite. This, of course, you can make calls on so that this will not happen in your nation. There is especially a need to make calls for this here in Korea.

Envision, my beloved, that you have a situation where the regime in North Korea has collapsed. You now face the question of how to deal with the re-unification of the two Koreas. Do you realize, my beloved, that one of the biggest difficulties in such a scenario would be that both the North and the South has a very large military?  They also both have businesses or at least institutions that are producing and supplying what the military needs, such as weapons, uniforms, food, shelter and housing and any other things. What you will see is that if there was a re-unification of Korea, suddenly the North Korean military and military-industrial complex could easily be seen as obsolete. Also, in South Korea, is there really a need to have as large of a military if you do not have to deal with the threat north of the border?

As Mother Mary explained so eloquently in her book on stopping war, anything human beings do, any endeavour where they focus the attention of many people, will create a collective entity. As more and more energy is fed into it, it eventually can reach the stage that we call a demon, which is a being that very aggressively seeks to perpetuate its own existence.

How was the demon created? By people pouring their energy into a particular fear-based matrix. How will the demon sustain its existence? Only by getting people to continue to pour their energies into this fear-based matrix that created the demon in the first place. The military as an institution goes very far back into history, but I wish especially to focus on the fact that ever since you have had nation states (nations with a clear sense of identity), those nations have in most cases had a military.

There are nations where the existence of a military force goes back many centuries and therefore you can see how much energy has been poured into this by the people over this long time span. Therefore, you need to recognize that any country that has had a military for a long time has created some very powerful demons that are owing their existence to the military and to the energies that have been fed into it by the people. Now, my beloved, there are many, many people on earth who have grown up to take it for granted that you need a military, you need an army; you need to be able to defend yourself against attack.

Why war is never justified

Well, my beloved, there has, of course, been certain time periods in the history of the earth where there have been certain peoples or certain nations that have been very aggressive in expanding their power over other nations by conquering them with a military. Therefore, one can say that for a nation to survive, it has had to have a military that could deter such an attack or even turn it back if it occurred. I am not trying to say that we can take a completely idealistic view of the military and say that it has never been necessary at the practical level. However, I wish to go to a higher level and consider whether a military truly is necessary and this is where you simply cannot understand the dynamic around the military unless you understand the teachings we have been giving about fallen beings.

My beloved, as Mother Mary explains in her book and as we have explained before, war is not a naturally occurring phenomenon on any planet. War is an invention of the fallen beings and the real purpose of war is not actually to conquer other people, to extend ones territory or extend ones system. You may think that it was the purpose of communism to conquer the entire world and turn it into a communist world, but this was not the real cause behind the communist aggression. The real cause of war as designed by the fallen beings is one thing and one thing only: destruction. There is no positive, constructive purpose for war whatsoever, there never has been, there never will be.

This means that when you look at the situation from a spiritual perspective, you see that war is never justified—never justified. You may go into the human perspective the more immediate, practical perspective and you may say that from such a perspective war is justified. I would like to make a distinction, a very clear distinction, between these temporary, situation-based justifications that human beings define based on the circumstances in this world. What I wish you who are spiritual students to be aware of, is that there is a higher perspective, the ascended-master perspective and according to this war is never justified.

You may look at a human situation, a historical situation on earth, and you may ask: “Well, was it not justified that the so-called free world defeated Nazism in the Second World War? Was it not justified that the so-called free world resisted the spread of communism so that the entire world was not conquered by the Soviet Union or other communist states?” My beloved, the shocking truth from the Buddhic level is that it was not justified from the ascended perspective.

You might say that given the state of the collective consciousness, it was unavoidable. It was perhaps even necessary for the outplaying of the dualistic state of consciousness so that people might come to see the futility of it. Nevertheless, it cannot be construed, my beloved, (and you need to listen very carefully here) it cannot be construed that the ascended masters did in any way feel that these wars were justified from our perspective. The reason for this is that we are not dualistic beings.

I realize full well that many of our students, especially in previous decades have projected upon us that we share the same dualistic reasoning that they have allowed to enter their minds but we have never shared it, my beloved. Regardless of what you may feel and project upon us, we know very well the dualistic dynamic created by the fallen beings.

War seeks to destroy people’s spiritual potential

We know very well that the real purpose of war is destruction. Not just the destruction of the physical environment or a nation or a planet but the destruction of human beings; the destruction of their potential to raise their consciousness towards the level of Christhood and Buddhahood. My beloved, has anything had a more destructive influence on people’s ability to follow the spiritual path than these huge wars you have seen over the past century?

Look at how many people were killed prematurely. Look at how many people were displaced. Look at how many people had their entire energy and attention consumed by these wars. You recognize, my beloved, that the purpose of a war is never just what it is claimed to be at the surface level. The Second World War was not a fight between good on one side and evil on the other. It was the result of a manipulation by the fallen beings that have caused human beings to polarise towards two dualistic extremes whereby the fallen beings manipulated them into seeking to destroy each other. The fallen beings have done this over and over and over again on this planet.

War never has a benign purpose

What I am telling you here is that there is never a benign or constructive purpose for war. This means that there is never a higher necessity to have an army. It is not a natural condition that a nation should have to have an army in order to survive, it is an artificial condition created by the fallen beings.

What does this mean my beloved? It means that the entire consciousness behind armed forces is based on fear. If you did not have fear, you would not have a military. There is no way to create a military that is not based on fear. You may say: “But what about those empires that have created an army not to defend themselves but to attack others?” Even there, there is fear. You cannot engage in aggression against other human beings, you cannot engage in killing other human beings, unless you are driven by fear.

You may have some excuse of extending civilisation or spreading communism or spreading freedom and democracy by engaging in war, but behind that motivation is some fear-based motive. Your minds are taken over by fear—that is why you arm yourself. Whether you arm yourself for the purpose of conquest or for the purpose of defence, it is always based on fear.

My beloved, again anything human beings do from a fear-based state of consciousness will create these entities and demons and they will then eventually become so powerful that they can overpower individuals very easily, they can overpower groups of people and they can even overpower entire nations. What was it that caused the Soviet aggression against non-communist states? It was fear. When you recognize, at least sub-consciously, that your entire ideology is based on fear (as communism is indeed a fear-based ideology), then you naturally, unavoidably feel a need to extend your ideology to all nations because you are threatened by the existence of nations that do not recognize your ideology. You feel fear that maybe your ideology could be wrong and that is why these other people are resisting it. In order to overcome your fear, you want to force all others to accept your ideology.

Why did the communist forces in the North absolutely have to conquer all of Korea?  Because they could not live with the fact that some people in Korea did not embrace their ideology.  So you see there is always a fear-based dynamic. Whenever you have an armed force, my beloved, you must have an enemy to fight. Otherwise, what is the justification, and why would people then pay their taxes to support the armed forces?

The rest of this dictation, along with an invocation based on the dictation, is found in the book: Accepting Saint Germain’s Golden Age.

Copyright © 2017 Kim Michaels

A more open debate about the roles of men and women

TOPICS: Fanaticism and the relationship between men and women – Changing the roles of men and women – A new debate about equality – Talking about sex – Highest potential for love relationships – Youth initiative without rebellion – The cost of the traditional approach – How demons use relationships to steal energy – The purpose of a nation – The need for sexual satisfaction – 


Listen to a recording of this dictation (subscribers only) 

Ascended Master Venus, May 5th, 2017, through Kim Michaels. This dictation was given at a conference in Seoul, Korea.

I AM the Ascended Master Venus, and as you understand from the discourse given by my beloved Sanat Kumara at the last conference, we are naturally concerned about fanaticism. When we came from Venus, we came with a flame of love, and one of the most extreme manifestations of anti-love found on earth is indeed fanaticism.

Fanaticism and the relationship between men and women

Now my beloved, it is naturally necessary to make the calls for the binding of these fallen beings and the demons that have been created out of fanaticism. In order to gain the full victory over these fanatical forces and actually overcome the fanatical mindset, we need to also take the Omega approach. You see, my beloved, it would be possible for sufficient numbers of ascended master students to make the calls that would allow the ascended masters to bind all demons and dark forces of fanaticism on this planet. We could also, based on your calls, be allowed to take certain fallen beings out of embodiment that have embodied that fanatical mindset. But this, in itself, would not guarantee that humankind at large (or at least the lower portion of people in embodiment) would automatically get out of the fanatical mindset. Because this is a mindset that is very subtle and that in some parts of the world, in some groups of people, is very ingrained.

Strange as it may seem, the Omega aspect of the solution to overcoming this mindset is actually found at the very personal level in the relationships between human beings and especially in the relationship between man and woman in a love relationship. You see, my beloved, the fanatical mindset is an expression of anti-love. Where does anti-love begin? Well, it begins in the relationship between men and women.

There is no way that a country or a large group of people can be plunged into the fanatical mindset if they have a true sense of love at the very personal level in the family, in love relationships. You can look back to nations, such as Germany in the 1930s, and you will see that there was a certain dynamic between men and women—not all of course, but many. This meant that the personal relationship, the home, the family, was not an expression of love as it could have been. There was a lack of love between men and women because they were locked in certain roles. If they had not been locked in these roles, if there had been the flow of love, then they would not have been susceptible to the fanatical mindset put upon them through this instrument of the dark forces, the fallen being himself, Adolf Hitler.

You can go to the Soviet Union and see that, again, in Russia before the Bolshevik Revolution, there was not this free flow of love between men and women. This was what was partly responsible for so many people in Russia descending into the fanatical mindset after the Bolshevik takeover, and being willing to kill their own countrymen in such large numbers.

You can see the same in China before and after the takeover by Mao and the Cultural Revolution and the mass killings that took place there. You can look to North Korea today and you can see that there is a dynamic between men and women that prevents the free flow of love. Then, you can, of course, look to South Korea and you can see that, although you do not find this problem to the extent you find it North Korea, you still have a situation here where men and women have been locked in certain roles and this prevents them from having the free flow of love between them.

Changing the roles of men and women

How, my beloved, can there be a free flow of love between a man and a woman when neither the man nor the woman see each other as equals? If the man has been programmed from early childhood that he is superior to women in certain ways, and if the woman has been programmed to fill up a subordinate position in the relationship and in society, how can they have a free flow of love? It simply cannot happen, my beloved.

What we see from the ascended level is that, if there is to be a peaceful reunification of Korea, then it is necessary that there is a new awareness in South Korea of the need to change the roles of men and women. You need to talk openly about the roles of men and women and therefore move closer to a point where men and women can be equals and can have a relationship that is based on equality so that they can have that free flow of love between them.

This is, of course, also a potential that we see, although we will say that we are not quite as optimistic on this point as some of the other issues we have brought to your attention during this conference. We realize that people are so locked in these traditional roles that it will be very difficult, especially for the older generation, to even discuss the topic. However we also see, as we have said before, that we have brought so many young people into embodiment in Korea that it is in fact possible that there can be a more open debate on this topic because these young people are not as locked in these roles, they are not so concerned about fulfilling these roles and therefore they have a more even or equal attitude towards men and women. We ask you who are the spiritual students to, of course, make the calls for this so that there will be a new awareness.

A new debate about equality

We know that we have already talked about the need to give equality to women. I hope you can see that this goes beyond the, so to speak, physical or political equality. This is not a matter of creating laws, my beloved. This is a matter of creating debate, a free debate in society where you begin to openly talk about some of these issues that have so far either been taboos or have simply not been talked about. There was no one who was even able to clarify that there was a problem, and what the problem was. Thus, there was no one who was even able to formulate the basis for debate. You see, my beloved, sometimes people can be so blinded by a certain role that they cannot even ask the questions that will open up for debate about the issue.

Naturally, there is already some debate about the role of men and women, but it has been too much patterned on what you have seen in the West where it has been focused on equality in the laws, in the workplace or in the political arena. We are not here talking about creating a quota for how many business leaders should be women or how many leaders in the educational institutions should be women. We are talking about going right into the home and looking at the relationship between one man and one woman who are either married or are otherwise living in a dedicated relationship.

How can these two people relate to each other and find a greater degree of freedom to express love for each other so that the relationship becomes based on love and carried by waves of love throughout the entire span of the relationship? What you too often see now (not of course only in Korea but in many parts of the world), is that two young people fall in love and then they decide to get married. Once they get married, they suddenly realize that the marriage was a prison and they entered it without knowing it. Now that they are married, they are locked in roles that are so strictly defined that they almost don’t have room to breathe. Suddenly, this euphoric feeling of being in love starts to evaporate instead of, as it ideally should happen, it was transformed into a deeper sense of love between the man and the woman. We need you to make the calls that there will be an increased awareness of the need to debate this and to create a situation in society where you can freely talk about the relationship between men and women.

We realize, of course, that this will (as in most other countries where there has been more of a progress on this area) be started and carried primarily by women who, generally speaking, are more open to talking about personal issues and feelings. Therefore, we ask you to make the calls for the protection, for the cutting free and for the awakening of those women in Korean society who, if they are not already beginning to do so, have the potential to step forward and carry this debate forward. It is also extremely important to make the calls that these women – and some men as well who can carry this debate, who can take this to a national level – will be emboldened so that they have the courage to go beyond traditional taboos.

Talking about sex

For example, how can you possibly talk about the relationship between men and women without talking about sex, which traditionally in all of Asia has been much of a taboo. It is even to the point where although you cannot talk about it publicly (which is one thing), but even men and women cannot talk about it with each other in many nations in Asia.

My beloved, what have we said over and over again is the foundation for the spiritual path? Well, it is that you become aware of issues so that you see them clearly, and then you can make better decisions based on your raised awareness. If there is not the openness to even talk about the issue, how can you then go through that process? If you take Jesus’ discourse on Christhood, you will see that what he is talking about is that as you go higher on the levels of consciousness, you come to a point where you begin to focus more and more on oneness. My beloved, all people have some longing for oneness, especially those who are above the 48th level have a longing for oneness with something beyond themselves. This is part of the driving force that causes you to engage in the spiritual path. You long for something, you long for oneness with something beyond yourself because you realize that it is only by having contact with something beyond yourself that you can escape the closed system of your own mind, your ego, your outer mind, your linear, analytical mind.

Do you see, my beloved, that as soon as you go above the 48th level, it is actually very important to be aware of the role of oneness, oneness with something greater than your separate self. With this in mind, can you not see that the highest potential for the relationship between men and women is that their love relationship will lead to spiritual growth because they establish some degree of oneness with each other? When the man and the woman in a relationship have some degree of oneness with each other, then they serve as a frame of reference for each other. They give each other that experience of oneness beyond the personal separate self and this can then lead to spiritual growth.

Highest potential for love relationships

The highest potential for love relationships is that they actually become a sort of guru-chela relationship where both the man and the woman are the guru and both are the chela. Sometimes, the one will take the role of guru, sometimes the other. Therefore, with the interchange between them, they help each other grow so that after establishing some degree of oneness with each other they also begin to establish oneness with their I AM Presences, even if they don’t know the term “I AM Presence” or don’t know about ascended masters. Still, their relationship becomes an engine for spiritual growth.

Now, this is the highest potential that you can envision and make the calls for. You also need to realize that the culture that you have had basically all over the world, but also here in Southeast Asia, is in direct opposition to this because it has set up − and this has been inspired by the fallen beings − these barriers between a man and a woman so that they do not establish this oneness. You see my beloved, what does it take to establish oneness with something outside yourself? It takes that you are willing to go beyond the boundaries of your own mind. When both the man and woman have been programmed from early childhood that as a man you have a certain role to fulfill and as a woman you have another role to fulfill and as long as both of them are absolutely identified with these roles and do not think they can break them, then how can they go beyond the roles and establish oneness?

You see that, when there is shame associated with going beyond your predefined role, then you cannot have a free-flowing relationship. How can a man and a woman establish oneness, which must be spontaneous, if they feel it is shameful to go beyond some predefined behaviour or some predefined way of talking to each other.

Do you realize, my beloved, that as you grow up you are affected by your parents in very, very profound ways? Because as small children, you tend to imitate your parents and you tend to think that this is the way to act. You look back at how your parents interacted with each other, how they talked to each other when you were present and you think this is the way men and women should talk to each other. You do not know how your parents talked to each other in private, but you often assume that they talked in private the way they did when you were present.

You think this is the only way that a man and a woman can interact, and for most of you that means that you have grown up with parents who basically did not give you the impression that they had a personal relationship. They were like two separate people living in the same house, carefully fulfilling their roles and being very careful not to overstep the boundaries of those roles. This could possibly have been reinforced by your grandparents and therefore this is a culture that is carried on from generation to generation.

Youth initiative without rebellion

Now, as I said, there are many people (and many of you are among them, of course) who have embodied in Korea at this time because they have the potential to break this pattern and bring society forward. We ask you to make the calls for these people to step forward and to start making their voice heard in the debate. We also ask you, once again (as we said yesterday) to make the calls that the young people will find a way to communicate with the older generation so that the older generation do not feel more threatened than absolutely necessary. There is a way to be open and direct but still be somewhat respectful and diplomatic where you state your own feelings, your own thoughts, your own beliefs without accusing the older generation.

As we have already talked about, there was a time of the youth rebellion in the West, but the leaders of this movement were unfortunately largely controlled by the fallen beings. From the very beginning, they created a confrontational approach so that they came out and accused the older generation, accused the establishment of being wrong and of seeking to restrict them. It is very important for you to hold the vision and make the calls that the young people step up to a much higher approach where they are not accusing, they are not saying that something is wrong, but they are simply saying that for them, this old approach is not the right approach. They have a new view, they have a new approach and they want to be able to freely talk about this and to freely live their lives and their relationships the way they see is right.

My beloved, this can bring a shift where at least a certain segment of the population will suddenly see the need to debate these issues. They will be able to see that they have not been happy, they have not been fulfilled in their relationships. They have felt trapped in their marriages. They have felt that there was no love, there was no growth in their relationships and therefore they are open to actually debating a higher way of interacting with each other in a relationship.

Women will be emboldened to come forward and say: “But why should I be locked in such a role when it does not give me happiness and creative fulfilment? Why must I be relegated to a servant role in a relationship when I have the potential to be much more active, much more creative?” When women honestly speak out about this, then you will see that men will also be willing to acknowledge that they have also felt trapped in a traditional male role and they will want to pursue ways to find greater fulfilment.

You see, my beloved, there is always a, we might say, downside of every step that is taken forward. I know very well that there are those in society who will say that the family is the unit, is the backbone of society, and these ideas that I have been talking about will lead to what you have seen in the West where the family will be destabilized, relationships will break up and lead to divorces, single families, single mothers struggling to make ends meet, children that are shuffled back and forth between different families, mixed families and all of these kind of problems that you see in the West.

The cost of the traditional approach

First of all, it does not have to lead to all of these problems. There are, of course, some people that will be divorced if you break down the old view of marriage as something that can never be dissolved. You need to recognize two things: first of all, the traditional role where once you are married, you have to stay married for life because there is such shame associated with a divorce that nobody can endure it. This also has a high cost. The high cost is that there is a certain percentage of women who are being directly abused by their husbands. Those women have virtually no recourse in the old system. They have no one they can talk to because there will always be the blame put on the women that they are not able to satisfy their husbands. There is virtually never an openness to recognize that it is actually always the case that if a man is physically, verbally abusive towards his wife, it is not the wife’s fault but because the husband has psychological problems.

I am not saying there are not relationships where the wife also has psychological problems, but if the man is directly abusive, it is his psychological problems that cause the abuse. Of course, you have to realize also that, in many cases, abuse comes from frustration. Frustration comes from feeling trapped because you cannot exit a situation, but you cannot live with it either and you don’t see any way to change it. So again, can you see how it is necessary to open up the debate even if there is a cost in the form of a higher divorce rates and the break-up of families with all that entails?

You also need to recognize from a spiritual perspective that many spiritual people need to have more than one relationship in their lifetime in order to experience maximum growth. I am not saying this goes for all, but there needs to be an awareness that in many cases your first marriage will be based on karma and therefore there can come a time where that karma is now resolved. Therefore, in order for you to attain maximum growth towards Christhood, you may need to move on either to not have a relationship or to have a relationship that is not based on karmic circumstances where you can achieve a higher degree of oneness with your partner and therefore it can be a relationship that leads to growth.

When we are perfectly realistic, and we reach back to what I said earlier about the potential for relationships to be an engine for spiritual growth, it is often the case when two people have severe karma with each other, their relationship cannot function this way. In some situations, once they have balanced the karma, it is better for both sides to move on. There is, of course, always the potential that two people, after having balanced their karma can find a new way to interact with each other so that their free flow of love is no longer blocked by the karma that often makes oneness, the expression of love, or even free communication very difficult.

There just needs to be the recognition that in some cases it is necessary for people to have several relationships in a lifetime, and this is something that the people need to be free to feel so that they can flow with their intuitive promptings. I realize, of course, that some people will misuse this and will use it as an excuse for getting out of a relationship where they are not willing to make the effort to look at their psychology that could make the relationship work. Again, my beloved, there is nothing that we can give you that cannot be misused by some people, but the fact that some people will misuse something does not mean that it should be stopped. You see so many examples of how giving people greater freedom will be misused but is that an excuse for not giving them that freedom? It is only an excuse if you are a fallen being who never wants to give people freedom.

You recognize, my beloved, that even if people actually abuse freedom, this still gives them an experience that they, for some reason, need until they can find a higher approach. Even what is happening in the West where many go from relationship to relationship, can eventually lead these people to have a higher understanding and a higher vision. It does not need to be as chaotic and that is why you can make the calls for a more balanced approach so that you do not have to repeat the mistakes that have already been made.

You understand that, when there is a new awareness on a worldwide basis, there will always be some nations that are the first ones to tune in to the change, and when they implement it they often implement it in a, we might say, the hard way, so that they are relatively unbalanced, relatively immature in how they implement it. As they gain more experience, then there can be a new group of nations that tune in to this, but they do not need to repeat the same mistakes as the first group. They can take a more mature approach. There is a potential that you can find a more mature approach here in Korea where you do not have to repeat the same mistakes as you see in the West.

How demons use relationships to steal energy

I ask you to make the calls also that there will be the binding of the demons that are behind this, the demons that absolutely want to maintain the traditional family structure because it actually allows them to prevent the Christhood of both men and women, by keeping them locked in these roles. It allows them to prevent their spiritual growth. It also creates this frustration, this sense of being trapped that allows the demons to extract people’s energy.

You will see many, many relationships, my beloved, where from the surface level, from an outside perspective, they seem to have an ideal relationship according to the traditional definition. When you go into their private life, you see that they are often going around nagging at each other and even abusing each other emotionally in certain ways. This, of course, allows the demons and entities to absorb people’s energy and they often egg them on to have more arguments or more disagreements, or even this coldness and sense of distance between each other that also causes people to misqualify their energy and to release this misqualified energy that the dark forces can then use to sustain themselves.

There are some very powerful demons that do not want to break this up. There are also some fallen beings in the identity realm who do not want to break this up because they have worked for thousands upon thousands of years to create in the identity realm these predefined roles for men and women and they do not want to see their creation destroyed.

Then, you can make the calls for the binding of the fallen beings in the mental realm who are the ones who will come up with very sophisticated, very clever, so to speak, arguments for how this will destroy society if you break up the traditional family structure. They will say, at least between the lines, that it does not matter if men and women are suffering in their current roles because it is far more important to maintain the overall stability of society. This, my beloved, is what we have told you so many times is the hallmark of the fallen beings. They want to create a system and then they want to say that upholding the system is far more important than the happiness and wellbeing of the people who are living in the system. They want to say that their system is an end in itself.

The purpose of a nation

My beloved, what is the purpose of a nation? Is it to keep all of its citizens locked in roles that make them unhappy and unfulfilled? Well, if you are a fallen being you will say: “Yes, that is exactly the role of a nation. It is to keep people trapped so that they are our slaves and we can milk them for their energy.” If you are an ascended master, you will say that the true purpose of a nation is to promote the psychological, the spiritual wellbeing of the citizens and to give them the greatest possible opportunity to express their spiritual, built-in, God-given creativity. This will not only be best for the people, it will be best for the nation. Therefore, a nation where most of its people are unfulfilled and frustrated in their daily lives, cannot fulfill its highest potential. It cannot bring forth creative solutions, my beloved.

Just imagine what we have talked about before, about businesses needing to be more creative so they can adapt to the changing business climate on a planetary level. Just imagine, my beloved, that you took a major corporation in Korea who somehow became aware of this need to be more creative. They decided that they would set up the most creative work environment they could possibly think up. They created this environment, and instead of hiring people the traditional way, they looked wherever they could find the most creative people in Korean society and they hired these people. They put them in this environment and said: “Now, be creative.”

Now imagine that these people are all adults that are married and they are living in a personal relationship. At home in their relationship, they are locked in a traditional role, there is no free flow of love in their relationship, there is no creativity in their relationship. How can these people have this kind of non-creative situation in their home and then come to work and suddenly switch into being creative? You see, my beloved, everything goes together. When you open up the free flow of love in the personal relationship, you will open up for creativity in all areas of society. When people have a free flow in their personal relationship, they will bring that with them into all their activities.

The need for sexual satisfaction

My beloved, I have given you much to ponder but I do wish to emphasize that there needs to be free and open debates. You need to make the calls for this so that those who can promote this debate are emboldened to step forward. You also need, as ascended master students, to hold a more long-term vision. You know very well that in many cases, the people who will start a debate in a certain area will be the ones who are unbalanced, who are more radical, more extremist and they like to provoke and therefore they come out with the most outrageous, unbalanced arguments. We are asking you as spiritual students to hold a more clear vision here that it is necessary to have this turbulent phase in order to break through the old taboos. We ask you to hold the vision and make the calls that very quickly people will find a more balanced, a more mature, way to debate the issues.

You realize, my beloved, that whenever there is a new debate that is starting, there are powerful forces who want to squash it as quickly as possible. It sometimes takes some rather unbalanced and radical, provocative people to break through that resistance and then suddenly there are other people that can step forward and say: “We think there is a better way to debate this issue.”

We ask you to hold the vision and make the calls here that people will be emboldened to talk about these issues that have often been taboos. As I said, sexuality has been a taboo in most Asian countries as it was a taboo in western countries not so long ago. It is necessary, my beloved, to talk about sex because the traditional roles that have been defined between men and women are actually locking both men and women in a situation where they are not fulfilled in their sexual relationship.

Why do you see such high prostitution in Korea? Why would men need to go to prostitutes if they were satisfied at home? You cannot actually be satisfied as a man if you do not have a woman who is equal with you. Then she just becomes a tool, but that, in the long run, is not satisfying. So the man longs for something else. He does not know what he is longing for, so he tries to experiment and go elsewhere. But again, by a more mature debate where men and women can begin to talk openly about this, a new change could happen.

It is necessary to recognize that women have not been fulfilled either. A man can be physically fulfilled and a woman is not fulfilled. But a man is not necessary emotionally and spiritually fulfilled, and he will not be fulfilled emotionally and spiritually unless his woman is also fulfilled, both at the physical, at the emotional, spiritual level. Unless there is a free debate about this, and how men and women can relate to each other in a different way, both in their homes and in the bed, my beloved, then you cannot break through this very powerful force that wants to keep people locked in these roles.

You need to as ascended master students, first of all be willing to look at these issues yourself. I am not saying that you necessarily need to debate this amongst yourselves, but I am not necessarily saying that you could not do it either. You need to hold that vision that there are those who are the courageous ones who will be willing to step forward and again, they can state how they experience the situation. Why they feel unfulfilled and how they would like to see the relationship change.

This will make many people uncomfortable, as I can feel it is making some of you uncomfortable. Nevertheless, once again there is a need to go through a phase of making people uncomfortable. In the long run, it is the only way to make them come up higher where they can feel truly fulfilled as free spirits that are free to express themselves, both at home, in their workplaces and in society. This is what we desire to see for you, and I truly hope that you desire to see it for yourselves for otherwise there is, of course, not very much we can do for you.

My beloved, I thank you again for being the open doors whereby I have been able to use the chakras, at least of those of you who were not too uncomfortable, to radiate a very powerful impetus or impulse of energy into the collective consciousness and thereby embolden some of these people who are already engaged in these issues, who are already in a position to open up the debate. We sincerely hope that we will see this in the coming years. I thank you for your attention and for your willingness to be the open doors for radiating the Golden Age consciousness in Korea and Asia.

 

Copyright © 2017 Kim Michaels

Understanding why you cannot understand Christhood

TOPICS: The greatest threat to dark forces – There is no ultimate state – You cannot understand Christhood – The beginning of Christhood – Learning to read vibration – The initiation at the 96th level – Progressive views of Christhood – Experiencing Christhood – Acknowledging Christhood – Continual self-observation – Continual dying – Glamorous images of Christhood – Raising others instead of yourself – 


Listen to a recording of this dictation (subscribers only) 

Ascended Master Jesus, May 5th, 2017, through Kim Michaels. This dictation was given at a conference in Seoul, Korea.

I AM the Ascended Master Jesus Christ. It was not my intention to speak at this conference, having had my say last time. But because of the many questions you asked the messenger about Christhood, I decided it would be helpful for you to give you a discourse on this topic.

The greatest threat to dark forces

My beloved, the first thing we need to recognize is that personal Christhood, where you personally put on the Christ consciousness, is the greatest threat to the dark forces and the false teachers on this planet. They have therefore done everything they could possibly think of to prevent people from knowing about Christhood, seeing it as a realistic possibility for themselves and understanding the process of attaining Christhood and what it means. They have done everything they could think of to create all kinds of diversionary tactics where they set other spiritual goals that are perhaps in some cases leading to a heightened state of awareness but are not as much of a threat to them as Christhood. They have also done everything they could think of to define Christhood in a certain way so that people attain, or strive for, an ultimate goal and then suddenly think that now they have attained it and do not need to go further.

There is no ultimate state

My beloved, the most important thing you can realize about Christhood is that it is an ongoing process. You can attain Christhood while being in physical embodiment but there is no ultimate state of Christhood that you could attain while in physical embodiment. We may say that there is no ultimate state of Christhood in the sense that there is no ultimate state of consciousness except perhaps the Creator consciousness but even that is transcending itself as it is creating. So you need to recognize here that there is no ultimate state.

Life, awareness, self-awareness is an ongoing process. There is always the possibility of self-transcendence. There never was – never was – a static state in the world. There never was a static state in the world and there never will be. There never was a beginning and there never will be an ending. There can be a beginning of a cycle and the ending of a cycle but there was no ultimate beginning before which there was nothing. There was a beginning of our world of form where the Creator existed in itself but this was not the ultimate beginning, for there never has been an ultimate beginning. There never will be an ultimate ending.

You cannot understand Christhood

This is something that the linear mind finds it very difficult to grasp and that is why you need to understand that you cannot understand Christhood. You can, however, come to understand that you cannot understand Christhood. And when you understand that you cannot understand Christhood and why you cannot understand Christhood, then you may begin to grasp at least glimpses of what Christhood is.

You need to recognize here that most people on earth have been programmed to think through the linear, analytical, rational mind. This mind cannot understand, grasp or deal with Christhood. Christhood goes beyond what the linear mind can deal with. That is why you also need to understand that the way you look at Christhood now is not the ultimate way to look at Christhood. It is not possible for me, even as an ascended master, to give you an ultimate discourse on Christhood because Christhood is a process of gradually raising your consciousness.

We have given you the knowledge that there are 144 levels of consciousness that are possible on earth. We can therefore say that Christhood is the process where you start at the 48th level and then raise your consciousness gradually to the 144th level. At the 144th level, you have attained the highest degree of Christhood that is possible on earth in its current state.

This means, my beloved, that when you start at the 48th level, you can have a certain understanding of Christhood, but it is not the full understanding. As you grow towards higher levels of consciousness, your understanding of, your grasp of, your experience of, Christhood will change. You will not gain the full grasp of what Christhood is until you reach the 144th level. Therefore, you can see that it is not possible to give a definition of Christhood that can be grasped by all the many levels of consciousness between the 48th and the 144th levels.

Why am I saying that this begins at the 48th level? Because for those who are below the 48th level, they cannot grasp Christhood. They may, of course, hear the concept of Christhood. They may also decide that they want to attain Christhood, but they cannot grasp what Christhood truly means. Therefore, they can build some kind of intellectual, rational, linear perception of what Christhood is. They may even think they are making progress towards this goal but they are not, my beloved. You can raise your consciousness from the lowest level to the 48th level, and you are making progress in a spiritual sense, but you are not even beginning the process of putting on Christhood.

The reason for this is that you are still too tied to the outer mind that thinks it can understand everything by creating these labels, and then adding a value judgment to the label they have created based on the dualistic mindset. Then, they think they can define Christhood based on a set of outer criteria. They think they can set up a list that says: When you live up to this criteria, put a checkmark. Then go on to the next criteria, put a checkmark. When you have completed the list and you have a checkmark at every point, then you have attained Christhood. This is the only way they can conceive of it, those who are below the 48th level.

There are many false teachers in the world who attempt to give you some kind of path that leads to some kind of goal. They may not call it Christhood, they may call it higher awareness, cosmic consciousness, enlightenment, whatever. But it is all a mechanical path – an outer path − whereby performing certain exercises or rituals, or studying certain teachings, learning them by heart. They think they can qualify for entry into heaven by living up to a set of criteria defined here on earth.

The beginning of Christhood

Now, my beloved, when you go above the 48th level of consciousness, you can begin the process of Christhood. You still may have many misconceptions about Christhood, but you will, in order to go above the 48th level, have the essential quality that is the beginning of the process of Christhood, and that is your willingness to listen to your intuition, even when your rational, linear mind tells you something different. In other words, what happens at the 48th level is that you begin to follow your intuition in certain cases and therefore you ignore, put aside or neutralize your rational, linear, logical, intellectual, analytical mind.

You will see, all of you who are here − and you are all above the 48th level of consciousness or you would not be here − you will see that there are decisions you have made to engage in the spiritual path that your friends or family find it difficult to understand because they have a rational, linear reasoning that says that you should not be doing what you are doing, or believing or accepting what you are accepting. You may not be able to give them a rational, linear understanding that they can accept for why you are doing what you are doing. You just know that this is the right thing for you.

This, then, is the essence of Christhood between the 48th and the 96th level. You are rising higher in consciousness by dealing with the Seven Rays as we have described in the Course of Self-Mastery LINK where the Chohans give you a gradual path. As you do this, you are increasing your intuition, which is truly your connection to your I AM Presence and your ascended teachers. This means that you become more and more willing to ignore your own rational mind, but also to ignore the impulses, the projections that are coming to you from without, whether it be from other people such as family or friends, from society, the mass consciousness, dark forces or whatever it may be.

As you rise higher, there will be more of these projections but you get better and better at not letting them affect you because, as you rise towards the 96th level, you increase your ability to read vibration, to read the energetic level of another person who is talking to you, an idea that comes to you, or even a projection that comes to you from the lower forces. You get better at reading the vibrational level, and then you get better at sensing when it vibrates below a certain level, and when it vibrates above it.

The rest of this dictation, along with an invocation based on the dictation, is found in the book: Healing Your Spiritual Traumas.

Copyright © 2017 Kim Michaels

The relationship between children and parents in Korea and Asia

TOPICS: Holding a spiritual flame – Rethinking the family structure – Conflict between young and old – Reforming education – The fear of changing the family structure – Wanting your children to be fulfilled – Better communication with parents – Korea can be a way-shower – The final end of communism –


Listen to a recording of this dictation (subscribers only) 

Ascended Master Liberty, May 4th, 2017, through Kim Michaels. This dictation was given at a conference in Seoul, Korea.

I AM the Ascended Master Liberty, also known as the Goddess of Liberty, but I do prefer simply to be known as Lady Liberty, for the term “Goddess” has so often been misused on earth by those who did not want to see the liberty of the people. Naturally, you can see, my beloved, that liberty is a flame that has indeed been held and carried by many people in South Korea. If they had not done this, what would have truly stopped the invasion from the North from taking over the entire country? It was not only the soldiers; it was not only the help from the United States, although these all played a role.

Holding a spiritual flame

Do you realize that when it comes to physical events, they are only the tip of the iceberg? There are always components in the other realms, and I can tell you for sure that had it not been that a sufficient number of people in South Korea had carried some aspect of that Flame of Liberty, then communism could not have been turned back in the physical octave.

You saw what happened later in Vietnam and you have seen what has happened in other countries. The main reason for the communist takeover has been that there has not been enough people who have carried that Flame of Liberty. They simply knew that communism was not in the best interest of the nation, they knew it was not right and they were not willing to submit to it in their minds, always holding the vision that their nation could be free. My beloved, holding a spiritual flame, embodying a part of a spiritual flame and carrying that flame with you, is a matter of truly knowing that that flame is the ultimate reality, that the spiritual flame is far more powerful than any force on earth. Therefore, in your mind, in your heart, in your Being; you never allow your vibration to switch into the perversion of that spiritual flame which always of course is colored by fear.

As there is a Flame of Liberty, there is, of course, a perversion of it. That perversion is not in a dualistic polarity with the Flame of Liberty, for the Flame of Liberty has no opposite. There is still a perversion and that perversion is, of course, many shades but it is actually a fear of freedom, a desire for security, for absolute safety and unwillingness to make decisions and see the consequences but wanting someone else to make decisions for you, therefore wanting to have a strong, centralized leadership.

There were people in North Korea at the time of the war who carried that flame but because there were more people in Korea who were loyal to the Flame of Liberty, they could not prevail. We ask you to consider, you who are our spiritual students, that you, many of you, are already carrying a certain spiritual flame in your hearts and all of you are capable of doing this if you are willing. It means that you apply to the master who is representing this flame for the earth. It also means that you make a decision in your mind that you will not ever allow your mind to take in the perversion of that spiritual flame whatever that may be, for it is your preference.

My beloved, it is a matter of knowing that the spiritual flame is ultimate reality and that it does not matter how conditions look in the physical octave. You know that when you hold firm and carry that flame and radiate that flame regardless of the outcome in the physical, eventually that flame will prevail. There may be some instances where there will seem to be a setback because certain physical conditions cannot be avoided, but it is not always a matter of avoiding the temporary physical conditions. It is a matter of a more long-term awakening in the minds of the people. You will see, for example, there were some people that because they carried that flame of anti-liberty in North Korea they had to have the experience of being under a centralized dictatorship for so long until they decided that they had had enough of embodying that anti-flame and they are now maybe beginning to open up to carrying the Flame of Liberty that can liberate their country.

If you wish to hold any spiritual flame, you need to be firm in your mind and heart that you will not go below, you will not go into a fear-based vibration. You will stay true to the flame that you know is the ultimate reality. You see, my beloved, this is a potential that is a step up from giving invocations and decrees, and it is time that many people around the world realize that when you have followed ascended master teachings for a certain time, when you have faithfully used the tools we have given for the invocations and decrees, you have the potential to select a certain spiritual flame and then to begin to carry that flame. You can gradually begin to embody it to greater and greater degrees so that you become the open door for the master that represents that flame to radiate that energy to your surroundings.

This is truly a step up that requires a certain degree of Christhood, and those who are ready for it will know it. Many of you have already had a devotion to a certain flame that you have been holding, but by becoming more conscious of it you can be the open door for it to a greater degree.

Rethinking the family structure

I wish to also to give you some teachings about the potential we see here in South Korea. You need to realize what was said earlier, namely that the reason we of the more female masters are stepping forward at this conference is because you have had these two conferences so close together and they form an Alpha and Omega polarity. The male masters gave you the overall vision and gave you certain overall concepts about society at our last conference. We who are the more feminine masters, we wish to give you the more practical day-to-day perspective. This is not because we consider that there is a particular problem or a particular crisis in South Korea in these areas. It is because we see the opportunity that a breakthrough can happen in this nation.

You should realize, my beloved, that when we bring a problem to your attention, it is not necessarily (and in fact rarely) because you have that particular problem to a critical degree. It is often because we see that you have the opportunity to transcend that problem. Therefore, you should always consider that our teachings are never a criticism but always an opportunity.

I wish to talk about the situation in South Korea that was exposed to a large degree by the process that led to impeachment of the President. You can see that there was a tendency that the younger people were the ones who took a stand, who were willing to demonstrate in the streets, who were willing to speak out and demand change whereas there was the tendency for the older generation to, so to speak, hold fast to the old ways and not want change or to rock the boat or overturn status quo. You need to recognize here that there is a necessity for a certain break-up of the family structure and the view of the family that you have traditionally had both in South Korea but throughout all of Asia.

My beloved, you see this most extremely carried out in those who actually worship their ancestors as a form of divine beings or substitute for a divine being. But you see it in all cultures in the sense that there is this feeling that you have to be loyal to the family. This loyalty goes very, very deep into people’s psychology, as we have already talked about, where you are so afraid to disappoint your family members that it is almost like the family members are sitting inside your head and evaluating everything you are doing. You are always evaluating what your family is going to think about this before you dare to act or speak out.

Conflict between young and old

My beloved, you will see that there are many people among the younger generation who do not have this strong loyalty to the family that some of you have who are maybe a little older. You can see that there is a potential here for a conflict between the age groups in Korean society. Naturally, we do not wish to see an open conflict, such as we have seen in other nations, for example during the 1960’s in western countries with the so-called youth rebellion. We do not desire to see a youth rebellion that could so easily escalate into violence. We instead desire to see Korean society transcend this entire issue, transcend this consciousness. That is why we need you to make the calls that both the young people and the old people will go through an awakening where they naturally come to see the family in a different light.

As we have talked about now several times, there are those people who are the forerunners, who are the opinion makers. They suddenly wake up and they see the issue in a different way and they see that these new ideas are simply obvious, that it is necessary that this must happen. One of the issues that you can make calls on is, of course, that the young people will be willing to recognize that they are a different kind of lifestream, a different wave of lifestreams, than their parents and their parents’ generation. They will be willing to recognize that they are spiritual people, that many of them have a higher spiritual awareness than their parents.

Now, my beloved, I wish you to realize here that the strong emphasis on the family that you have in many Asian countries has in many cases been one of the underlying factors that has created these stagnant societies that the male masters talked about at the last conference. Society becomes stagnant and cannot get out of the pattern it is in, it cannot renew itself, it cannot reinvent itself, it cannot flow with the times. This begins right in the family where the children are brought up not to question their elders in the family, they are not to question their teachers in school, not to question their supervisors at work, not to question the government and the supreme leader, often the dictatorial leader of that society.

This is what you see going on in North Korea right now, but I tell you that even in North Korea there is a group of very courageous young souls, or rather souls who have embodied as young people. They are also ready to bring about a change there, but I wish to focus here on South Korea although, of course, you can make the calls for the young people of North Korea to be cut free to fulfill their missions.

What I want you to first of all realize is that there is a need for the young people in South Korea to recognize that they have a more spiritual approach than their parents in a universal way because they know from within what is right and they do not need to be told by an external authority. In fact, they are not willing to be told by an external authority because they are not willing to compromise their inner knowing as their parents have often done. You can make the calls that these young people are emboldened to step forward and recognize who they are without, my beloved, going into the unbalanced reaction of suddenly feeling like the fact that they have a greater awareness makes them superior to their parents.

This is what was the undoing of the youth rebellion in the West. Many of these young people carried with them from past lives a certain arrogance and therefore they became susceptible to certain leaders who made them feel that they knew better than their parents how to run society.

It is not, my beloved, a matter of seeing that the young people should take over society and should do things differently than their parents’ generation. It is not so that we from the ascended levels see that the older people in South Korea have outlived their usefulness and they just need to get out of the way of the young people. That is not our vision at all. We wish to see a balanced society where the younger people can work together with the older more experienced people. The older generation has valuable experience that is not becoming obsolete by the fact that there is a generation of young people who are open to new ideas.

You need to first of all make the calls for this awakening where the young people will avoid rebelling and openly provoking their parents’ generation or even the older generation than their parents. Instead, they will find a middle way, a more diplomatic way, to express their new ideas. They will find a way to do so that will make it easier for the older generation to see that these ideas are necessary for the progress of society.

Reforming education

Now, the area where this can most easily break through is in the area of business. Not so much, in the beginning, in the big corporations but in the smaller more independent businesses where there is greater openness to innovation and new ways of doing business. This can be a focus for your calls so that the young people will go into these areas and will bring their ideas here and that there will be some who can see that this is a way to create a new type of business and to actually make a good profit on serving your customers in a different way. When this movement becomes big enough, then it will gain the attention of the bigger corporations where you can of course also make the calls for a gradual change of leadership where there is more of an opening to the younger people.

It is, of course, also necessary to make the calls for the educational system to shift so that there will be more room for these young people to express their new ideas even at the educational level. There will be more of an openness where they will, if necessary, go beyond the teachers and organize themselves and find ways to support each other in bringing forth new ways and new ideas. But again, this can as its highest potential be done in a non-confrontational way where even the teachers in the educational system realize that if they are to keep up with education in the western world, they need to be open to some of these ideas.

There are, of course, many young people also in other parts of the world who also in the coming decade or so will begin to reform education there and therefore you will not stand alone here in Korea. You will see that there will be other nations where there will be new demands made by the young people about the education and how they want to be educated. They want to have an education that is more related to an actual job situation instead of just being a theoretical, abstract education and then when they stand there with a degree, there is nobody who will hire them because they do not have the knowledge and the skills that are needed in the business world.

The fear of changing the family structure

These are simply common-sense ideas that you can make calls for. As you make the calls, more and more people will see that these changes are obvious and need to happen. Now, on a deeper level you can make calls for the changing of the view of the family that has been prevalent in South Korea and Asia in general. There is a great fear on the part of the older people and you can make the calls for the older people to be cut free from this fear. I tell you that this dark force that Parvati was talking about, there is a certain set of demons that are seeking to maintain a grip on the older generation where they are very afraid of dramatic changes in society and especially dramatic changes in the family structure.

Now, you realize, my beloved, that one of the great advantages of a highly developed society is that you overcome this very old dynamic where the old people know that when they get too old to work, their only way to survive is to have their children support them materially. When you have a more developed nation where the older people get a pension so they are not financially dependent of their children, then there is the potential that the older generation can overcome their fear on having a change in the family structure. You will see that in the old family structure, it is actually so that the parents have a certain subconscious desire to limit their children. They want to see the children do well materially so they can support their parents but they do not want their children to go beyond what the parents can see as the vision for how their children should live their lives. This, of course, is a force in society that works against progress and change.

Naturally, the older generation are still so blinded the dark forces that they will feel threatened by a change in the family structure, even if they are not financially dependent on their children. They will feel that this will destroy the stability of society, as many people have felt that it was the loyalty to the family that was the pillar of a stable society. As we have said many times, we are not looking for stable societies, my beloved, because we do not want to wait centuries before we can have the manifestation of the Golden Age of Saint Germain. We want it to happen much sooner and therefore we need to overcome all forces that are working against progress because they are afraid of change.

Yu can make the calls for the older generation to be cut free of this fear of change so they can realize that if their nation is to come up to a higher level, then this can happen in only one way, namely by the young people being allowed to fulfill their full creative potential. If the young people are going to be set free to fulfill their creative potential, then they the parents need to overcome this desire to have their children live according to their vision. Do you see my beloved: The young people have the vision of how to create a Golden Age society. The older generation, most of them, do not have that vision. If the old generation are so desperate to make the young generation conform to their own vision, then the Golden Age ideas cannot come forth because in order for the younger generation to fulfill their creative potential they need to be free to go beyond the boundaries set by their parents’ vision. They need to be free to live in a different way, even many of them (as was talked about at the last conference) without holding a traditional job but pursuing spiritual interests. Some of these younger people coming in, they will not want to have families and this will be a great shock to their parents who want them to get married and start a family of their own.

Wanting your children to be fulfilled

My beloved, you will see the need for many changes in the attitude to the children where the parents will allow them greater freedom. As this messenger knows from a personal example he was made aware of, there are many Korean parents who do not want their children to marry foreigners, but I tell you that it is a great value to society to have this intermarriage. It creates an exchange of energy and ideas with other nations that breaks up the stalemate and opens up for new ideas to come forward.

In this particular example, the woman was not allowed to marry a foreigner until after so many years of remaining unmarried that for her parents it was a greater shame that she was unmarried than if she married a foreigner. You see, my beloved, this is what you need to make calls on so that this attitude, this wanting to maintain a grip on the traditional family structure, begins to break up and that the parents actually begin to overcome their fear-based look at the family and their fear-based look at their children. It is fear that is behind this attitude, and the parents need to become able to say: “But what is actually the most important for our children, is it not that the children are happy? Then we cannot allow ourselves to think that our children can only be happy if they live the way we think they should live. We need to realize that our children can be happy only when we allow them to live the way they think they should live and we love them and support them. We may even gain great joy from seeing our children unfold their creative potential in a way that we could not even imagine.”

Naturally, I know that there is a certain percentage of the older generation who will not be willing to make this change, but with your calls many will be able to make this change as some have already done. There are others who are getting very close and it just needs that last impetus of being freed from these dark forces who are having these hooks of fear in people’s emotional bodies.

Now, my beloved, you will see that there are many among the younger generation who simply are not susceptible to this fear and this is the greatest potential for change. You have all these young people who are not affected by the fears of the older generation. Of course, you can make the calls for them to be even more emboldened, to stand forward, again not in a rebellious way but where the children maintain a respect for their parents. They understand their parents grew up in different time where there were forces at play that have not affected themselves as younger people.

Therefore, instead of rebelling against their parents or looking down upon their parents, considering their parents to be old-fashioned or primitive, they can have respect for their parents. They can gradually help their parents see that this is simply their way of looking at life and that they need to live their lives based on their own vision and that this is what will truly make them happy. There is nothing wrong with young people explaining this to their parents and confronting their parents with the question: “But do you not want me to be happy? And how can you expect me to be happy if I live my life in a way that is not my way to live?”

Better communication with parents

There are many among the older generation who can be changed by having their children talk openly to them in this way. It is not rebellious but indeed being willing, as we have talked about earlier, to openly express what you feel about what your parents have been doing to you. On the one hand, you can express your love and your gratitude to your parents for the fact that they have given you what they gave you as you grew up. You can also explain to them that there are certain aspects of the attitude they have that makes you feel a certain way. You feel that this is limiting you and therefore you are asking your parents to realize that you need to live your life in your own way, not in their way. It is not that their way was wrong for them because times were different. “In the times we have today, I need to live my life in my way for this is the only way I can be truly happy and fulfill my potential.”

My beloved, you can make the calls that the young people, for they are the ones who are capable of bringing the change, will find a different way to talk to their parents’ generation and even the older generation. Instead of being confrontational, they can seek to just speak from the heart and explain how they feel without even attempting to persuade their parents. They are simply explaining how they feel and setting their parents free to gradually, over a period of time, come to see that: “Oh yes, I actually do want my child to be happy, and if this is the only way my child can be happy, then I may not accept the way my child is living but I do accept that this is the only way my child can be happy.”

Korea can be a way-shower

Again, we are not trying to say that there is a big crisis here in South Korea. We are saying there is a big opportunity because I tell you we have, as the ascended masters, for decades seen the potential we are now pointing out to you. We have brought people into embodiment and many of you who are sitting here, many of you who have studied our teachings and given our invocations, are precisely brought into embodiment in order to fulfill this role of bringing your society forward. There are tens of thousands more young people who are brought into embodiment precisely because we saw the potential that South Korea can be the open door for new ideas that can spread not only to North Korea but even beyond this to the greater Asian area, my beloved.

You may not realize, I think, as Korean people, that you have certain tendency to be modest and humble to some degree. You may not realize that there is much attention on South Korea in this area of Southeast Asia and even beyond it. There are other nations who are realizing that you have gone ahead of them in many ways and they are somewhat curious as to how this has happened. Therefore, as you are able to manifest these changes, there is a potential that they can spread to other nations.

As you, the ascended master students in South Korea, in the coming years begin to see these changes, you can also begin to make calls for other nations and we will, of course, direct you in this process. You can also see the potential that there will be groups in other nations who will begin to follow the teachings and use the teachings and you can then create a network of ascended master student groups who are supporting each other, even as you heard from the nation of Kazakhstan. You begin to work together and you focus your invocations and decrees on a particular nation because you see the need to help this nation over a particular hump in their road towards the Golden Age.

The final end of communism

There is much potential here but we do not want you to go too far ahead, but to take things one-step at a time. For right now, you who are embodied in South Korea need to focus on your nation and this great challenge of bringing about the reunification of Korea. I can assure you, my beloved, that the reunification of Korea has very great significance even on a planetary level. It is truly the last nation that is divided by the conflict between communism and capitalism. By overcoming this division, it will, so to speak, be the final nail in the coffin on the dark forces’ attempt to use the capitalist-communist duality to create division on this planet.

You might say that the break-up of this dualistic polarity has already well begun with the fall of the Soviet Union and the fall of the Iron Curtain and the reunification of Germany and the freeing of those nations in the Warsaw pact and the Soviet Union. I am telling you, that there is a significant cleanup work that is left to be done before the planet is free of the dark forces that precipitated this. Right now these dark forces are focused right here because they are desperate to maintain a foothold in North Korea and to maintain that stronghold that they consider North Korea to be, although we of the ascended masters do not consider North Korea to be a stronghold by any means.

We see that it is a colossus that is ready to topple and collapse almost under its own weight but with just a little bit of influence and inflow of energy from the ascended realm, as we have directed you to invoke it. Thus, my beloved, we give you an optimistic vision of the future. It is important for you to hold on to that vision in case there are certain bumps in the road in the coming years. I am not saying there will be, I am not saying there will not be difficulties. The situation is unpredictable even for ascended masters because we have never been able to predict free will with certainty, only with probability.

There is a high probability that the transition can happen peacefully and relatively smoothly although there will, as Kuan Yin expressed the other day, be great challenges for the South Korean nation if you were suddenly reunified with the North and had to carry the responsibility of bringing the dysfunctional economy of North Korea up to a modern standard. Nevertheless, even this process can happen relatively smoothly and even be to great benefit of South Korea because it would, so to speak, force you to go beyond the established power structure in South Korea and it would force you to think anew and bring forth new ideas. This is, again, where the younger generation could be ready to step forward and say: “But this is a situation where the experience of the older generation is not sufficient, but we have the ideas and we want to be allowed to carry them out.”

My beloved, I have again given you much. I realize that your chakras are at their maximum capacity but I thank you for again being the open doors that allowed me to direct a very powerful influence into the collective consciousness of this nation and especially of this capitol city of Seoul, which I have engulfed in the Flame of Liberty in a concentrated form that has never before been seen in this nation. I am right now seeing, allowing, visualizing, concentrating this Flame of Liberty that has been set up around the perimeters of this city and I am withdrawing it tighter and tighter towards the centre of the city, both the financial and the business district and the government district. Now the entire city is engulfed in this Flame of Liberty, and I assure you, my beloved, that against the Flame of Liberty, no perversion of Liberty can stand and thus I AM the Flame of Liberty!

I AM Lady Liberty! And this capitol of Seoul is now liberated from a certain portion of darkness that I have been allowed by the law of free will and your calls and your willingness to be the open doors to consume this day, in order to give a new opportunity to this nation and especially the younger generation who are waiting to step forward and be allowed to bring forward their creative potential. For we see a great creative potential for this entire nation and we desire to see it manifest. We hope that some of you will decide to embody the Flame of Liberty or another spiritual flame so that you can be an anchor point in the physical for what we desire to bring forward.

Thus, with my deepest gratitude for your attention, for your awareness, for your presence; I thank you, my beloved.

 

Copyright © 2017 Kim Michaels

The impeachment of the president was a great step forward for Korea

TOPICS: The dark forces behind the president – The fear of communism –


Listen to a recording of this dictation (subscribers only) 

Ascended Master Parvati, May 4th, 2017, through Kim Michaels. This dictation was given at a conference in Seoul, Korea.

I AM the Ascended Master Parvati, Divine consort of Shiva. I come to congratulate you who are the spiritual students of Korea with the changes that you have been the open doors for precipitating in your nation over these past 10 months since our last conference. Naturally, some of these changes were begun already before, by the invocations you had given so faithfully and in such great numbers that it had the critical mass to bring about these changes that lead to the impeachment of the president.

The dark forces behind the president

I wish to make you aware that there is a need for you to continue to make calls on this situation in the sense that there is some clean-up work to do, so to speak. You should not overlook the fact that your previous president was not a very strong personality. She was by no means a fallen being or even an evil person but she did have karmic ties with her father who was a lower-ranking fallen being, which you will be able to see by studying his history and his methods and even his mindset.

It was necessary for her to come into embodiment with this father, and it affected her in many ways so that her psychology was deeply split. This, then made her vulnerable to the influence of this shamanic leader that you all are aware of and this has meant that she was deeply conflicted as a president.

This was essentially why the dark forces attempted to put her in office because they thought that they could use her to further their ends in Korea and strengthen the hold that these dark forces felt they had over this nation through the business conglomerates and these powerful families that have formed the power elite in South Korean society ever since the war. My beloved, what we wish to bring to your attention is that it was your calls that was the tipping point that brought about this victory for the Light that led to the impeachment of the president.

You may think that there was some chaos associated with this. We know, of course, that many people were deeply afraid and felt it was a very chaotic and uncertain time. I tell you that it was a necessary change for the progress of Korea into the Golden Age because it was not a matter of getting rid of one particular person as president. It was a matter of defeating, literally defeating, the dark forces who through their black magic had worked through her without her having any evil intention or even being aware of what was happening. Of course, you always have some personal responsibility for opening yourself up to certain forces, and so I am not thereby saying that she is completely free of karma or responsibility.

Nevertheless, the point I wish to make is that there is a need for you to make the calls for the binding of the demons, the fallen beings and the dark forces that are behind this entire situation and even beyond this particular president. They are seeking to control South Korean society and maintain a status quo where there is a small elite that has control. By knowing this, by making the calls on it for the binding of these forces both in the emotional octave, in the mental octave and in the identity octave, you will be able to continue this work until it is completely cleaned up. We can then have a sealing of especially the astral plane so that no dark forces can use this situation and attempt to inflame a violent situation like they attempted to do last year.

You need to call for the binding of all forces who are willing to use violence in the political arena of Korea. You need to make the calls for the binding of all dark forces who are still seeking to use this situation to create a division between the older and the younger generation. You need to make the calls for the binding of the forces who are seeking to use the fear of the older generation, those who can still remember the war, so that they feel they have to submit to these dark forces and their representatives in embodiment in order to avoid being overrun by communism.

The fear of communism

My beloved, there was indeed a point where it was necessary to have some defence against communism in South Korea. I wish to make you aware that this situation and this fear was taken advantage of by certain dark forces to therefore set up a dictatorial rule that was not the highest potential for this nation. These forces have ever since attempted to maintain that grip on society through the business conglomerates and the powerful families behind them. You will see, my beloved, that they are the ones who are still seeking to control especially the older generation through this fear of what could happen if there was not some controlling force that could stand against the communism that they still feel is a threat.

I tell you, my beloved, that the spread of communism from North Korea to South Korea is no longer a realistic threat and therefore it is simply that the dark forces are taking advantage of this fear that they have in the older generation. They are seeking to promote it and perpetuate it so that the older generation will be against overthrowing status quo, changing status quo and bringing in an entirely new climate in the political and economic arena of Korea.

We wish you to make the calls for this so that we can release the Light and really truly clean up this entire dark force that is behind these situations. Therefore, we can open up the pathways whereby those who are brought into embodiment by us and are ready to take over as leaders of South Korea, both in the business world and in the political world and in other arenas, they can be emboldened and empowered to step forward and simply wake up and realize: “This is my time, this is my time to step forward and now I clearly see the ideas that would carry my nation into the next stage.” Whether they see it as a Golden Age or not is not important as long as they realize that: “Here is an idea that is so obvious that it simply must be carried out and we are the people who can do it.”

Thus, we are grateful for all the calls you have made and will continue to make. We do not wish you to over-inflate your self-importance, but we do not wish you to under-inflate it either. We need you to recognize, my beloved, that when you put yourself in the nexus of the figure-eight flow and open up for a figure-eight flow from the ascended masters, then things will indeed begin to happen in the physical octave as you have seen these past ten months.

My beloved, we congratulate you, we thank you and now I will move on and leave the Word to another ascended master who has other important things to tell you.

 

Copyright © 2017 Kim Michaels

The legal system of the Golden Age

TOPICS: Lawmaking for the privileged elite – Unnecessarily complicated laws – Only the elite can afford legal fees – Difficulties of starting new businesses – The elite cannot receive new technology – Make calls on multinational corporations – The problem of unjust court decisions – Using the legal system against other people – A new type of justice system – 


Listen to a recording of this dictation (subscribers only) 

Ascended Master Nada, May 4th, 2017, through Kim Michaels. This dictation was given at a conference in Seoul, Korea.

I AM the Ascended Master, Nada, and I wish to give you some perspective on the remark made by Jesus so many years ago when he said: “Woe unto ye lawyers.” What does this mean for the Golden Age and for the bringing in of the Golden Age? Well, it means simply that the profession that you now see as the legal profession will have to change dramatically in order to align itself with the vision of Saint Germain. This, of course, must start, not just with the lawyers who are, so to speak, interpreting the law but also with the lawmakers who make the laws.

Lawmaking for the privileged elite

What you have today is a tradition that is very, very old. The purpose of making laws and the purpose of setting up a legal system, a court system, that is interpreting these laws is affected by the mindset of the fallen beings to such an extent that in many countries the real purpose of the entire system is to give special privileges to the ruling elite of people or to give them a way to escape accountability.

There is, of course, in many democratic nations a certain limit to how they can set up the laws in order to give themselves privileges because a democracy is based on the fundamental principle that all of its citizens should be equal to the law. Yet even in democratic countries there are always those who seek to create laws in such a way that they set up exceptions for certain people or certain segments of society. You have seen this especially with the business community where in many countries there are certain corporations that are so big that they are considered too important for the country so that the country cannot risk that they will either go down or move their businesses elsewhere. Therefore, there is a tendency to create laws in such a way that these businesses are in effect, given a favorable position.

This is something that, of course, cannot exist in the Golden Age. It is necessary for you to make calls on this so that there will be a rising awareness of the need to remove all such special privileges or exemptions in the laws of democratic countries so that they do not favor particular businesses or organizations. This will require a change in the mindset, but this will be brought about by other things that we will talk about and other calls you can make. Of course, there needs to be a trust in the nations that we do not need to give special privileges to certain companies. We do not need to, in effect, give them monopolies in order for our economy to survive.

There is today a widespread belief in many countries that the economy of certain nations simply could not survive without these huge corporations. It is, of course, not correct because it is indeed very possible that many smaller businesses can make up for the loss of one big business. It is a perception created by the fallen beings in order to give them power and to give them privileges and maintain those privileges so that they, in effect, do not have to run a business that is geared toward serving its customers. Therefore, they can get away with this because there is no effective competition due to the favored position they have been given.

Unnecessarily complicated laws

Once you remove such barriers in the laws, then what remains is to look at the legal system and how the courts and the lawyers are interpreting, and in many cases manipulating, the laws. When you look at democratic countries, it is not so difficult to bring about a situation where certain organizations no longer have these special privileges. You still have the fact that you have created a culture in the legal system of most nations where those who are part of the legal system do not want to change the system in fundamental ways because they make their living off of that system.

You know very well that in most countries the lawyers are often among the wealthiest people because they can charge very high fees. They can charge high fees because the country has such a complicated set of laws and such a complicated legal system that in effect it gives a privileged position, even in some cases a kind of monopoly position, to the lawyers. They are the only ones who can interpret the system. This, of course, you need to make calls on so that countries will come to realize that this entire culture is based on a simple fact. Namely that the law system, the system of the laws, is becoming increasingly complicated, increasingly large. There is simply an unnecessary burden of all of these laws that are becoming more and more complex in all countries.

Now, obviously, you cannot create a very simple law in a complex country because there are many considerations that need to be put into the system of laws. Nevertheless, what you can make calls on is that people will realize the need to simplify the laws so that there is not as much room for interpretation. What often makes the law system complex is that the entire legal profession in a country has created a culture where, for example, they say that the laws must not discriminate. In order to avoid discriminating, we have to write various conditions into the laws so that no-one is discriminated against. Even this can be used, not only to create complexity but also to create a situation where the efforts to seemingly not discriminate actually become an openness for an almost endless interpretation of the laws so that there is no clarity in how to implement these laws.

Once you start creating such a complex system of laws that hardly anyone can interpret them, you end up in a situation where the people who are writing the laws often simply do not have the vision of how a new law they are creating might potentially contradict what is said in a previous law. You end up with these situations where everything is so complicated that no one can really foresee the consequences of a new law and how it might contradict a previous law. This, again, gives leeway for the lawyers to begin to interpret, and all of a sudden the laws that were meant to for example prevent discrimination against certain groups actually become a tool whereby those who can afford to hire the expensive lawyers can use the laws as a form of loophole. They can actually use the law that was meant to prevent discrimination to create a new form of discrimination where they themselves can manipulate the laws so that they are claiming a certain freedom that they are not entitled to because they are not actually being discriminated against. They are using it to set themselves up in an exempt position where they do not have to follow the same rules as others.

I know my beloved that this is abstract but I do not wish to go into giving you too many concrete examples because again this would become something that could be interpreted and interpreted and interpreted. What I wish you to make calls on is that there is a need for the democratic nations to wake up and realize that they need to step back and look at their legal system and look how it is being misused by the lawyers to give exemptions to a small elite who can afford to pay the attorneys. They can continue to pay these attorney’s fees and create these court cases that seem to go on forever and ever. In the end, they end up giving them special privileges that no ordinary citizens could ever claim because they simply could not afford to pay the legal fees.

Only the elite can afford legal fees

What you have created here is a legal system that has become very complicated. Even though it is based on good intentions of preventing the discrimination against certain groups of people, the complication of the system, the level of complexity of the system, is actually reinforcing the situation where there is an upper class who can afford to play the legal game.

Then, there is the broader population who simply have no recourse because they cannot afford to run a court case that costs tens of thousands, hundreds of thousands, millions of dollars in legal fees. You end up creating this privileged position where those who can take advantage of the system do so and therefore can set themselves up to either have privileges or to generate profits. They can effectively destroy competition by running these lawsuits against their competitors that no smaller businesses can afford. Therefore, the smaller businesses cannot challenge the older established businesses.

There is also a tendency in most countries, to create so many rules that, for example, businesses have to comply with that this in itself creates a privileged position for the large businesses that can afford to hire the lawyers or the experts or build the facilities that are required. In essence, you have a situation where the legal system that actually was meant to protect the people, is being used by large established businesses to destroy their competition or to prevent the competition from even arising because they cannot afford to comply with the elaborate rules.

It is necessary for you to make the calls that there is a rising awareness. Again, we do not need people to know about ascended master teachings, we do not need them to understand the dynamic of the fallen beings. But it is not beyond the capability of the people in most nations to realize that there is always a power elite that is seeking to gain special power and privileges for themselves and they will use any aspect of society, including the legal system and the bureaucratic system.

It is not beyond the capacity of most people to realize that for the ordinary citizen in a democratic country, it is in their best interest to have a relatively simple legal system and a relatively simple set of bureaucratic rules so that they themselves can figure out what their rights are. It is certainly something to make calls on so that people will realize that the tendency to complicate everything − to complicate the legal system, to complicate the bureaucracy − only serves the elite. They are the only ones who can afford to hire the attorneys to take advantage of this complex system. They are using it over and over and over again to set themselves up so that the people cannot challenge them. Thereby, this system of complexity creates a privileged position for the few and effectively shuts out the many from attaining these privileges.

The rest of this dictation, along with an invocation based on the dictation, is found in the book: Accepting Saint Germain’s Golden Age.

Copyright © 2017 Kim Michaels

Transcending the Asian mindset and communicating openly

TOPICS: When people will not address problems – The Japanese atrocities in Korea – Avoiding stagnation – Moving away from elitism – Not talking affects your personal lives – Seeing yourself as a decision maker – More direct relationships – Feeling embarrassed about sharing feelings – How the collective consciousness can be raised – Freely expressing feelings – 


Listen to a recording of this dictation (subscribers only) 

Ascended Master Portia, May 4th, 2017, through Kim Michaels. This dictation was given at a conference in Seoul, Korea.

I am the Ascended Master Portia, and I come to give you a new perspective on the Asian mindset beyond what we have given you previously. You have a concept that is almost universally known, namely that in Asia you have a tradition for not being direct, for being very concerned about saving face, not losing face. You have a tradition for showing what you see as respect for others by not being very direct in addressing certain issues or problems; but always addressing them by circumventing the issue, perhaps talking about it in an indirect manner.

Now, my beloved, this is not a particularly Asian mindset in the sense that you find it everywhere on the planet. There are some areas of the world where people have begun to go beyond it and become more open, more direct, in dealing with various issues. If you go a little bit back in time, you will see that in all cultures they have had this tendency that there were certain things you could not talk openly about. There was a tendency to feel that one had to preserve one’s face, one’s honor, one’s appearance. Even to the point where people were willing to engage in a duel against somebody that they felt had insulted them. Many, many people have died unnecessarily because of such an obsessive need to maintain face, to uphold their honor and to defend their honor.

When people will not address problems

Now, the theme of this conference is to radiate the golden age consciousness. I can assure you, my beloved, that in the Golden Age this concern about saving face or preserving honor or preserving appearances, preserving tradition, this will melt away and people will find a way to talk with each other much more directly. There will not be this sense of taking offense because someone else is more direct in expressing their view, their opinion. What I would like to bring to your attention is that this mindset, that you call the saving-face or the Asian mindset, actually has it’s origin with the fallen beings because they are the ones who always want to hide something. They are the ones who have always try to create a certain facade where people cannot openly and directly speak out against them, against their actions, but first of all: They cannot speak out against their privileged positions.

My beloved, let us take an example that you are all familiar with of the recent president. She was engaged in what is now openly called corruption. At the time this was not really seen as corruption but simply the way one did political business, so to speak, and had traditionally done so. The people who were doing this were not actually feeling or thinking that they were engaged in corruption. I am not saying I agree with them; I am simply describing what they felt. Therefore, when there was the very beginning of this talk about inappropriate actions, there were many people who felt that this should simply be silenced to death. There should not be made a public issue of this because it was necessary to preserve the face of the nation. Some people even felt it was disrespectful towards the president to bring up such an issue.

As we have said, in the Golden Age there cannot be corruption in a government. We have also said that there cannot be a truly free nation, a truly democratic nation, a nation with equality, if there is corruption. Corruption basically allows the existence of a privileged elite who are able to extract favors or pay for favors or intimidate people into giving them favors that maintain their privileges. This culture of not being willing to talk openly about issues allows that the privileged elite can continue to exist and they can continue to have privileges that basically most people do not even know about. They do not even understand what privileges the elite are holding because this is never talked about. Only those who are directly engaging with members of the elite know what is going on whereas the broad population do not understand what privileges this elite has. However, if the broad population did know what privileges they have and what effect this has on their own lives and on the nation, they would clearly see this as wrong. They would see this as a form of corruption.

Does it actually serve the nation that you are so concerned about saving face, even saving the face of the nation, that you will not openly talk about issues because you do not want to embarrass the nation. Therefore, you would rather silence these problems. This, my beloved, cannot stand in the Golden Age and it cannot bring a nation into the Golden Age. There is a need to make the calls, for you who are our students, that people will gradually go through the process that you have seen in other nations of overcoming this desire to silence things, this unwillingness to talk openly about issues.

The Japanese atrocities in Korea

You see, my beloved, there are nations that have this to a much more extreme degree than Korea. You know all how it is in Japan, you know how it is in China and how there is even more of a need to save face. It can be very difficult for you to even talk about issues with Japan, for example, even so that you in Korea feel that Japan is far more difficult to deal with than your own nation. As an example of this, you all know of the atrocities committed by Japan during its various occupations of Korea.

There are many Korean people who feel it would be appropriate for Japan to make a formal apology for this, especially for the most recent violations. You also know that this has little chance of being forthcoming in the near future because Japan is largely unwilling to even talk about the issue. This is, of course, not because the Japanese are bad or evil people, but they are so caught up in this necessity to save face that they cannot even conceive of openly admitting that they were wrong and that what they did was wrong.

You see that what this prevents the Japanese from doing is actually moving on from the past and leaving the past behind them. The Japanese are tied to their past, they are tied to a tradition that really has outlived its purpose. What is the overall effect of this? It is that the Japanese nation is stagnating in many ways. You can see this most clearly in the way Japan used to be such a large and growing economy but how the Japanese economy has stagnated. This is an expression of the fact that the Japanese mindset has stagnated, it has come to stand still. They have become stuck, and this is partly because they are unwilling to acknowledge that Japan has made errors and that Japan carries a tradition that is outdated and that needs to be left behind. If you cannot talk about such issues openly, if you cannot even look at the issue, look at the tradition and look how it has become outdated, my beloved, how can you then free yourself from it? The simple fact is that you cannot.

This is not a matter of an Asian or a western mindset. It is a matter of a universal psychological mindset that is simply a human dynamic. You can only move on from something if you are willing to look at it to see that it did not serve you, to see how it was limiting you. Then, as Mother Mary said yesterday, when you see how something is limiting you, you can spontaneously let go of that attachment. You cannot see this if you are not willing to look at it. You cannot look at it if you are so afraid of losing face that you would rather ignore something because you know, my beloved, that you cannot change fact.

The Japanese know what they did during the war, they know that they cannot look at it without admitting that this was wrong and therefore, they will not even look at it. As a result they cannot free themselves from it but this is not just a matter of what Japan did to Korea. It is a larger issue of Japan not being willing to look at its past traditions. Therefore, it cannot free itself from those traditions, it cannot move on, it cannot find new solutions, it cannot find a new approach. As a result, it is stagnating and lagging behind.

Avoiding stagnation

Now I am using this as an example because I know that the people in Korea are more dedicated to growth and they do not want to go through this same phase of stagnation that they see in Japan. You understand, my beloved, that the only way you can avoid going through that stagnation phase is if you are more willing to look at yourselves than the Japanese people are. It is not that the South Korean nation has made such grandiose mistakes that you need to be afraid to look at them.

What I am simply pointing out is that you who are our students need to make the calls so that there is an awakening in Korea that we need to be willing to look at all issues in our society and to talk about them openly without being so worried about saving face that we cannot acknowledge that there are certain things that have become outdated. They no longer serve the nation, they no longer serve the people and therefore, we need to leave them behind but before we can leave them behind, we must look at them. Before we can process it collectively, we must be willing to talk openly about this.

Moving away from elitism

You also need to recognize, as you saw in this invocation you gave and as you heard in Gautama’s dictation last year, that it is absolutely necessary for the Golden Age to be manifest that the society moves away from a division between an upper class and a lower class, a privileged elite and the general population. In the Golden Age there can be no elitism, no favoritism. How can you acknowledge that you have privileged elite if you cannot talk openly about this issue? Therefore again, you need to make the calls that people will be willing to talk about this.

Really, my beloved, it is not truly a matter of losing face. You do not lose face by acknowledging a problem and moving beyond the problem. Thereby, you actually gain honor, you gain respect, you gain self-respect, you make progress. The question is again, as we have said before, there needs to be made a realistic assessment: “What is most important to us? Is it more important to us to save face, to preserve tradition, to not be direct? Or is it more important for us to make progress towards a better society?”

Of course, there are those who will say that it is more important to preserve tradition but who are those people? They are the ones who belong to the privileged elite and who know that progress can only cause them to lose their privileged positions and they do not want to lose those positions. They do not want to share their wealth and their privileges with the people because they have adopted this arrogance (that originally came from the fallen beings) and they believe that they are somehow better than the population. They are in a higher class of beings and therefore they are entitled to these privileged positions. They are entitled to these inordinate profits and to gather so many riches to themselves that they do not even know what to do with it. Therefore, they believe that in order to uphold their profits and their privileges, it is acceptable and unavoidable to have a nation that is out of balance so that wealth is concentrated in the hands of an elite, instead of spread to the entire population.

My beloved, we have said before that if you make a realistic assessment of what is best for a nation’s economy, you will actually see that a more equal distribution of wealth will lead to a greater growth of a nation’s economy than allowing that wealth to be concentrated in the hands of a small elite. You can go to the United States today, which calls itself the richest country in the world, and it is the richest country in the world but it is unfortunately the top two percent of the American population who has control over the majority of those riches. This has actually had a greater impact on slowing down growth in the American economy than any other factor. If you took some of the money that is concentrated in the hands of the top two percent and distributed it more evenly among the population, then that population would start spending the money they have on improving their standard of living. This would very, very quickly lead to an increase in all sectors of the economy, except maybe the defense economy and therefore, everyone would prosper from this.

It is simply not sustainable in the long run that you allow this concentration of wealth in the hands of a privileged elite. This, by the way, is one of the reasons for the stagnation in the Japanese economy. Japan also has a very small elite that has managed to extract these inordinate profits from Japanese companies instead of sharing them more evenly with the workers who actually made those companies function. The same, of course, is the case in South Korea right now.

Therefore, we ask you to make the calls that people will become more aware of this, that they will become willing to see the issue and to actually deal with this directly without feeling that they would insult the nation or destroy the nation’s reputation. You cannot, my beloved, solve a problem without talking about it openly, just as you saw with the impeachment of the president. If some people had not been willing to talk about this openly, if they had not been willing to talk about it amongst themselves; then how could the people have gathered in those places in Seoul and demanded a change? How could this have happened if there had not been this willingness to talk openly about an issue?

Not talking affects your personal lives

Improvement in a democratic society requires the willingness to openly talk about issues. Otherwise, how can a democracy possibly function? How can you have a majority of the people accept a new idea or the need for a change if there is not the willingness to talk about an issue? I ask you to make calls on this on the national level but I also, as the feminine polarity, I ask you to consider what this means at the personal level. I can tell you, my beloved, when I look at the Korean people and when I look at you who are our students, I can assure you that you have not even begun to understand how deeply rooted it is in your culture and your personal psychology, this unwillingness to be direct and to talk openly about issues.

This affects your personal lives to a degree that you cannot even imagine. I am therefore, asking you who are our students to begin to consider this so that you can gradually become more aware of it. I am also asking you to make calls on it, both for yourself and for the Korean people. I am asking you to realize that this affects, first of all, how you look at yourself. You have from early childhood been brought up to feel that there is a certain standard for your behavior, there is a certain standard for what you can say and what you cannot say. This especially applies to authority figures, from your parents to your teachers in school to the leaders of society or the corporations where you work. You have been brought up to feel that it is shameful for you to speak out in a way that these authority figures would feel was offensive.

My beloved, do you realize how deeply this affects your self-image and the way you look at how you can interact with other people? It is quite frankly a psychology that has many layers. We, of course, will not go into all of them now but I do want to mention some of them. Such a culture, of course, is not limited to South Korea or to Asia but found in many countries in various versions. Most people who have grown up in such a culture have come to accept an image of themselves as belonging to a certain station in society. Most of you have been brought up to feel that you are not part of the privileged elite, you are not part of the upper class, you are a part of the common population, the common people, the lower class. Therefore, you have been brought up to accept that you have no right, no authority to even have opinions about the upper class and what they are doing and not doing.

You have been brought up to passively accept your station in life and to not even have a personal opinion about certain matters that you feel are outside your sphere of influence. They are simply not within your right to even have opinions about. This, of course, is a mechanism that the fallen beings have engineered and that they love because it allows them to exercise power without the people realizing how they are being manipulated and controlled. They know, of course, that once the people know what is happening, realize what is happening, they will not submit to it. They have seen so many times that when the people become aware of what the elite is doing, then the people will object to this. They will refuse to submit. Somehow the elite will lose their privileged positions, lose their power, and they will have to accept changes in a society.

They have attempted to create this psychological barrier where you do not feel worthy to even have an opinion and, of course, you do not feel worthy to strive for a position where you could have an influence on your society. You have been brought up to accept your station as a worker or as an office worker or perhaps even in the bureaucracy but you are not truly one of the decision makers. You who are our students, you need to look at this mechanism because we need you to accept yourselves as decision makers.

Seeing yourself as a decision maker

We are not thereby saying that you need to strive for a powerful position in society, but what we are saying is that we need you to openly and honestly look at your society and decide what is acceptable for you and what is not acceptable for you. Can you see, my beloved, that if you who are ascended master students do not even dare to look at an issue and say: “This behavior of the power elite is not acceptable to me,” how shall then the rest of the population, dare to say: “This is not acceptable to us?” If people are not willing to decide what is acceptable and what is not acceptable, then how can the collective consciousness shift? If the collective consciousness does not shift, how can there be change? It simply is not possible, my beloved.

You who are our students, you need to be very, very direct and very openly looking at yourselves and seeing where you have these mechanisms where you almost subconsciously submit yourself to a certain station. We need you to recognize that you are spiritual beings and as spiritual beings, there is no upper class and lower class. There is no value judgment where some people are more valuable or have a higher authority than others. You all have the authority that you are sons and daughters of God, that you are spiritual beings. We need you to accept this so that you feel that you are worthy to make a decision about what is acceptable and what is not acceptable in your country. Only then, can we truly begin to use you as the electrodes, as the catalysts for shifting the collective consciousness.

More direct relationships

My beloved, another aspect of this is that we need you who are our students to be forerunners in finding a new way to interact with each other. There is a tendency, especially in Asia, where people are not so open in talking about personal issues, especially about their feelings. I am not here necessarily talking about feelings such as whether you feel angry or whether you feel tired. I am talking about how you feel about issues, how you feel about life, how you feel about yourself. In other words, it is a deeper sensation that actually goes all the way to your sense of identity. You will see that there is a tendency in Asia that even though people can have known each other for many years and therefore from a certain perspective would say that they are friends, they often are not friends at a deeper personal level. They often do not feel free to share their personal lives with each other and you will see, for example, that there is a tendency that the relationship between coworkers in Asia is much less personal than in certain other nations.

I am not here, again, trying to set up a situation where you feel that you are inferior to the western nations. I am simply trying to point out to you here that this is not a matter of becoming westernized. We, the ascended masters, are not asking you to become westernized, in the sense that you imitate what is happening in the West. We are asking you to recognize that we of the ascended masters are promoting a certain shift in consciousness and that there are certain parts of the world where they have, in certain aspects, responded more quickly to this tendency than you have done here in Asia. One of these areas is developing this more open and more direct form of interacting with each other. You can go back and see that western countries had a very similar culture to what you have today here but they have overcome it during recent decades, at least to some degree. People are more open, they are more willing to talk about issues in an open manner.

You need to see that it is simply that there are certain people in some western nations who have responded more quickly. By you doing the same, you are not becoming westernized. You are simply following the trend that we of the ascended masters want to see because, as I said, in the Golden Age you need to be able to interact with each other more freely. You need to be more open about talking about issues. We hope that you who are our students will be willing to look at yourself personally and also see how you have been affected by this culture.

If you compare television programs, even the more popular ones that may seem to have very little content, you can actually, by looking at how such television programs, portray the interaction between people. You can see a difference in mindset and how the mindset has begun to shift in certain nations. Even the popular television programs portray that people interact more freely, more openly, are more open to talking about deeper personal feelings and sensations. I am not here saying that these programs are a model to emulate in your culture. I am just pointing out that even though they are not necessarily from a high level of awareness, they do show the trend and how there has been a shift and there has in some nations been a greater willingness to talk about more personal issues.

Feeling embarrassed about sharing feelings

As we have said before, my beloved, there comes a point where society has reached a level of material affluence where the next logical step is that you are no longer concerned about the material welfare of the citizens of that nation. You start becoming concerned about the mental, emotional, the psychological welfare. How can you promote psychological welfare, if you cannot talk about how people feel, how they experience life and if they cannot share their feelings more openly? My beloved, I know well that for many in your culture it would feel deeply embarrassing for you to share your feelings. I ask you, who are our students to look at yourselves and see why you feel this is embarrassing and you will see that it is because of the programming you have been brought up with.

You have been programmed to think, my beloved, that you should – twentyfour hours a day, throughout your entire life – act as if there is a very critical judge who is watching your every action, your every word, your every thought and your every feeling. My beloved, can you identify in yourselves this mechanism where you feel that there is always any angry judge watching you and ready to condemn you if you do the slightest thing that is outside the acceptable norm? Can you recognize this, my beloved? Then I ask you to realize that as ascended master students this mechanism is a great hindrance to your spiritual growth. It is especially a hindrance when you do what people everywhere have a tendency to do. You transfer it to us and you think that we, who are ascended masters, are like that angry judge and that we are watching your every move and wanting you to live up to a standard that we have defined.

My beloved, we are the ascended masters; we are not the fallen beings. We are not acting like the fallen beings. Please, make an effort to realize that we are not acting like the fallen beings. We do not want you to feel bad about making the slightest error or stepping outside the norm. We are not judging you. We are not looking at everything you do, my beloved. We are not critical of you. I know that we often tell you things that you have to change, my beloved, that you have to look at but we are not doing this to criticize you or put you down. We are doing it to set you free because you cannot become free without seeing what is limiting you. Our only desire is to set you free, my beloved.

We are not looking at each one of you personally. We are giving you general directions, my beloved. Please make an effort to realize that we do not have angels or ascended masters that are assigned to each of you personally in order to watch and judge and evaluate every action, every word, every thought, every feeling you have. We give you freedom, my beloved. We hold the immaculate concept for you but we give you freedom to follow our directions at your pace, as you are able and willing to do so. We are not judging everything you do; we are not looking at you with this disapproving mood that wants to condemn you for every misstep. On the contrary, we give you great freedom, my beloved, and I truly wish that all of you would begin to contemplate how it is so easy for you to transfer this image that you have a judge that is judging you.

This image may come from a religion, where the Christian religion has been the primary tool used by the fallen ones to spread this awareness. But it truly goes beyond religion because it is a psychological mechanism that the fallen beings have managed to insert in most people around the world. My beloved, they may have projected the image that it is God who is the angry judge but who is really the angry judge? It is, of course, the fallen beings themselves; they are the ones who want to put you down. I ask you to recognize this and to recognize, my beloved, that it is not constructive to your spiritual path to have this mechanism where you feel like someone is always watching and before you do or even think anything, you have to evaluate whether it is right or wrong according to the angry judge’s standard.

My beloved, if there was one thing I would wish for you it was that you could be free of this mechanism, that you could be free to do what we have talked about so many times: flowing with the river of life. Being spontaneous, being joyful, not having to worry about everything you do and say, but allowing yourself the freedom to express yourself however you feel like expressing yourself at the moment. It is not so disastrous if you say something that you later want to change. How will you learn what you want to express if you do not experiment, my beloved? It is so important for you who are our students to consider this because if you can free yourselves from it, then you can be much more of an open door for the ascended masters.

How the collective consciousness can be raised

My beloved, what we would like to see is that you come to a point where, when your I AM Presence wants to express something through you, you allow this to happen. When we of the ascended masters want to give you an idea or give you a momentum of energy, then you allow this to happen. As it is right now, most of you have a certain freedom to allowing us to work with you when you are doing your spiritual work. For example, when you are studying our teachings or when you are giving our invocations, then you feel free to be an open door for a flow of energy from us. Then you may feel more open to receiving an intuitive insight but many of you, if you are honest with yourself, will see that you have a certain division in your lives. When you are engaged in spiritual activities, you feel it is appropriate for you to be attuned to us and to be an open door for us. When you are engaged in normal life, you almost subconsciously switch into living up to the demands that you feel have been put upon you for your entire lives.

It is as if you subconsciously shift and say: “No, in this situation I cannot be open, I cannot be the open door for the ascended masters because it would not be appropriate.” My beloved, how shall you change the collective consciousness unless there are individuals who are willing to do something that is beyond the norm, beyond the standard, beyond what is considered appropriate?

You see, my beloved, the fallen beings would love to have the general population feel that the only way for them to live, the only way that is appropriate for them, is to have blind obedience to the fallen beings. How has the collective consciousness been raised so that there are actually now societies that do not have a dictatorial leadership, and therefore can be free to express what the power elite in the old days thought was not appropriate? It is only because some people have been willing to express what was not considered appropriate according to the standard of their society and their parents. I am not asking you here to do something that is outrageous or unbalanced. I am simply asking you to realize that we need you to have the courage to go beyond what it considered appropriate. One way you can do this is to act on creating more deeper, personal relationships where you are more free to express yourself and what you actually feel about certain situations.

Freely expressing feelings

You see, my beloved, the culture I have talked about, the culture of wanting to save face, of not wanting to be direct, is a very great hindrance to the growth of a society because there are so many things that cannot be expressed. There is often a tendency to look at this in black-and-white terms and thinking that the only alternative to your traditional way of expressing yourself here in the East is what you see in the West where people are very blunt, very direct and are what you call disrespectful and impolite. But this is not the only alternative.

There is an entirely other way to interact, which we have talked about before, that we would like to see in the West as well. It is where people feel free to express how they feel. For example, if another person is doing something to you that has a negative effect on you, you do not necessarily have to state that the person is wrong and should not be doing this. The alternative is that you feel free to express yourself and describe to the other person how that person’s actions make you feel. This will in many cases cause that person to realize something they had never even thought about because they had never thought about how other people experience their actions. In some cases, this will then open up for a new way of interaction where everybody can be more free to express themselves and people can be more aware of how their actions affect others. This can create a positive culture where you can become more open to about talking about issues without going into the unbalanced extreme of being so blunt and impolite and confrontational, as you sometimes see in the West.

You understand, my beloved, that any tendency can be taken to an unbalanced extreme. As you see in Japan and China, the tendency to be unwilling to talk openly has been taken to an extreme. As you see in some nations in the West, the tendency to be open and direct has been taken to an extreme. We are asking you to find the middle way where you can be open in expressing it. It is not impolite, my beloved, it is not improper to tell someone how their words or actions affect you. It is simply being willing to be yourself and to express who you are and to state what you feel. You are not telling the other person what to do or not to do. You are simply expressing how that person is affecting you and then allowing the person to decide what to do with this. At least, you have stated who you are and how you experience the situation. This would be a great progress, if you could develop this culture amongst yourselves as ascended master students but also, of course, make the calls that there will be an awareness of this in society.

My beloved, I know these are sensitive topics for you. I know that we are touching upon things here that are so deeply ingrained in your culture that it can almost be difficult for you to understand what I am saying because you have not even seen this issue. It is the example we have given so many times that if you were born with red glasses, you would think that everything has a red tint and you do not realize that there is a way to look at this without the glasses. Therefore, we realize this is a process but we hope that you who are our direct students can begin this shift that will spread through the collective consciousness.

My beloved, can you not see that if you look north of the border; you have a society where people are even more afraid to express themselves because they fear physical retribution. They fear that someone will report them to the police, the secret police, and they will be imprisoned or their family members will be subjected to severe penalties. You have the freedom here. You will not be subjected to physical penalties by being open and honest about yourself and your feelings. I ask you to consider how you can be the forerunners for a shift in the culture where you become more willing to talk about these issues of how you experience life in your society and how you experience your interactions with other people.

My beloved, I thank you very much for your attention and for your willingness to be the open doors whereby I could radiate these ideas and the love of my heart into the collective consciousness of this beautiful nation. Truly, we would love to see the Korean people be free to express the love, the beauty and the creativity that we know they have within them. We know it is there in their three higher bodies and we would like them to be free of these mechanisms that prevent what it is there in the higher bodies from descending into the physical octave. After all, what are we about as the ascended masters? We are about having a higher matrix descend into the physical, this is how we can manifest a Golden Age, my beloved.

 

Copyright © 2017 Kim Michaels

The reunification of Korea is of world-wide importance

TOPICS: Why China resists reunification – The death of the North Korean leader – Unending negotiations – Changing consciousness in South Korea – Reunification cannot be based on superiority – Limiting business conglomerates – A new approach to the military – A world-wide issue – A peaceful reunification is possible – 


Listen to a recording of this dictation (subscribers only) 

Ascended Master Kuan Yin, May 3rd, 2017, through Kim Michaels. This dictation was given at a conference in Seoul, Korea.

I am the Ascended Master Kuan Yin. I wish to discourse on several scenarios concerning the reunification of Korea and what may happen afterwards. The first topic I want to comment on is China.

Why China resists reunification

China is a very complicated country, a very complicated people, or rather collection of peoples, for is there truly one Chinese people that can be said to be unified? There are, of course, many different groups that have been forced into a unification many, many times during history but has it truly brought about unification? That is a complicated question What you see in China and have seen historically is a country that has been very internally focused, very focused on itself and how it sees the world and how it sees its own self-interest. Now, we did not comment much on China last year because we wanted to take one step at a time and not make the reunification of Korea seem more complicated than absolutely necessary. This time we want to give some comments on China to show the issues that you can make calls on and therefore bring about some change in this complicated scenario.

We first need to recognize that China has not freed itself from the tendency to look at the world through its own filter where China is the centre of the world and all other nations are not equal to China and almost, in the Chinese view, exist only to serve Chinese interests. Or at least, all other nations can be divided up into those that China believes serves its interests and those it believes it cannot control and therefore must approach with caution and with suspicion.

It is clear that when you look at this view, it is not actually currently seen as being in China’s interest to reunite Korea. It is clear that China believes it has some control over North Korea and it has much less control, if any control, over South Korea. It is clear to China that if the regime in North Korea collapses and North Korea no longer has the pretence of being a communist nation, then if the South Korean model of democracy and the economy is transferred to North Korea, then China will lose influence.

This, China will resist as they have so far resisted it by artificially keeping the North Korean regime alive, keeping the economy afloat and resisting international pressure or even the encouragement for China to put some pressure on the North Korean leaders. It is not a simple scenario to change this. We are not thereby saying that the reunification of Korea cannot happen anyway, for China does not have as much influence in North Korea as they would like to think. There are scenarios that can bring about the reunification without China being able to do anything about it.

It is important for you to make the calls so that the Chinese leadership will be able to see a way so that they can accept a reunification of Korea without feeling that they are losing face and they are suffering what they see as Chinese interests. For this you need to especially make the calls for China to make a realistic assessment of their standing in the international community. It is perhaps strange to you to consider this, but the simple reality is that even though China is today engaged in such vast business dealings with most of the world, China does not truly consider that it is no longer a country that is isolated and that can do whatever it wants.

It does not truly realize that if the trade with the rest of the world was to diminish dramatically, then China would collapse from within. The Chinese leadership have not realized that things have already gone so far that if the trade with other nations was to diminish, then the Chinese economy would go through such severe tensions that it would bring up the political tension that is already brewing under the surface and has been brewing for decades. Therefore, the Chinese leadership thinks that they can maintain control over China even if there was a worsening of the relations between China and the rest of the world, especially the western democracies.

You can therefore make the calls that enough people in China will come to their senses, so to speak, and realize that China simply cannot afford to have a deterioration of its relationship with western democracies. In order to avoid having the deterioration of their business relationship, China needs to recognize realistically that they do need to be concerned, far more concerned, about their standing and how China is looked at by western democracies. China is under the mistaken belief that the western democracies are only concerned about the money they are making and that their big corporations are making and that they are not willing to risk their trade with China over a matter of principle. In this they have so far been proven right but this does not mean that they will always be proven right.

It is entirely possible that the situation in North Korea could develop in such a way that the western democracies would be forced to choose between principle and profit. This is not a choice that any of the western democracies want to make despite the posturing made, for example, by the current American administration. Most of the western democracies realize as well that their economies would go through quite a shock if trade with China suddenly stopped. Nevertheless, if China will not change course on North Korea, then it is possible that there could be such a situation where the western democracies were forced to choose between principle and profit and actually chose to come together and decide to put pressure on China, such massive pressure on China that China would be forced to respond.

If China were to respond negatively, it could lead to a more severe conflict, which then could lead to various not very constructive scenarios in terms of China seeking to intervene militarily in North Korea to secure their influence there and in order to prevent a South Korean or an American combined intervention. You can make the calls for the, we might say, awakening (although that is a very optimistic term) of the Chinese leadership to the necessity to be practical realists about North Korea, so that they will allow other scenarios to unfold that will not necessitate a large-scale trade conflict with the western World.

The death of the North Korean leader

One of the scenarios that could potentially unfold would be, of course, the death of the North Korean leader. This is not an impossible scenario but it is not a necessary scenario because, as we have explained before, it is possible that the people of a nation can artificially keep their leader alive by directing their energy, their life force, at the leader. It is also, of course, possible that there can be a change in the mind of the North Korean leader, as we asked you to make calls on last year and as you have faithfully done.

It is actually possible that there could be a transition scenario where North Korea would see the necessity to negotiate with the rest of the world to make certain concessions, for example, about its nuclear program, which is not nearly as advanced as they would like to believe and therefore is not really the threat that either North Korea or the western nations make it out to be.

This could lead to the scenario that we described last year where there was a greater openness, a greater interchange of business and ideas and so that the North Korean people would be less isolated, would have more exchange with nations abroad and people abroad. Therefore, gradually the entire mass consciousness in North Korea would begin to soften and then there would be, over a period of time, more of an opening up. The North Korean leadership could see it as in their own interest to create a more open situation in North Korea because this would prolong their own existence, or at least this is how they would see it.

It is clear that you can also make the calls for the North Korean leadership to realize that any armed conflict would lead to their swift demise. Regardless of the size of the army of North Korea, they would not be able to win such a conflict. It is, of course, not a scenario that we desire to see because it would cost many lives and much suffering. We desire the North Korean leadership to awaken to the realistic assessment that starting an armed conflict would lead to their swift demise and therefore avoiding conflict by opening up and creating a more open North Korea could prolong their existence beyond what armed conflict can do. For this to happe, however, you also need to make the calls that the Chinese leadership will change their stance on North Korea and will agree to put more pressure to get North Korea back to the negotiating table. This is not an unlikely scenario because China, of course, has a long history of negotiating and negotiating and negotiating and negotiating indefinitely without actually changing status quo.

Unending negotiations

Again, here is a topic for making calls on so that there will be an exposure of any attempt by China to create negotiations that are not meant to solve anything but are meant to simply prolong the status quo by giving the impression that China is doing something about North Korea and that North Korea is doing something to alleviate the concerns of the rest of the world. You can also make the calls that there will be this willingness, that we talked about last year, of the international community to actually treat North Korea differently, treat North Korea as a nation that we can negotiate with.

It is clear that the previous American administration, the Obama administration, was taking the stand that before they would negotiate with North Korea, North Korea had to give up its nuclear program. That was not a realistic stand and therefore it is a step in the right direction that the current American administration has seen that they need to be willing to negotiate with North Korea without any conditions. This is an example of the current administration being more attuned with the ascended masters than the previous administration. This is not to be construed that the current administration is more attuned with the ascended masters in all areas than the previous administration.

Changing consciousness in South Korea

Now, I want to jump ahead and imagine that we had a situation where the current North Korean leadership was no longer in existence. North Korea had opened up and the international community had accepted a reunification of North and South Korea. As we said last year, for there to be a reunification, there needs to be a shift in the consciousness especially of the South Korean people. South Korea is the more free nation, the people are higher in consciousness and therefore you are the ones who can bring about a shift. Of course we gave you the instalment last year that we felt was a good first step, but there is more that needs to happen before a reunification can actually take place.

What I am saying here is that currently a reunification of Korea is not realistic because the South Korean people have not made certain shifts in consciousness so that they would actually be able to deal with the burden it would be for South Korea to have a reunification. In other words, if suddenly the North Korean leadership changed overnight and North Korea was willing to reunite with South Korea and was suddenly expecting the South to take leadership in this area and provide the economic foundation for a reunification and for raising the North Korean economy, then South Korea – both the people and the leaders – would not actually be ready to take this step. We need you who are our students to both go through the change in consciousness yourselves and also make the calls for both the people and the leaders of South Korea to go through this change in consciousness.

You have, of course, within the not so distant past seen the reunification of East and West Germany. You saw that it was a tremendous economic burden on the West German nation because the East German economy was almost as far behind the West German economy as the North Korean economy is behind the South Korean economy. There are, of course, differences but nevertheless the differences between the two economies was still huge and so you saw that the German people went about this in a very specific way by instantly giving the same rights to the East German people as enjoyed by West German citizens.

This, of course, was a tremendous economic burden but it was also for Germany the only practical way that this could be done. Now, unfortunately things are more complicated in the relationship between the people of northern Korea and southern Korea because the division has actually been deeper and is deeper between North and South Korea than it was between East and West Germany.

This is due to a lot of very complicated factors but you need to make the calls that there is a growing awareness in South Korea that a reunification is possible and that it is necessary for South Korea to make some much more detailed plans for how they would deal with such a situation.

I’m not saying, of course, that South Korea would be the only nation who would have to shoulder the entire burden, but you need to recognize that it is a complicated scenario because, naturally, China would be very concerned about Japan or the United States or other western nations even helping financially. China would not want American bases so close, military bases so close to the Chinese border.

Therefore, they may create some barrier where the United States would not be able to help as much as they would like to help. You need to call for the awakening in the South Korean leadership and among the people that a reunification will require some very careful considerations as to how your nation would deal with this scenario. What could you actually do? It is not my intention here to spell out in detail what you should do because there is, of course, a broad range. What I am saying is that at this point it is important for you to make the calls that people begin to think much more realistically than they have done so far about what you would actually do if the situation suddenly changed and the barriers for reunification were removed. How would you deal with this, not only financially and economically but how would you actually deal with the people in North Korea?

Reunification cannot be based on superiority

This would be an absolutely crucial issue to consider, my beloved. There is a drastic change that needs to happen here for this to be successful. You cannot have a successful reunification if the people of the South see themselves as being superior to the people of the North. I am not saying that you are not in many ways superior and obviously South Korea is much more developed politically and economically and concerning the level of education of the people, but you cannot be successful in a reunification if you allow yourself to feel superior.

You cannot come in with the attitude that you are the developed country that has to help this undeveloped country. You need to make a shift where you actually begin to see the North Korean people as your own countrymen, not as you have seen them so far where there is a range of more hostile feelings towards the people of North Korea.

That is why I last year gave you a teaching and an invocation about unconditional forgiveness, but what I am telling you now is that this needs to go beyond forgiveness and become a higher form of not simply forgiving the wrongs of the past but coming into an acceptance that these are your countrymen. These are your brothers and sisters both spiritually and physically and it is your opportunity to help them but you do this with respect, for otherwise it will not be a true unification.

Do you understand my beloved? I know that many of you do not. I desire you to understand that when we of the ascended masters say that we see only one Korea, it is not empty words. We see only one people, we see a united people. We do not see a people where even though there has been a political and economic union, there is still a division in consciousness. We do not wish to see a country where there is still a demilitarized zone in between North and South, that although it is no longer militarized it is still there in consciousness as this barrier.

I am not saying that this can happen overnight. I am only saying that you who are our spiritual students, we need you to start making the calls for this shift. We realize it will take some time for this shift to happen. It will be a gradual shift but we need you to make this shift now. The reason we are asking you to do this, my beloved, is that you are the ones who know you are spiritual people. Therefore, you are the ones to have the best opportunity to look beyond the outer differences and divisions and to see the spiritual beings inside the people of North Korea.

As we said last year, we of the ascended masters see that they have only taken on an overcoat of this cultural programming, this political programming. Many of them are capable of throwing this off very quickly and engaging with you on an equal footing. You should not allow yourself to think that the people of North Korea are less intelligent, that they are somehow deficient or not as evolved as you are.

Many of them are highly intelligent people. As we said last year, they have chosen to embody in North Korea in order to help bring about the golden age vision of Saint Germain for a united Korea. Some of these people have worked their way up into certain positions in society. I am not saying they are in the top leadership but they are in positions where they could very quickly step in and begin to fulfil their role, their Divine plans in the North Korean society after the current regime disappears. You need to see them as equals, be willing to work with them as equals. You of the spiritual students can make this shift first, my beloved, so that you begin to see them as fully equal with yourselves. You recognize that they will be able and willing to very quickly step up and adjust to the situation where they have greater freedom and greater economic opportunity.

Limiting business conglomerates

You also need to make the calls – as we told you last year – so that you will not have a scenario where, after a reunification, the government of South Korea would give free reign to the business conglomerates of South Korea to go in and, so to speak, recreate the economy of North Korea by them setting themselves up in privileged positions so that these business conglomerates could profit tremendously by a reunification.

You need to make the calls that this shift, that we have already told you about, happens in South Korea so that you find a different economic model. You, even as a transitional step, create certain state-sponsored businesses or organizations that are designated to getting the North Korean economy modernized. You can actually begin to create business entities that are based in North Korea, led by North Koreans but otherwise function as other businesses in the western developed world where you have more freedom of the economy. Naturally, we do not need to see these business conglomerates of South Korea suddenly become strengthened tremendously and making an unreal and unjust profit out of the North Korean people.

We do not desire to see the North Korean people going from being enslaved by the state to being enslaved by multinational corporations that only see them as tools for making a profit. You recognize, of course, as we have said last year also, about the dynamics between capitalism and communism that in a communist system the state does not respect the individuality of the people and in the capitalist system the big multinational corporations do not respect the individuality of the people. What we desire to see is that in a reunited Korea there is that respect for the individual so that the North Korean people are also respected as individuals whereby many of them will be able to step up and express their spiritual attainment and their individuality.

We realize, of course, that there are some people in North Korea who have reached an age where the transition would be extremely difficult for them. There will be a certain percentage of those people who will not be able to make the shift in consciousness just as there was a certain percentage of the people in East Germany who were not able to make that transition, that shift in consciousness. It is necessary to accept this and to provide these people with some reasonable standard of living even though this will be an economic burden on the South and on the reunited country. You need to accept this as simply the cost of doing business, so to speak, of reuniting the country that has been divided for so long.

A new approach to the military

You also need to make the calls that there will be a new approach to the military in a reunited Korea. This will be a delicate, a complex, transition, partly because the North Korean nation has such a large military where so many people have made their living from being in the military and find it very difficult to transition to having a job in a normal business. There can be a tendency or a temptation to maintain the North Korean military in order to maintain the jobs of these people so they will know what to do with themselves.

Again, there is not simply one solution that is the only right solution, but you can make the calls that the leadership and the people of South Korea, as well as the people of North Korea and those who are ready to step up and take leadership positions in a reunited Korea, will see that they have a historic opportunity to actually reduce the role of the military on the Korean peninsula. It will require a tremendous national courage to do this, but again it can be achieved by making some very practical realistic assessments.

You could make the very realistic assessment, my beloved, that even the military of a united Korea would have no chance of turning back a Chinese invasion if the Chinese were truly determined to invade a reunited Korea. Therefore, you could make the very bold decision that you would not seek to create a military that could defend a united Korea against China . You would rely on the Chinese leadership making a realistic assessment that they could not afford to invade a reunited Korea because they would lose their business with the western democracies who would be forced to take the side of a reunited Korea against a Chinese invasion, not simply militarily but economically.

Again, the Chinese leadership could say: “Well, if there is no military threatening us on the Korean peninsula, then we don’t need to worry about a reunited Korea.” You could also make the very courageous decision that despite your history with Japan, despite your concern about the increased role of the military in Japan, despite your concern about the unwillingness on the side of Japan to see the business competition from a reunited Korea, despite all of these concerns, it simply would not be realistic that the Japanese would militarily invade Korea. You do not actually need a military to defend yourself against the Chinese or against the Japanese.

Neither is it realistic that Russia would invade Korea and it is, of course, not realistic that the United States would invade Korea although it is clear that the United States would want to have a military role in a united Korea. Here is where we ask you, our students, to make the calls that there will be an awareness in Korea that you  simply in order to have a realistic opportunity to reunite Korea – you will after the reunification has happened politically, you will have to distance yourself from the United States militarily. You will have to draw a line and say to the American nation that although you are grateful for the military assistance they have provided since the Korean War, we now need the United States military to withdraw from the Korean peninsula in order to give the united Korea a chance to grow on its own. This will be an unpopular decision in the United States and so you can also make the calls that the people and the leadership of America will see the necessity of allowing this to happen.

A world-wide issue

This brings me to the last topic I want to bring to your attention so you can make calls on this. It is that you begin to see the reunification of Korea not simply as an issue between North Korea and South Korea. You can begin to see it as a global issue and you can begin to make the calls that there is a shift in the international community. You can also make the calls for a shift in the Korean people so that you actually have people who rise up and make the very courageous decision that you are willing to acknowledge that you have an important role to play in shifting the mindset of the international community. The larger nations, the so-called superpowers, will see the need to step back and allow a smaller nation to unfold its potential without any interference militarily or economically.

You claim your right to be the Korean people, living in your own nation without interference from either the old communist superpowers or the capitalist superpowers. You can do this, my beloved, if you make the calls for the rising up of people in Korea with the diplomatic skills and the vision, the ability to tune in to the vision of Saint Germain. He will work with those leaders to give them the diplomatic ideas of how to make the international community see the opportunity they all have to live up to their principles, the principles they claim are so important in their constitutions. They can then allow this small nation of Korea to develop its national potential without any undue interference so that both China and the western democracies will see that they can better live up to their own principles by aiding Korea without seeking to control and dominate.

I know that this may seem like an impossible task but it is not impossible. We have for a long time placed people in Korea who have this potential to tune in to Saint Germain and develop, very quickly, these diplomatic skills and the vision of how to engineer this very complex situation in such a way that you can actually make all of these other nations feel that they are doing the right thing by allowing you the freedom to be yourselves. This may seem like a bold vision, it may seem like an unrealistic vision. Again, I would remind you that with the ascended masters nothing is impossible.

Given what you have seen you can accomplish as our students in Korea and of course with the help you have received from our international students through Mother Mary’s vigils and other calls they have made, you need to make the shift that what we are giving you is a realistic vision. When you accept it, you can bring forth the broader acceptance in the collective consciousness. Within a surprisingly short span of years, you may actually see people begin to talk about this openly of what kind of a shift would need to happen. We have, of course, also placed people in other nations who will be key to this, who also have that diplomatic skill. You can make the calls for them also to be cut free to recognize their Divine plans and the roles that they can potentially play.

A peaceful reunification is possible

My beloved, the vision we hold is for a reunification of Korea that is entirely peaceful both within Korea but also between the neighbouring countries and those superpowers who feel that they should continue to have influence in a united Korea. We hold the vision that all will see the opportunity that this is for the world to step up to a higher level of true cooperation that is not based on the age-old power plays that you have seen outplayed again and again.

This, of course, is not something that you alone here in Korea can make the calls for. It is something that will require that all of our students will make the calls, and we will certainly give you the teachings and the tools to make the calls for a greater awareness of these international power plays that have been going on now for so many decades that surely a critical mass of people have tired of them and are ready to look for an alternative.

Thus I have given you a large mouthful to ponder here and there is, of course, more that can be given. We can, as time moves on, give more specific advice, but we are not necessarily going to give all this specific advice through a messenger because we will rather work with the people in the specific nations who are in position to implement these ideas and give them the ideas directly. We do not have a problem with someone thinking that this is his or her idea and therefore gaining the credit for it. We are not here to gain credit. We are here to produce results that bring this world and this nation of Korea closer to the golden age ideals of Saint Germain.

Saint Germain is the hierarch for the Golden Age of Aquarius but he is not even looking to gain credit for the bringing about of this Golden Age, even though he will eventually be more known to the people. His main concern is not to be given credit but to free the people so that this entire world can be raised up to throw off the yoke of the fallen beings and manifest the true society of the Golden Age that gives maximum growth to the individual.

Thus, I am grateful for your attention, for your willingness to again let us use your chakras to radiate this very powerful impetus into the collective consciousness of South Korea, North Korea, China, the United States, Japan and other nations. My beloved, you have my eternal gratitude for your willingness to be the open doors.

 

Copyright © 2017 Kim Michaels

The direct way to direct democracy

TOPICS: The true goal of a democratic government – Does anyone know better than the people? – The press must serve the people, not the elite – Representative democracy is a temporary stage – Why the people do know best – Why elitism creates chaos – The next stage beyond welfare – The limitations of intelligence – Two ways towards direct democracy – The potential for awakening the people – The population is not powerless – 


Listen to a recording of this dictation (subscribers only) 

Ascended Master Saint Germain, May 3rd, 2017, through Kim Michaels. This dictation was given at a conference in Seoul, Korea.

I AM the Ascended Master Saint Germain. I wish to give you a discourse that applies to all of the democratic nations that have reached a higher level of democracy and are experiencing somewhat of a crisis in their nations because they do not know what is the next step for democracy. They have not seen it or they have not been willing to see it. I wish to give you my thoughts on this topic, which is a somewhat broad topic. It requires us to recognize a very simple fact that has not generally been recognized by the democratic nations, and that fact is the existence of a power elite.

I am not thereby saying that all democratic nations are ready and willing to acknowledge the teachings we have given about fallen beings on the planet. I am saying that all democratic nations need to be willing to recognize that the primary difference between a democracy and other forms of government, especially a dictatorship, is that a government that is free and democratic cannot allow the formation of a power elite.

You will see that all democratic nations had in their past a more dictatorial, centralized form of government. It needs to be understood that the central aspect of such a form of government was the formation of a small power elite that could exercise power over the majority of the population. What most democracies today call a dictatorship is a form of government where one person has near total power and around him is a power elite that has the major function of carrying out the dictator’s dictates.

The true goal of a democratic government

Nevertheless, it needs to be understood that even if you do not have a single dictator, you can still have a very small power elite that is in a privileged position where they can exercise power without accountability and where they can dictate to the people how the people should live. This, of course, is the antithesis of democracy, and it needs to be recognized that it must be the goal of a truly democratic government to make a very enlightened, aware effort to counteract the formation of power elites. It also needs to be recognized that so far, no democratic nation has done a good enough job of counteracting the formation of power elites.

It needs to be recognized also that all democratic nations had a power elite, when those nations shifted to a democratic form of government. That power elite did not simply lay down and die or evaporate into thin air. They continued to exist and they have, ever since then, attempted to influence the democratic government in many different ways. These have often been hidden ways because in a democratic country they cannot exercise power as openly as in a more centralized power structure. Nevertheless, this also puts a special responsibility on democratic governments to make sure that such a power elite cannot form, even if it seems like a benign power elite.

Does anyone know better than the people?

This, of course, brings up the topic that is at the very heart of democracy. What, my beloved, is the essence of a democracy? Well, it is that the people rule. Why then is it so that all nations that call themselves democracies have what you call a representative democracy? The people are not ruling directly by voting on issues but the people vote for representatives in their parliament and then those representatives carry out what they call the will of the people but which too often becomes the will of the hidden power elite.

Why is it that so many of the older democracies know they are in a crisis because the people’s confidence in the government is falling, yet they do not know what to do about it? Well, it is very simple my beloved. It is because in those older democracies a power elite has formed and that power elite is not willing to let go of its power. Now, you may say: “Is there not a difference between the power elite in a democratic country and the power elite in a dictatorial country?”

In many cases there is a difference because the power elite that has formed in many of the older democracies is what you could, with a certain irony, call a benevolent power elite. With that I mean to some degree that, it is not a power elite that is openly aggressive and openly and deliberately and maliciously seeking to suppress, manipulate and control the population. It is however an elite who is seeking to manipulate and control the population because they think they know better. They know better than the people how the country should be run. This is a topic that all democratic nations, but especially the older ones, need to consider very carefully.

My beloved, if you go to just about every democratic nation, you can ask the people who are elected representatives, who are in the bureaucratic establishment, who are in the educational institutions, the financial institutions, and the press and the media. If you ask these people what they think about this topic, most of them will say that the population, the people of their nation, are not capable of running the nation, of ruling the nation, because they simply don’t know enough about how to run the country. They don’t understand the complicated dynamics involved with running a country.

Now my beloved, you may, if you want to be kind to this elite, say that they are right. In many nations the people, if you look at the broader population, do not know enough about how their country works or how, for example, the economy works, so that they could rule the country. Can you see that when this statement is made by a power elite, it is hollow, it is hypocritical because, my beloved, who is in charge of the educational system and the press and the media of that country? Is it not the very power elite who claim that the people don’t know enough? If that power elite has not educated the people as to how the country works, whose responsibility is it?

If they have not educated the people, it is not because the people are not capable of being educated but because the power elite is not willing to educate the people because they do not want to share power. It is, my beloved, that simple. There is no way around it, there is no fancy argumentation you can come up with that changes the dynamic here. The power elite of the older democracies have not been willing to educate their own people as to how the country works and that is entirely their responsibility. You see my beloved, this form of democracy cannot take the world into the Golden Age. It is impossible to move into the Golden Age without educating and enlightening the people as to how a country works because in the Golden Age the people must rule. They must make the major decisions.

The press must serve the people, not the elite

My beloved, what needs to be done to change this dynamic? Well, it can only happen by the people beginning to stand up for themselves and demanding a different form of government where they have a more direct influence. We have talked before about this phenomenon of direct democracy where the people vote in popular referendums about major issues in the country.

There will be a considerable resistance to this idea even in many of the older democracies. Do you not see that all of these democracies are facing a situation where the population have less and less faith in their elected representatives, in those who run the economy, in those who run the educational systems and in those who run the press and the media? You may say, if you are a member of this power elite, that this is a dangerous development because the people often respond to what has lately been labelled as fake news. But you see, my beloved, why is it that the people are so open to news that do not come from the established sources? It is because even if the people cannot articulate this, they know that they cannot trust what comes from the mainstream media because the mainstream media has as its primary objective to maintain the status quo.

They want to maintain the present power structure. So you may say that it is dangerous when people respond to these fake news − and I will not disagree that it can be dangerous − but then, what is the alternative? It is, of course, that the news that are already there need to wake up and realize that they will only survive if they serve the interests of the people, not the elite.

It is not the job of a free press to preserve the current power structure when that power structure does not serve the people and does not serve the country in the long run. The country is moving into a new phase of its development where the old form of representative democracy is becoming obsolete, is becoming outdated. Of course, the power elite that has taken advantage of representative democracy does not want their hold on the country to be upset, to be overturned, and therefore they will do anything they can to maintain that structure.

This means that there are those among the power elite in some nations who are deliberately creating fake news in order to undermine the peoples’ belief in, or faith in, alternative news media. They believe that by putting out fake news that are so outrageous that people can see through them or that can be exposed by the mainstream media as being fake, they can scare the people to come back and only listen to mainstream media. My beloved, this is an exceptionally naive belief and it simply cannot happen. You cannot turn the clock back to a situation where most people had faith in the major media outlets. These media outlets are like the dinosaurs. It is just that those who work in them have not realized that they have become extinct.

My beloved, the major media outlets in most democratic nations are run by people who are part of this power elite. They see themselves as a benevolent power elite. They sit there in their media towers, their fortifications, and they think that they will somehow be able to survive in the internet age and maintain their monopoly on printing newspapers, printing books, running television stations and radio stations. They think they can maintain their structure and maintain their advertising income and get people to continue to subscribe to their newspapers and magazines even though the people are losing faith in them. But it cannot be done, my beloved, and it cannot be done for one very simple reason. They are not serving the people and the people are beginning to realize this in greater and greater numbers.

Why are they not serving the people? Because they have built such an arrogance of thinking that they can know what the people should think about all topics. Therefore, they believe it is not their job to simply report the news and let the people form their own opinion. They believe it is the job of the media outlets to form the opinions of the people. They believe that they know what opinions people should have in order to maintain stability in their country. My beloved, as I have said before and as we have said before, we as the ascended masters do not have it as our primary goal to maintain stability but to maintain growth, to create growth, to create self-transcendence.

The rest of this dictation, along with an invocation based on the dictation, is found in the book: Accepting Saint Germain’s Golden Age.

Copyright © 2017 Kim Michaels

Accepting the economy of the Golden Age

TOPICS: How a few people can change a nation – The importance of peaceful protests – The higher potential for Korea – No need for corruption – Honesty is the new business principle – A new economy for the people – The challenge of accepting the Golden Age – 


Listen to a recording of this dictation (subscribers only) 

Ascended Master Mother Mary, May 3rd, 2017, through Kim Michaels. This dictation was given at a conference in Seoul, Korea.

I am the Ascended Master Mother Mary and it is my great joy to open this gathering of your beautiful hearts, in this beautiful city, in this beautiful nation, on this beautiful continent of Asia. Here, so many people have for so long been devoted to the flame of the Divine Mother, whether they have seen it as the beautiful Goddess Kuan Yin or any other of the manifestations of the Divine Mother known on this continent throughout the ages.

My beloved, if I had told you last July that within a year the Korean people would have staged mass protests, peaceful demonstrations, that would have led to the impeachment of your President, would you have believed me back then? I dare say that many people would not have believed that it would be possible to see the changes you have seen in the Korean nation over these last few months. Not only at the government level but also in your biggest corporation, which some might say is also the government level due to the influence it has on the political process in your country.

You see, my beloved, this is for us who are the ascended masters a total affirmation of the fact that people have power and that only a few people can change the course of a nation. Now, my beloved, let us be realistic. On the one hand we can say safely that had you not had the conference last July here and had you not had so many people come, then these changes would not have taken place over this last year. On the other hand, we can just as safely say that it was not only your conference, your efforts, your decrees and invocations that brought about the changes. So what we would like you to get is a realistic assessment of what you can and cannot do as ascended master students.

How a few people can change a nation

It would of course be unrealistic to say that a few ascended master students could change the course of a nation if that nation was not ready for it. You realize, I hope, that when a nation is ready, then it does not take that many people to give that extra impetus that brings things into the physical and gives them a certain direction in the physical.

Now my beloved, last year we said that Korea is the key to Asia. It is because there has been a long history of the ascended masters working with this nation, working with many different people who were not even aware of our existence. Yet even though they didn’t know that we exist, they were still open to us working with them, either releasing light or bringing forth certain ideas. So we have for decades been working with the South Korean nation and the people to bring this nation to a certain point where there is more of an openness in the physical to the Golden Age ideas that we wish to bring forth, not only here but in Asia at large.

This very slow progress was what brought this nation to the point where some of you were able to make a conscious connection to the ascended masters. This is why you were able to receive the inspiration to translate the teachings, put them on the websites you have created, translate the books and organize the conference last year. It does not mean that you alone created the changes. It means that you were riding the wave of what has been going on in this nation for a long time.

On the one hand we, of course, do not want you to have an exaggerated sense of self-importance that leads to pride, which we have seen in so many spiritual people throughout the ages. I only mention this for the sake of completeness because I know that you do have the humility of hearts so that you will not go into pride. But nevertheless, you need to recognize that you cannot alone change the course of the nation.

What happens is that as we are working with a large number of people in a nation, there is a descent of ideas from our level to the identity level. As people are open, we can clear out some of the blockages in the identity realm so that more and more people can begin to accept these ideas. As the messenger was saying in his talk, there can simple come a point where the openness has been created so that people suddenly see that this idea is obvious, it is self-evident. Just a few years or even months before, they were not able to see this but now they are. Their identity bodies have been cleared and the mass consciousness has been cleared to a level, where people can now grasp an idea and they know in their hearts that this is real, this is true, this is the next step. When that happens at the identity level, it creates the opening whereby the idea can begin to descend into the mental level. And as we work on clearing out the energies at that level, again another rung of people, another wave of people, can accept the idea.

Then, when we clear the emotional body, people who are more focused on their emotions can suddenly begin to feel strongly for a certain idea and feel that this is right. They can also begin to feel that a change needs to happen, that we cannot allow this to go on any more. That is what opens the possibility of a physical change. You will see that many small events over these last several years have served to make a growing number of people in Korea become dissatisfied not only with the government, but with the corruption with the system, where they feel powerless as individuals against the system.

Even the sinking of the ferry was a trigger event that again in itself, didn’t have quite the significance to create changes but because it came to symbolize what people felt about the system, it became a focal point for people’s attention and for their feelings. It increased this tension that lead to – almost what we could call a bubble of energy in the collective consciousness, where there was a sense that something needs to happen, that things cannot go on as they are, that we need to have a change.

So these many unconnected events brought about this tension and then, when the exposures were made about the President of your country and the CEO of Samsung, all of a sudden this became the focus for this energy in the collective consciousness and this brought people to the streets. You saw how they came together in many cases spontaneously; they were drawn to gather together. This is at a level where it is beyond what you as the ascended master students could precipitate. It is not you and your work that created this tension, but when the tension had happened, your work, your decrees, your invocations and the light we released at the conference last year were able to direct the focus of the people and first of all, you were able to ensure that this was a peaceful demonstration.

The importance of peaceful protests

You understand, my beloved, what we have been saying now for all nations around the world, and for South Korea as well, is that there is always a power elite in a nation that does not want change. The last thing they want is for the people to stand up to the system. They will do almost anything to prevent the people from gathering together in one place and demanding change. If they cannot prevent this, then they have a second course of action, and it is that they will try to create some violence in these protests so that they suddenly accelerate into violence and the destruction of property. This then gives the system, the power elite, an excuse for saying: “We have to stop this rioting and this violence.” Thereby, they have their excuse for stopping the protest of the people.

You understand that their first priority is to prevent the people from coming together in a demonstration and their second priority is to prevent it from being peaceful. When they cannot prevent either, when the people do come together and when they are peaceful, then they do not know what to do—other than that they will eventually have to give in to the people and give the people the changes they are demanding. Here is where you as ascended master students were instrumental in making this a peaceful process and also directing it at impeaching the President.

My beloved, you can look at Korean history and you can say: “Was this latest President more corrupt than some previous presidents have been?” Well, perhaps not but this latest President was not in tune with what has been happening in the country. Therefore, she did not realize that she could not allow herself in this age to do what her predecessors had been able to do, before the critical mass in the consciousness of the people had been reached.

She was not attuned to her people and to the times and therefore she thought she could get away with this as other politicians had been able to get away with it in the past. She is still somewhat surprised: “Why did this happen to m, why was I singled out when this politician and that politician were able to get away with doing things that were worse than what I did?” But you see, she does not understand that times change and there can come a point where a critical mass is reached and if you will not attune to the people, then you are not worthy to hold the office. You had the opportunity to take your nation into a new cycle where this kind of corruption at the highest level cannot be tolerated. Since you did not grasp that opportunity, then you are not worthy to stay in office.

The higher potential for Korea

That is what the people stood up and said: “We want better leadership than this, we want a non-corrupt leadership.” My beloved, you may look at the corruption indexes that have been created about all nations in the world and their level of corruption and you may see that South Korea does not have such a high level of corruption compared to many other nations. My beloved, do you want to compare yourself to the nations who have a high level of corruption or do you want to compare yourself to the nations who have a low level of corruption? I tell you: The potential that we of the ascended masters see for South Korea is that you are in the very highest class of nations in terms of the level of consciousness of the people, your willingness to change and your willingness to implement many of the ideas that are the foundation for a Golden Age.

You should not compare yourself to those who have a higher level of corruption but compare yourself to those who have a lower level and say: “This is what we want also, this is what we are ready for. We are ready for the kind of leadership that does not tolerate any kind of corruption, that does not tolerate that theses big industrial conglomerates can walk into the Prime minister’s or the President’s office and demand special treatment that is not according to the law and the constitution.”

So you see, my beloved, we of the ascended masters have been working for a long time with the Korean people to bring you to this level where you are ready to step your democracy up to the highest level of democracies found in the world. This is a change that has been brought about by many people but you as the ascended master students have the opportunity here to direct this movement and make sure that it remains peaceful and it remains focused on the ideals that we of the ascended masters have given you.

It is not necessary that the people in the government or in corporations who can implement these ideas know about ascended masters, know where the ideas are coming from. It is necessary for you to know this and to focus on these ideas and then make the calls for them to be brought down through the identity, mental, emotional level and then into the physical. Then, the people who are in positions to implement the ideas will suddenly wake up and say: “Oh yes, this is obvious, we see that this is obvious.” This is of course precisely why we have given you the teachings we gave last year, the invocations and why we will give you more teachings this year.

We see the potential that this movement that has been started can be accelerated and therefore South Korea can manifest a higher level of democracy that is second to none on this planet. I am not saying that you will stand alone as being the best country in the world. I am saying you will be up there among the nations who have the highest form of implementation of a democratic government. Naturally, this can be done in many different ways. We are not looking for all nations to implement it the same way. It is clear that you cannot have the highest level of democracy if there is corruption at the highest level of your government or the companies that are instrumental for making sure you have a functioning economy.

No need for corruption

You see that this corruption needs to be filtered out, so to speak. It needs to be brought down into the physical so that both the politicians and the industry leaders will see that it is to their advantage to transcend the corruption. The political leaders will begin to see that by taking a stand against corruption, this can be a key to their election and to their support from the people. Even the industry leaders can come to see, my beloved, that corruption is not necessary for the success of their business. There are actually ways to create a successful business without having the corruption that they have thought was the very foundation for having a successful business.

Do you see my beloved? When you look at the history of Korea, you can see that after the war, the government chose to give special privileges to this class of business conglomerates that grew larger and larger. This is a form of corruption. When the government gives special privileges to certain businesses, then this will inevitably lead to a form of corruption where these businesses think that in certain respects they are above the law and they can do things that are either illegal or that are unconstitutional or that nobody needs to know about because they have a truce with the government where the government says: “If you get the economy going, we will not take a close look at how you do this.” They get used to being able to abuse their workers or take other liberties because they feel that they have a space where they can do things in secret and nobody will know and therefore they will not be held accountable.

What happens is that when you allow companies to be in this position, they attract certain kind of leaders who will take advantage of the situation and they will begin to believe, my beloved, that this is the only way to do business in Korea. When you look at other nations, you can see that in other nations they are able to do business without this kind of corruption. This then demonstrates to you that it is not the only way to do business neither in Korea nor anywhere else. You realize that what is truly behind corruption is actually a distrust of the Mother, the matter realm. You do not trust the law that Jesus demonstrated and taught in the parable about the talents, the servants that were given a certain number of talents and told to multiply them.

You see, my beloved, this is an essential principle of how the Mother works: When you do something for others, you will have an acceleration of your efforts. Therefore, the more selflessly you serve others, the more you will prosper because the more the Mother realm can accelerate your efforts. This is an essential principle, but corruption is born from a distrust of this principle where you think that you have to give yourself special privileges so that you can gather to yourself riches and power instead of earning it by serving others. You want to receive without giving. You want to gather to yourself without doing for others and thereby multiplying your talents.

We do not need to discuss whether it was right or wrong of the government to create these business conglomerates after the war. What we do need to recognize is that the special privileged position they were given is no longer necessary, given the development that has taken place in this country. Therefore, it is time, it is high time, it is past time that these businesses step up and realise that they are fully capable of doing honest business where no aspect of their business cannot handle being looked at by the people and by the government and by the media. They can conduct their business in a fair and honest way. By doing this, they will prosper much more than they ever could under the old ways. It is in fact the only way that they will be able to compete and continue to compete and compete even better on the international scene.

Honesty is the new business principle

I tell you my beloved although you may see corruption all over the world, in the coming decades those businesses who are honest, who are doing things according to the law but also according to the spirit of the law and the spirit of the Mother realm, they are the ones who will prosper more and more. Whereas the businesses who try to cheat, who try to take advantage of people, they will begin to decline, as they already have begun to decline even though you may not see it at the physical level yet. I can assure you, my beloved, that many of the older businesses who have become large by cheating, by manipulating and through corruption, they have already started imploding, simply because they are not able to receive the ideas from the ascended realm that will be the next wave of products that will drive economic development.

They are not able to attune and therefore they have already started imploding in the identity realm, in the mental, in the emotional and it is only a matter of time before it filters through in the physical. You have already seen this to some degree with some larger businesses that used to be even larger than they are now. They have suddenly lost market share and have become only a shadow of what they were just a few years ago when they were thought to be invincible.

My beloved honesty, fairness and the willingness to treat your customers, your government and first of all your employees well. These are the keys to tomorrows businesses, the successful businesses of tomorrow, and I will remind you: “Tomorrow is only a day away.” It is not so that businesses have decades to implement this change, it is already past the time where the successful businesses have started implementing this change and those who have not, had better catch up quickly or they will be left behind, my beloved.

A new economy for the people

Times will move on and Saint Germain’s economy, the economy for the Golden Age, is already descending through the three higher levels and some have started grasping it in the physical. They are the ones who will be able to ride the wave that has been created on this planet and that is irreversible and that will bring a new form of economy that is, to use the old words: “Of the people, by the people, for the people” not only as a form of government but also as an economy.

It will not be that long before the economy that is of the elite, by the elite and for the elite will simply begin to implode and they will not be able to understand why all of these financial instruments are no longer working the way they were working in the past. They will not be able to understand why they cannot create something new that will give them these ever-increasing profits, that they are so addicted to, that they cannot see the reality that there simply is a limit to how much money an elite can horde at the expense of the population.

They (the elite today, the economic elite today) have failed to learn the lesson of history, of why the feudal societies of medieval Europe imploded. These noblemen could no longer sit on their estates and keep their peasants as slaves because the time had simply run away from that economic model. Well, my beloved, times have run away from the economic model you have today where the elite can become richer and richer and where the people become poorer and poorer and where even the middle class is seeing a reduction of its standard of living. This is not a sustainable economic model.

I hereby serve notice, and I hereby pronounce the judgment of the Divine Mother upon the demons that are upholding this corrupt, self-serving, elite-serving economic model in South Korea and on a worldwide basis. I pronounce that judgment of the Divine Mother and I hereby state in the physical that this cycle has come to an end this day. I look to you, of course, to affirm this with me as you create an invocation and give it over and over to make it spread like rings in the water so that more and more people will be able to tune in and realize that there is an entirely new way to do business—and it is just obvious that this is the future.

The challenge of accepting the Golden Age

My beloved when will the future be the present? When it becomes obvious to people that this is the way forward. That is when people can accept that we can have a better state than what we have today. As the messenger said, my beloved, the biggest hindrance for the ascended masters is that people cannot accept the changes that we are ready to bring forth. If they could only accept it, then the changes could be manifest almost instantly. My beloved, why do you not have a better state of the economy, or a better state of democracy? Why do you not have a peaceful world?

It is because not enough people have accepted not only that it is possible but that it is a reality. It is only the acceptance of a critical mass of people that is needed before a change can be manifest. Therefore, I look to you who are the ascended master students to accept the Golden Age. Accept it in your own minds and accept that it is descending through the four levels and that it is also descending and that it has descended, that it is manifest, in the physical level as well.

My beloved, if you cannot accept it, you who have an ascended master teaching, how can we expect the rest of the population to accept it? This is your challenge to look at yourselves and say: “Where am I not accepting? Do I believe that these ideas that the masters are talking about are too far-fetched? Do I believe they are too idealistic, that they are not really realistic?” Then look at that, look at whether you have some fear in your being and then be willing to work on that fear with the tools we have given you. Come to that point where you know in your heart that what we are saying is not a dream, it is not unrealistic. It is actually completely realistic if only enough people will accept it.

My beloved I have already accepted the Golden Age in South Korea, will you not accept it with me? Then I seal you in my heart and I hope that in these next days you will accept what we tell you as already being a manifest reality on this planet and in this nation. This nation belongs to you who are embodied here. What you accept for this nation, will be the reality and what you will no longer accept because you say: “This is not acceptable to me,” this will disappear within a very short period of time.

My beloved, look at the changes that has happened since last years conference and then why would you think it is going to stop here? Can you not see that we can keep the ball rolling and create other changes in this nation? Perhaps not as immediately dramatic but there are changes that can begin and can have a dramatic effect in the long run. We are not only talking here about one year, we are talking about the future of this nation and setting it on a different course where the changes become more and more obvious the further we move forward.

More and more people among the population will be able to accept that it is really possible to create these changes. It is really possible to have a society that our parents and grandparents did not dare to dream about. We dare to dream and we dare to accept that it is more than a dream because our acceptance is the opening for the manifestation of a new society.

With this, I thank you for your attention, for your presence here, for being willing to let me use your chakras to radiate this golden age consciousness into the collective consciousness of this nation. You have all been broadcasting stations for this message and the energies I have released and they will go to every corner of this nation. They will begin to stir up the collective consciousness so that more and more people will be able to accept it as real.

Thank you, my beloved, for your attention.

 

Copyright © 2017, Kim Michaels

Seeing Beyond the Matter Screen

Listen to a recording of this dictation (subscribers only) 

Ascended Master Hilarion through Kim Michaels, January 19, 2017.

I AM the Ascended Master Hilarion. It is my great joy to watch students come to this level of my retreat where they are ready for the final initiation that I offer them as part of this course of self-mastery. This, of course, is the initiation of encountering the energies of the Fifth Ray combined with the energies of freedom.

What is, then, the initiation you face? Well, it is that you need to set your mind free, set your vision free, from this very subtle basic illusion of the fallen beings. This illusion has several levels. I have already talked about it in the previous discourses, especially in my last discourse where I talked about setting your mind free from the illusion that things are things and that they are difficult to change because matter is solid and unchangeable by the mind.

Seeing beyond the matter screen

What is it you need to start doing here? Well, when you attend my retreat in your finer bodies, I, of course, train you in the process of learning to see beyond the matter screen. It has been said that evil is an energy veil and what the forces of darkness, the fallen beings, have done is that they have created this illusion that matter is solid and unchangeable. Now, my beloved, is it just an illusion they have created or is there more to it? Well, it is just an illusion they have created but there is also more to it in the sense that there is a certain correspondence between the density of matter and the capabilities of your physical senses.

It is clear that when you are living on a planet with the density of matter that earth has, then you need to be able to sense matter. You need to be able to navigate in matter and therefore your physical senses need to be capable of sensing matter at its current level of vibration. If you take your eyes, for example, you will see that there was a time when the earth had a much higher vibration than it has today. The people who were living on it at that time had eyes that were simply incapable of seeing the dense vibrations that you find on the planet today. If you had taken some of these people from back then and transplanted them into the earth today, they would have been unable to physically see what you so easily see as matter because their eyes were simply not calibrated for such a low level of vibration.

What has happened is that as matter has densified, as your bodies have densified, your eyes have extended their range so that they can now see lower vibrations than before. Now, in itself this is not actually what forms the energy veil, the barrier of vision. Your physical eyes are still capable of detecting at least some higher vibrations, some vibrations that are beyond the physical spectrum. Some of you are able to see energy fields or auras around people. All of you know that these auras exist and that there are people who have, as the saying often goes, “had their third eye opened” and can see people’s auras and chakras. Or they can perhaps see the astral plane or even see higher levels, even ascended masters.

Why you do not see people’s auras

You know this is possible. The question now becomes: Why are you not able to see these vibrations beyond the material realm? There are many, many people who believe that this is because your physical eyes are not capable of seeing these vibrations; you are not physically able to see this. This is what I am telling you is incorrect, and this is part of the initiation you are going through.

I show you at the etheric level why this is not correct. I can show you, simply, the range of capabilities that your physical eyes have. I can show you that your retina is perfectly capable of receiving the light rays of the vibrations that are emitted from people’s auras. You are physically able to see auras.

Now, why is it that you do not consciously see this? Well, it is because in your brain, in your visual cortex, even in your emotional, mental and identity bodies, you have certain filters. Now, again, you have to recognize that there is nothing inherently wrong with having these perception filters in the sense that if you were to receive all of the information that your eyes are capable of detecting, you might get overwhelmed at the conscious level. These perception filters can have a legitimate function in terms of allowing you to focus your attention on what is most important for you. You will know already from living in this Internet and information age that if you truly go on the Internet and look at everything that is available for you, you can quickly get overwhelmed and your mind becomes so scattered that you cannot focus on anything really. You know that it is necessary to filter out information, otherwise you quickly become overwhelmed.

The fallen beings, of course, know this very well. If you look at history, you will see that there was almost a thousand years where Europe was in the so-called Dark Ages. It was because the Catholic Church had managed to suppress all information that they did not approve of. They had burned books, they had banned books, they had physically removed books and therefore there was only a limited amount of information available to the people. This is one way that the fallen beings try to limit your freedom. If you have too little information, there are choices you cannot make.

Now, as the modern age approached and more and more technology became available for distributing information, the fallen beings realized that they could no longer withhold information. At least, there was much information they could not withhold. Therefore, they shifted their tactic to trying to overwhelm you with so much information and trying to give you so much outrageous information that people started doubting everything they heard that was beyond the normal.

Legitimate perception filters

This is their Alpha and Omega, their push-and-pull strategy, of either too little or too much. It is necessary for anyone who lives on a planet like earth to have certain filters to filter out what is not constructive. Now, what do I mean with “constructive?” Well, I, of course, mean that you need to filter out

anything that would distract you from fulfilling your Divine plan. You can see that when you know that you have a Divine plan, when you have some sense of what your Divine plan involves, then you can also realize that you need a certain perception filter to filter out the information that would simply be a distraction that prevents you from focusing on the essential aspects of your Divine plan.

What I am saying here is this: You have certain filters that filter out information from your senses. There is a filter that filters out the visual impressions of people’s auras or energy fields. The reason for this is that for many people it would be overwhelming to see this. There are people who have had their third eyes opened and have suddenly been able to see entities or demons in the astral plane and it has been greatly disturbing to them. It is something you need to be trained for over time so you gradually adjust to being able to see this.

However, you also need to be aware that just because it is possible to get to a point where you can see people’s auras, this does not mean that it is in the Divine plan of all spiritual people to do this. In fact, I can tell you that for the vast majority of spiritual people, it is not in your Divine plan to come to see auras because it just is not necessary for the fulfillment of your Divine plan that you can do this.

Where I am getting at with this long discourse is that you need to recognize that there is a certain legitimacy to having perception filters. There is also an illegitimacy in the sense that you have been brought up to accept certain perception filters that are not conducive to the fulfillment of your Divine plan. One of the primary filters that is hindering your Divine plan is the perception filter that makes you think that matter is matter, that matter is solid, that matter is unchangeable.

Illegitimate perception filters

The reason this filter is so devastating is that it makes you look at situations on earth, and it makes you think that as soon as something has happened that has a physical, material consequence, then that consequence cannot be undone except perhaps at the physical level. What I have been telling you in previous discourses is that the reality of life on earth, of conditions on earth, is that everything is energy. Energy is always vibrating. Energy is always fluid and regardless of the appearance to your senses and your outer mind, energy can always be changed.

What has happened is that the fallen beings have managed to create (and to fool the majority of humankind into collectively creating) this perception filter that makes them think that matter is not energy, that matter is a separate substance. It is a solid, difficult to change substance and certainly it is a substance that is beyond the powers of the mind to change.

You have been brought up with a perception filter that creates an artificial dividing line. You know and you perceive that there is energy around you because you see sunlight and you can feel heat. You know that these are energy waves, that these are vibrations. Yet, your perception filter tells you that these are different from the things you see that are made up of matter. This is why you have been programmed to think that once a situation has a physical consequence, then you cannot change that consequence at the energetic level, only at the level of matter.

As an example take a disease. Medical scientists have actually recognized that over 90% of all diseases are psychosomatic, meaning that they have a psychological component. In reality, 100% of diseases are psychosomatic in that they all have a certain psychological component. Just think about the fact that medical scientists have recognized this and yet this has not led to a revolution where scientists are researching consciousness and its influence upon matter. As I said, quantum physicists have for almost a century realized that there is a deep connection between the mind and elementary particles.

The rest of this dictation, along with an invocation based on the dictation, is found in the book: The Mystical Initiations of Vision.

Copyright © 2017 Kim Michaels

Being a True Healer

Listen to a recording of this dictation (subscribers only) 

Ascended Master Hilarion through Kim Michaels, January 18, 2017.

I AM the Ascended Master Hilarion. When you reach the sixth level of my retreat, you face an initiation that at the conscious level will be ongoing. This does not prevent you from moving on in the course, but it does mean that the initiation you face here is something you will have to work on for a time. It is meant to take you beyond the very subtle and very persistent programming that you have been exposed to, most likely for many lifetimes, in many cases for the entire time you have been in embodiment on earth.

Now, you see, my beloved: What have I done in these last lessons? I have talked to you about the need to see that you are using the power of vision to project an image outside yourself. You have an image of what you want the world to be like, or what the world is like, and you are projecting this outside your mind. In the last lesson I took you through the realization that you also have an image of what you should be like as a spiritual person, or as a human being, and you are projecting this vision in upon yourself.

 Seeing the world as it is

When you begin to clear these visions that you are projecting, when you begin to stop projecting with the mind, you can move on to a phase where, instead of seeing the world as you think it is or as you want it to be, you can see the world as it is. Philosophers have for centuries been aware of the influence of perception upon what human beings see. Unfortunately, Western philosophers have not been willing to look at the mind itself and therefore they have not discovered the relatively simple truths we have given you about the four levels of the mind. If one is a philosopher and wants to understand what human beings can and cannot see, then one would think one would want to examine one’s own subconscious mind before one starts making grandiose conclusions about how the universe functions.

Nevertheless, it is not my intent here to give a philosophy lesson, but to help you see that it is possible to see the world in a different way than the way you were brought up to see it and the way the vast majority of human beings see the world. We have talked about the secondary laws of nature and how the fallen beings have attempted to create something that functions in mechanical ways so that they can get control over it without changing the fundamental mindset of separation. Separation, therefore, is the essence of the fallen mindset.

What you need to come to recognize here is that the universe allows you to do many things but there is always a price to be paid. The fallen beings have been able to change how the universe works in the energetic realm of planet earth because they have been able to densify matter. The more dense matter becomes, the more it functions according to laws that are, if not eternal and never-changing, then at least ongoing for a long time. The laws of nature, that scientists currently see, have been in operation on this planet for a very long timespan compared to the lifespan of a human being. They have, however, not been in operation forever on this planet.

Circumventing the laws of nature

What you need to recognize is that when the fallen beings managed to get humankind at large to go into the duality consciousness, the collective consciousness started creating these secondary laws of nature that are an effect of the densification of matter. What you also need to recognize is that the fallen beings themselves become subject to these laws.

Now, they think they have found ways to circumvent these laws and to, for example, gather great power and riches around one person. This, as I said, can be done on a temporary basis. What the fallen beings do not recognize, is that the basic mindset that has allowed the creation of these secondary laws of nature is something that they are subject to because they cannot see beyond it. Even though they have been able to manipulate matter in a certain way, they cannot go beyond a certain limit. They cannot do what you saw, for example, Jesus do: walk on water, heal the withered hand and other things like that. This is not within their capability with the level of vision they have.

You can create a condition like what you have on earth where matter is more dense than is natural, but how do you create this condition? You create it by projecting a limited vision upon the Ma-ter Light. How do you project this vision? Well, only when you have this vision in your mind. How long can you have this vision in your mind when you are reborn over several lifetimes, without actually coming to be so identified with it that you think it is the only true vision? You cannot see beyond it because there is nothing beyond it to see. This is what has happened to the fallen beings on earth; this is what has happened to the vast majority of humankind.

You have, over several lifetimes, projected a vision of matter being so dense (and therefore setting certain limitations for what you can do) that you have come to believe in this vision. The vast majority of human beings believe that matter is dense, matter does set limitations for their creative ability and the only way to really get beyond those limitations is to use some kind of force-based technology to manipulate and force matter into compliance.

How fallen beings control matter

Well, my beloved, let us look at the example of a person who has gathered to himself great riches. He has started a company that employs thousands of people and that sells some kind of product. How has he gathered those riches to himself? Well, he has partly used his own power of mind, which is the power to control other people. You see, my beloved, the fallen beings in general have not worked on the power to control matter directly. They have worked on their power to control other people and get them to work for them. This is what I, in earlier lessons, talked about as the false self-mastery that the fallen beings have attained.

This rich person has been able to manipulate other people to work for him, at a wage that is far less than the value they actually produce with their labor. He can reap the majority of the fruits of the people’s labor and therefore concentrate wealth in his own hands instead of sharing it with his employees. You see, this wealth is created through the work, the physical work, of the employees. Many, many people have done this physical work in order to create, generate, concentrate the wealth in the hands of this one person.

The alternative would have been that if the person really wanted to experience having great wealth, then that person could have focused on expanding the abilities of his mind to bring this wealth forth in a more direct manner by bringing energy from the spiritual realm into the material frequency spectrum. You understand that there are two ways to bring about wealth? The one is, as I described, that you accept conditions as they are in the material universe and then you get other people to work for you and you take the wealth that they produce. The other way to bring forth wealth, other than working with matter and creating something more out of matter, is to work with the mind’s ability to be an open door for spiritual light to be brought down through the four levels until it is expressed in the material.

You can actually manifest wealth through the powers of the mind alone, but this is not what the fallen beings have done. They have been trapped by their desire to have power over other people, or even have power over the universe, or even thinking they have power over God. They have accepted that matter has a certain density. That is why they will do everything they can to make sure that nobody challenges this. That is why they are working against anybody who starts to manifest a degree of Christhood, trying to in all ways manipulate you into not daring to accept what Christhood is about and that Christhood can give you the mastery of mind over matter.

How to be a true healer

Now, my beloved, one aspect of the Fifth Ray is that of healing. I know that some of you have been waiting for me to speak about healing, but perhaps you are not quite aware that I have been speaking about healing all along, even though I have not been using the word. How do you heal, my beloved? Well, through the power of vision.

If you cannot free your vision from the illusions of the fallen beings, you cannot heal. It is very simple. What did I say? The universe allows you to do certain things, such as densify matter, but everything has a price. When you densify matter, you densify the bodies you are wearing and those denser bodies will be subject to certain laws. What you do not realize is that when you start creating these secondary laws of nature, then the Law of Free Will allows you to do this. The price you pay is that your creation becomes subject to what we have often referred to as the second law of thermodynamics. This says that if you create something that is set aside from the primary laws of nature, then whatever you create will begin to break down. As soon as you create something, there is an in-built force in your creation that will break it down over time. This is done as a safety mechanism so you cannot create a condition that traps you for eternity in your own creation.

The hope is always that you will have enough of a certain experience so that you will feel a desire from inside yourself to have more and therefore you will be willing to expand your mind. If people do not come to that point, then what we call the second law of thermodynamics (or even the wrath of Shiva) begins to break down what you have created. That is the primary reason you have diseases in the human body. Matter is so dense that anything that is created at this level of density will have built-in forces that break it down. That is why your body ages; that is why diseases manifest.

Now, my beloved, what the fallen beings want you to believe is that there is nothing you can do about this. They want you to believe that matter is matter and matter has a certain density. Matter is functioning under these secondary laws of nature and you cannot go beyond it. That is why they want you to believe that your physical body is an entirely material creation. It functions according to certain mechanical, material laws. Your body is a biological mechanism, it is a chemical factory or whatever they want you to believe.

They want you to believe that once a disease has manifested, that disease must have a physical cause and therefore, there may be or there may not be, some physical cure that can be devised and executed. If there is no physical cure that has been discovered, then there is nothing you can do about the disease, other than hope that in the future, the materialistic scientists will come up with a cause and a cure.

Now, as we have explained to you many times, you have four lower bodies. What manifests in the physical body is a projection of the conditions in your three higher bodies. A physical disease starts in the emotional, mental and identity realms and is then projected upon the physical body. Obviously, any cure must start there as well.

What I need you to come to realize here is that the fallen beings actually have a point when they say that you cannot change certain conditions in matter. I need to explain this in a sort of roundabout way because it is a subtle point.

The rest of this dictation, along with an invocation based on the dictation, is found in the book: The Mystical Initiations of Vision.

Copyright © 2017 Kim Michaels

How to Stop Projecting in

Listen to a recording of this dictation (subscribers only) 

Ascended Master Hilarion through Kim Michaels, January 16, 2017.

I AM the Ascended Master Hilarion. What do you encounter at the fifth level of my retreat? Well, as I have already said, you encounter the need to take a look at what you are projecting in at yourself.

Let us begin by looking at the fact that most of the people that follow this course will have been on the spiritual path for some time. You have probably studied several spiritual teachings, maybe been part of several organizations or followed several gurus. You have probably read many books that are maybe popular out there among spiritual people. What has happened as a result of this process? Well, what has happened is that you have taken in certain ideas, certain very subtle beliefs, and you have used them to create an image in your mind of what it means to be a spiritual student, what it means to follow the spiritual path. Many people have followed ascended master teachings for decades and they have built an image of what it means to be a good ascended master student.

Your image of a good spiritual student

Now again, what have I said several times? There is nothing wrong with this because you can do nothing else at a certain level of the path. It is not that what you have been doing is wrong. It is not that I am here to tell you that this was wrong. What I am here to tell you is that it is now time to take a look at this and realize that you need to let go of at least some of these ideas. As you complete this course of self-mastery, I can assure you that you will have to let go of all of your ideas.

How can I say this? You may have followed an ascended master teaching that talks about what it takes to walk the spiritual path. Is it not natural that you use such a teaching to build an image of what a spiritual student should be like? Yes, my beloved, it is natural that you do this, but are you not beginning to understand that the path of self-mastery means overcoming the outer self, the separate self? Do you not realize that in order to attain self-mastery, it is not a matter of forcing the outer self or giving the outer self some special abilities?

The goal of the path to self-mastery is not to somehow make the outer self acceptable in the eyes of God so that he will let it into the kingdom of heaven. This is what the fallen beings would like to see happen and what they are projecting out there through the false teachers in or out of embodiment. You will not attain self-mastery by perfecting the outer self, the separate self—it cannot be perfected.

You will attain self-mastery by coming to the point where you are able to exercise your creative power without having it be affected by the outer self. You are free of the outer self so that you are not the “doer” but your I AM Presence is the doer through the Conscious You and your four lower bodies. This is, again, subtle because rising to the 96th level does not mean that you have no desires at all. It does mean that your desires at the personal level are in alignment with the desires in your Divine plan, the desires that you yourself chose before you came into embodiment. They are also in alignment with the individuality built into your I AM Presence, the individuality that you have partly built through your past embodiments.

Creativity and the separate self

What you need to recognize here is that as you have walked the spiritual path up until this point, you have taken in certain ideas and you have used them to formulate an image in your mind of what you should be like as a spiritual student. This means, among other things, how you should express your creativity, given that you are a spiritual student. The reason you need to look at this is very simple. At each stage of the path, at each level of the path, you have (as I said) certain illusions. It is inevitable that when you build an image of what you should be like as a spiritual person, then that image will incorporate the illusions you still have, the illusions you have not let go of.

Again, this is not wrong, it is simply the mechanics of how the path works in an atmosphere as dense as earth. I have said to you that as you climb towards the 144th level, for each level of consciousness there is an illusion you need to overcome. This means that when you reach the 96th level and have completed the course of self-mastery, you have still not overcome all illusions. You have, ideally and hopefully, come to a certain point where you have overcome the illusions that cause you to express your creativity through the separate self.

This may not seem all that important to you at your current level, but it will become increasingly clear and increasingly important as we go higher in this course. The Chohans above me will explain this and help you become more and more free of these subtle images that you have. I am not expecting that, at the fifth level of my retreat, you can let go of all the images you have of what it means to be a spiritual student. There is one aspect of this image that I would like you to become conscious of at this level. In fact, you need to become conscious of it in order to pass the initiation at this level and rise to the next level.

What should you be?

Now, I want you to do this consciously at the conscious level of the mind as you are reading or hearing this. Of course, I have already had you go through this at my retreat, but I am seeking to help you filter this down to the conscious awareness. I want you to calm the mind, to relax the mind and to focus within, to focus on your heart chakra. Then, I want you, as you are hearing or reading this, to have no preconceived opinions or beliefs, but I want you to be aware of your first reaction to what I will say next. What is your first reaction when I say: “As a good spiritual student, I should be…” What comes to your mind? There are two aspects of this. You may have a concrete idea of what you should be, but what I am really seeking to make you aware of is that when I say: “As a good spiritual student, I should be”… there is a pull on you. Something is pulling you. In other words there is an aspect of your vision of what it means to be a spiritual student that is based on a sense that you should be a certain way.

This is, of course, not surprising when you look at the history of this planet. Just look at the religions that you see on earth and how many of them have prescribed certain outer rules for how you should behave when you are a member of

that religion. You will see how some religions have taken this to an extreme where almost every aspect of people’s lives is determined by some rule defined by their religion. This entire idea is released by the fallen beings because the idea is very simple. It is that by living up to conditions in the material realm, you can qualify to enter the spiritual realm.

Now, again, there is a subtlety here, my beloved. I am not saying that it is completely wrong to have certain rules for how people should live. You will see that Jesus, for example, in the Sermon on the Mount and other teachings gave certain general rules for how people should behave, how they should treat each other. You understand that such rules are primarily for people below the 48th level of consciousness?

When you are below the 48th level, you are in a state of consciousness where you are very focused on the separate self and you are willing to use force to protect the separate self or fulfill the desires of the separate self. There may be varying degrees of force you are willing to use but you are willing to use force. This, of course, means that practically everything you do with force makes karma for yourself. It has been necessary, for people at this state of consciousness, to give certain general rules so that if they follow these rules, they will make less karma for themselves. You understand that anything that is given on this planet, the fallen beings will attempt to pervert it? What they have done with this is they have said that these outer rules are not just for people below the 48th level of consciousness, they are for all people and all people should follow them. Then, the fallen beings have put out the idea that following these outer rules (which usually means obeying a power elite of fallen beings in embodiment, such as the priesthood or a secular ruler) guarantees that you will qualify to go to heaven. This is precisely the lie.

The rest of this dictation, along with an invocation based on the dictation, is found in the book: The Mystical Initiations of Vision.

Copyright © 2017 Kim Michaels

How to Stop Projecting out

Listen to a recording of this dictation (subscribers only) 

Ascended Master Hilarion through Kim Michaels, January 15, 2017.

I AM the Ascended Master Hilarion. What do you encounter when you get to the fourth level at my retreat? You encounter the need to deal with another subtle illusion, another very difficult illusion, another very difficult initiation. I have previously talked about the fact that it is possible to have been on the spiritual path for many years, even to have studied ascended master teachings for many years, and still have certain illusions about what the path is all about.

Now, my beloved, you can look at this in two ways. You know the old story, of course, of whether the glass is half full or half empty. Likewise, you have spiritual students who have a certain attitude that if they encounter a situation where they feel that they have harbored an illusion or done something that was not the highest possible, then they tend to look at this from the negative and see that they have done something wrong. There may be certain feelings associated with this, such as fear, shame or guilt.

There may be other students who look at it more positively and see that it is good that they now see that they have so far held on to an illusion. Because this sets them free to move to a higher level of the path. This last attitude is, of course, what I wish all of you to achieve when you reach this level of my retreat.

An illusion for each of the 144 steps

If you step back and look at the spiritual path, you can see that we have told you that there are 144 levels before you are ready to ascend. We have also told you that at each of these levels, there is a certain state of consciousness that is associated with that level. Built into the state of consciousness at any given level is a certain illusion. It is not that this is necessarily a negative illusion.

When you are below the 48th level of consciousness, you hold certain illusions that affirm the idea that you are a separate being and that you can either get away with doing things to others or that you have a right to do things to other people. When you go above the 48th level, you go into a different kind of illusions that are more geared towards holding yourself at a certain level. These are not necessarily aggressive or destructive illusions, and therefore there is no particular reason to feel negative about having them.

You could say that it is completely inevitable that at your current level of consciousness you cannot see through the illusion associated with that level. If you had seen through the illusion, you would have ascended to the next level up. You could look at the spiritual path as simply a process where you step-by-step come to see, and therefore let go of and overcome, certain illusions.

This could be said to be what the path is all about, and therefore you can come to a point where you are not looking at this as a negative. You are not having any reluctance to see the illusion. You are open; you are willing to see the illusion. You are, in fact, looking for what is the next illusion: “What is the illusion at this step that I need to overcome?” Then, when you begin to see it, you rejoice in the fact that you are now seeing it and therefore it is almost like a sporting game.

You have these computer games where you are walking through underground worlds and various monsters jump out at you and you shoot them. You could look at the path the same way: You are walking and at any level there is a certain illusion and when that illusion jumps out at you, it is a chance to see it, to really look at it, to see through it and then to let it go and overcome it.

Making the path easier for yourself

If you can adopt this attitude, then the rest of this course and the rest of the path until you are ready to ascend will become much easier for you. You do not have to go into the inevitable reaction of the ego (or the dweller on the threshold), which will seek to make you attached to the illusion you have at any level.

Just imagine, my beloved, having to go through all of the illusions between your present level and the 144th level of consciousness and fighting the ego and the dweller on each step. Why would you want to do that if you can make it easier for yourself by stepping back and adopting the attitude that the path really is about seeing and overcoming one illusion at a time? Just as it is relatively innocent to play a computer game, where you work your way through different levels, then it is the same with the path on earth where everything in a sense is like a virtual environment that you see in a computer game. I am not saying thereby that there are not more serious consequences of what people do on earth than there is in a computer game. Nevertheless, you can avoid going into a negative reaction. I hope you get the point that there comes that level of the path where you need to stop taking the initiations so seriously that each step becomes a big burden and a big drama for you to go through.

What is truth?

Now, at this particular level of my retreat, what is the illusion we are dealing with? Well, there are many ascended master students (some who have studied our teachings for decades) who have adopted the belief – and it is an understandable belief – that our teachings are giving you the truth; the highest truth. You know, of course, that one aspect of the Fifth Ray is truth. As Pontius Pilate said to Jesus: “What is truth?” This is indeed a question that many students have not fully considered and that you need to consider at this level.

What is truth? Let us step back a moment and ask a different question: “Is there such a thing as truth?” Built into most people’s concept of truth is that there is also an untruth, there is a lie. You have truth contrasted with a lie and what is that? Two opposites that are linked together, well, my beloved that is duality, is it not?

Now, I know, of course, that the dualistic mind can take any state and create a new situation where there are two opposites. We can say that there is such a thing as a non-dualistic truth. It is there. In the ascended realm, we know truth. I am on the Fifth Ray and I very well know what is truth because I experience truth as a living reality, as a spiritual flame, all the time. The truth that I experience at the ascended level does not have an opposite. It is not in contrast with an opposite. It is not in contrast with untruth or a lie.

What you need to recognize at this level of my retreat is that there is a difference between a non-dualistic truth and a dualistic truth. A dualistic truth has an opposite, and so you realize that what the vast majority of human beings on earth see as truth is indeed a dualistic concept because it has an opposite. You will see, for example, that the followers of  most of the world’s religions and most of the world’s New Age gurus, think that their particular organization has the truth, the highest spiritual teaching, and all the others are lower or even the opposite of truth.

The difference between truth and The Truth

Well, my beloved, at this level there is no such thing as truth. You may think that if you look at all of the world’s religions and spiritual philosophies, you can set them up on a scale and say some have a lower degree of truth and some have a higher degree of truth. I will not deny that this can be done because there are, of course, some philosophies out there that are more directly created by the fallen beings and therefore incorporate much more of their subtle illusions.

You need to recognize here that even a teaching that is entirely created by the fallen beings still has some concepts in it that most spiritual people would see as true. If there was no such thing, then people would not be fooled by the teaching. The fallen beings are not creating a teaching where everything is wrong or everything is a lie. They are creating a teaching where there is a high degree of what you might call truth, but there are some erroneous concepts mixed in. People accept the teaching because of what they recognize as being valid, and then they also accept the erroneous concepts and this takes them onto the false path.

Now, you see, my beloved, already from this (if you are paying attention) that even I, as an ascended master, find it difficult to use the word “truth” without going into a dualistic evaluation where you contrast it with something that is untruth. Let us put that aside for now. What I want to focus on here is that if you took all of these spiritual and religious philosophies and did create a scale of how much truth they contain, then ascended master students would tend to say that the teachings of the ascended masters, given through a sponsored messenger as dictations, have the highest degree of truth. Now, this is both true and untrue.

It is true, of course, that our teachings are given entirely for the purpose of setting you free. They do not contain any deliberate errors that can trip you up, as the teachings given by the fallen beings. Nevertheless, you need to recognize that even though what we are giving you is a true teaching, we are not giving you (and we are not attempting to give you) “The Truth.” Let us make a distinction here, subtle as it may be, between truth and The Truth.

Truth is a general concept. Something can be more or less true. Floating around in the collective consciousness is the concept that there is something that is “The Truth.” The idea is that there is a teaching that is the highest, that is an absolute truth. You will see, for example, that many Christians look at the Bible as the absolute infallible Word of God. To them, the Bible is “The Truth” the absolute highest revelation that could possibly be given on this planet.

The rest of this dictation, along with an invocation based on the dictation, is found in the book: The Mystical Initiations of Vision.

Copyright © 2017 Kim Michaels

Going from a Lower to a Higher Vision

Listen to a recording of this dictation (subscribers only) 

Ascended Master Hilarion through Kim Michaels, January 12, 2017.

I AM the ascended master Hilarion. At the third level of my retreat, you are facing the initiation of the Fifth Ray combined with the Third Ray of Love. When you come to my retreat and participate in the classes at this level, I am attempting to help you reconnect to the original love that caused you to come into embodiment. The other chohans have, of course, helped you do the same thing. I try to do it specifically to help you see that there is a vision that is part of your Divine plan and you love this vision more than any vision you have had so far on your spiritual path.

The hard way or the love way

You see, my beloved, there are two ways to give up something on earth: the hard way or the love way. The hard way is when you come to a point where you realize that you have been suffering from an illusion, you have been holding an illusion in your mind, and it simply is not in accordance with what many people call reality. Reality, of course, is a dubious concept because what many people call reality is only the temporary manifestation brought about by the fact that the earth has sunk so far below its original level.

Nevertheless, there are many people who have had one of these awakening or hitting-the-concrete experiences or they have suddenly realized that what they have believed to be true is not true at all. This is the hard way to give up something. It is not that, as the ascended masters, we are against students giving up something the hard way because it is better that you give up something and move on than you keep holding on to an illusion. We are not seeking to have you give up something the hard way; we are seeking to have you give up something by reconnecting to the love in your being so that you can let it go from a position of love because you know there is something more. When you give up something the hard way, it is often as if you feel like something has been taken from you. You feel empty, you feel like your world has fallen apart. You feel like there is a vacuum inside of you and you do not know what is going to fill it.

What I hope to help you achieve at this level of my retreat is to reconnect to the love you have for the higher vision so that you can see that this higher vision is so much more than what you have seen so far. Therefore, you want to see that vision and it is no difficulty to let go of the old vision because you know you would get so much more instead. This is fairly easy to achieve at the etheric level in the identity body at my retreat. The difficulty is, of course, to bring it down into your conscious mind and that is the purpose of giving this outer dictation that you can read and study. We, of course, have no desire to take you through a process at our retreats where you attain a higher consciousness in your identity body but it is not carried through the mental, emotional and into the physical, conscious level. What can you do at the conscious level to connect to what you are going through at my retreat? Well, you can build on what I gave you in my last discourse where I said that you have a higher vision in your Divine plan. You can realize what I also said, namely that in order to grasp a higher vision, you must first be willing to let go of your current vision. Here, we run into a peculiar problem.

The desire to feel important

There are people who have started the spiritual path and even people who have started this course of self-mastery with a particular vision, a particular goal, a particular desire. They have, for instance, a desire to be important people who are doing something important for saving the earth or raising the consciousness, for bringing in the Golden Age of Saint Germain. This is a positive vision. There is nothing inherently wrong with it, but mixed into this is a certain ego desire to feel that you are special compared to other people because you are following the ascended master teachings, a particular guru or a particular outer teaching.

You are doing so many things, giving invocations and decrees, you are working on your psychology, you are doing this, you are doing that. There is an element of ego desire in this of wanting to feel that you have done something special, you have done something decisive. Therefore, you are more spiritual, you are in a special category of people. Here comes the real subtlety: You now think that God or the ascended masters should pay special attention to you or should reward you in some way.

It is very possible to build a desire where you think that your spiritual path is moving you towards a goal where you can manifest a particular outer situation. I have said that some people have the goal of manifesting a nice house, a perfect spouse and plenty of money. Many spiritual people also have the goal of either manifesting recognition from the world, recognition from the ascended masters or at least the sense that they have done something decisive to bring about a new age on earth.

Now, you may say: “Is there anything wrong with having this desire?” This is where things get subtle, my beloved. You understand that the entire purpose of the ascended masters is that we want to meet people at whatever consciousness they are at. If a person at the absolute lowest level of consciousness currently allowed on earth could attune to us, we would be willing to work with that person. We would meet that person at the person’s level of consciousness and seek to help that person come to the next level up. This is our general approach to helping people on earth. In practice, there is, of course, a barrier where many people below the 48th level of consciousness cannot connect to us and therefore we cannot work with them directly. As soon as a person is able to tune in to us in some way, even if only in glimpses, we are willing to work with that person and therefore we must, of course, meet them at the level of consciousness they are at.

Giving up your lower vision

When you start this course of self-mastery, you start (in many cases) at the 48th level. Some can even start it a bit lower than the 48th level and so it is natural, unavoidable and fully acceptable to us that you need a motivation to start the spiritual path, to start this course. Your motivation is, of course, based on your desires, based on the vision that you have at that level of consciousness. Again, there is nothing wrong with this. You are at a certain level of consciousness and you cannot at that level see beyond a certain threshold. You cannot grasp a higher vision than what corresponds to your level of consciousness. Naturally, your outlook on life and your desires, ambitions and goals are influenced or based upon the vision that you have at that level.

What we are also seeking to help you see is that you need to continually move up. There are people who come to this level at my retreat and they have followed the course of self-mastery so far, but they have not given up the desire they had when they started. They still have in their minds that as they go through this course, they should build a certain self-mastery that should give them control of mind over matter and help them manifest the same outer situation that they desired when they started the course.

Now, my beloved, I do not think it is possible to go through this entire course and maintain the same vision and the same desire you had when you started. I can assure you that if it was possible, you would have failed the course. What you would do when you reached the 96th level of this course was (and mind you, I am saying the 96th level of this course and not the 96th level of consciousness) is that you would use whatever momentum you had gathered on the path to manifest this specific outer situation you desire. Instead of taking you higher towards the 144th level and Christhood, it would actually start taking you lower again. You would start going into using force to manifest that vision and therefore you would start descending the levels of consciousness.

You see, my beloved, it is an absolute requirement to pass the initiations of the course that you are willing to let go of the old vision in order to grasp a higher vision, a higher desire, a higher goal. This is where, at this particular level at my retreat, you need to really take a look at how you are using vision.

The rest of this dictation, along with an invocation based on the dictation, is found in the book: The Mystical Initiations of Vision.

Copyright © 2017 Kim Michaels

Getting Results from Your Spiritual Efforts

Listen to a recording of this dictation (subscribers only) 

Ascended Master Hilarion through Kim Michaels, January 11, 2017.

I AM the Ascended Master Hilarion. On the second level of the initiations at my retreat, you are facing the combination of the Fifth Ray with the Second Ray of Wisdom. “Wisdom is the principal thing, and with all thy getting, get understanding,” as it says in the Scriptures. Let us focus on getting some understanding about vision.

I would like to begin by asking you to consider your reactions as you were reading or hearing my first discourse. Particularly, I want you to think back to your reaction when I said that the universe is the cosmic mirror and it will reflect back to you exactly what you are projecting out. Did you have a reaction to that statement, such as: “But I have attempted to project out a certain vision and I have not gotten back exactly what I projected out.”

Why you are not getting results

You see, at the second level of my retreat it is very important that you come to an understanding of exactly how the universe works and exactly how vision works. This is particularly important for those who have been on the spiritual path for a long time. I have many people who come to my retreat at this level and they say to me, when we have our informal discussions: “Hilarion, I have been on the path for thirty or forty years. I have given countless decrees. I have invoked the Violet Flame. I have studied the teachings of the ascended masters. I have gone to psychologists. I have worked on my psychology. I have done treasure maps. I have done vision. I have done positive affirmations. But still I do not have the outer situation that I desire to have.”

There are many people who have not been on the spiritual path for so long but they come to me and they have gone into the more superficial things that are available out there (as I said, Positive Mental Attitude, positive affirmations, treasure maps and so on), but they think that they can very quickly project out a positive vision and manifest that vision. Again, they have been disappointed and they come and they ask me: “Does this actually work? And then, if it does, why haven’t we gotten the results that we desire to have?”

This is the point where we go into taking a deeper look at exactly how life works. I have already hinted at some of the conditions here in my first discourse because I said that if you are projecting out one vision with the conscious mind but you have not looked at the subconscious mind, you could be projecting out an unclear vision, a divided vision, or even opposite visions with the conscious and subconscious minds.

This, of course, is one possible explanation why you have not received back from the universe what you desire to have. There is no other way to deal with this than to systematically go through the layers of the subconscious mind and root out these visions that are not conducive to what you want to manifest. This is, of course, what you do as you go through the seven levels of this course in self-mastery and as you use our other teachings and tools, especially the tools for healing your cosmic birth trauma and some of the deeper traumas that you have received in past lives.

Nevertheless, even if you come to a point where you have cleared your four lower bodies sufficiently so that you are not putting out contrary visions, then you will still see that it is not always that you get back exactly what you project out. Now, you may say to me, as some people do: “But Hilarion, you said that the universe is almost mechanical because the cosmic mirror will reflect back to us exactly what we project out.” Well, as with everything, there is always a deeper understanding.

The universe will reflect back to you exactly what you are projecting out but not necessarily what you think you are projecting with your conscious mind. Let us begin by taking a look at the vast majority of people who are currently in embodiment on earth. Most of these people are not very conscious of the power of vision and they are not very conscious of the vision they hold in their minds of how life works. They are often not very willing to take responsibility for themselves. They are not very willing to admit that their outer situation could have something to do with their state of consciousness.

What are they projecting out? They still have some vision (even though they are not conscious of it) and they are projecting that vision into the cosmic mirror. It is a very fuzzy, a very unclear vision where they are actually projecting that they do not want to take responsibility for themselves and they do not want to be so conscious of everything they do. What have they received back from the cosmic mirror? They have received back exactly what they projected out: A situation where they feel that their lives are limited by so many outer circumstances that they have limited possibility to take command over their lives. This frees them from the sense of responsibility. This frees them from the sense where they have to be consciously evaluating their state of consciousness all the time. From that perspective, these people are getting back exactly what they are projecting out.

Many of these people, of course, have conscious desires for a certain situation, such as a comfortable lifestyle, and they are not getting back exactly that vision, that conscious vision. You see, they are getting back (from a certain viewpoint) exactly what they are projecting out. The same, of course, can be applied to you as a spiritual person.

Vision and your Divine plan

With a spiritual person, there are other considerations that come into play. The most important thing here is that as a spiritual person (who is open to the ascended masters in this lifetime), it is guaranteed that you created a Divine plan before you came into embodiment. Do I hereby say that not all people on earth have a Divine plan? Yes, I am indeed saying this. The majority of the people who are living largely unconscious lives and have done so for many lifetimes, are simply not at a level of awareness where they are willing or able to work directly with us between embodiments so that they can consciously make a Divine plan before they come into their next embodiment. Those who are spiritual people (of course, in this I count many people who are not in ascended master teachings), it is guaranteed that you did make a Divine plan before you came into embodiment. This Divine plan is first of all focused on your spiritual goals. If you have been following this course of self-mastery through the first four levels, then your Divine plan definitely involves the possibility of you manifesting Christhood. The purpose of the course of self-mastery is, of course, to get you to a point at the 96th level of consciousness where you can choose to move on and truly work on manifesting and expressing your Christhood, and this will be in your Divine plan.

This is where you need to come to this recognition that it is entirely possible that you have so far had conscious desires for a certain outer situation (often created by the culture that you grew up in), but those desires are contrary to your Divine plan. At least, they are not constructive to the fulfillment of your Divine plan. If that is the case, then you will actually have in your identity body a certain awareness of your Divine plan (even though it may not have been conscious yet) that will sabotage your conscious goals. You will actually stop yourself, at the identity body, from directing the necessary force into your conscious goals so that they will be projected out with enough force to come back as manifest circumstances.

Why this is so, I would like to leave aside for now, because I want to focus on this issue that you have a conscious vision, a conscious goal, a conscious desire. You formulate a vision in your mind, whether you use a treasure map or some other way. You hold an image of a particular material situation that you want to manifest and then you are putting your conscious attention on this and you are putting your conscious psychic, (emotional, mental and identity) energy into projecting this vision out into the universe, out into the cosmic mirror.

Why a vision cannot be manifest

I have already addressed the issue of whether this vision is whole. Is it consistent? Do you have something contrary in your emotional body or your mental body? This is one issue that can prevent manifestation. How scattered is the vision?

Let us just say that you have a relatively focused vision that you are projecting out. The next consideration then becomes: How much force are you putting into this projection? This will depend on several issues. I said in my previous discourse that there are fallen beings who have worked up a great momentum on manifesting certain material circumstances. They have therefore worked up a great momentum on taking a force-based approach to manifesting what they desire. They have tremendous psychic power that they have gathered over many, many lifetimes and so they are able to direct tremendous power into their vision in this lifetime.

Now, if you are a spiritual person who is open to this course, it is extremely unlikely that you are a fallen being. I do not rule out that it is possible for a fallen being to have followed the course to this point, but it is very unlikely. This means that you will not have this momentum of directing psychic energy. Right here, there is a limit to how much force you can put into projecting your vision into the cosmic mirror.

Beyond this, it is possible that you are directly limiting the force that you are projecting with. You are doing this at the level of your mental body or your identity body because, as I said, there is an awareness that the conscious vision you desire is not conducive to the fulfillment of your Divine plan. Therefore, at the identity level, for example, you are refusing to release enough power from that level and therefore you only have the power that is available to you at the conscious, physical level. The power with which you are projecting this vision out, is limited. Now, we have established that when you are attempting to manifest something, the question is: How unified is your vision and how much force are you putting into projecting it into the cosmic mirror?

The next consideration is what happens when the vision, the projection, has left your mind. It has now gone out from your mind and it is now moving into what we have called the cosmic mirror. Of course, there is always a difficulty in giving a teaching in that, on the one hand, we desire to simplify it so people can easily understand and grasp the teaching but on the other hand, in simplifying it, we make it seem easier than it is.

You might get the idea that the cosmic mirror is like an ordinary mirror where you are standing in front of it and the light rays that are coming from your body are hitting the mirror and are reflected back to your eyes. In the cosmic mirror, of course, we are dealing with a much more complex situation because what is the cosmic mirror? Well, it is the four levels of the material universe in the energy system of earth. The earth is the center of that system but it is not the only planet or the only unit in that system.

You also, of course, have the four levels, the identity, mental, emotional and material. What you need to realize, as I said in my last discourse, is that everything is an electromagnetic wave. When you are projecting out a vision, what are you projecting out? An electromagnetic wave or at least a complex of waves! In order for this vision or this projection to come back to you as a physical circumstance, it has to pass through these four levels of the identity, mental, emotional levels of the energy system of earth. Naturally, the question now becomes: What is contained in these four levels? The four levels are energy fields and in those energy fields are many energy waves. As your projection comes out, it is inevitable that the energy waves that make up your projection are going to start creating interference patterns with the energy waves that are in the entire energy unit in which you are living. This is, again, simple wave mechanics.

When you consider how much turmoil, how much impure energy, is found in the four lower bodies of earth – how dense the material matter is – then you can see that, right here, there can be a reason why you have projected out a certain vision but you have not (yet, at least) received the desired result. This may make you doubt whether the path that we describe actually works. Do you get the results of your efforts?

The rest of this dictation, along with an invocation based on the dictation, is found in the book: The Mystical Initiations of Vision.

Copyright © 2017 Kim Michaels

Vision Is both Passive and Active

Listen to a recording of this dictation (subscribers only) 

Ascended Master Hilarion through Kim Michaels, January 10, 2017.

I AM the Ascended Master Hilarion, Chohan of the Fifth Ray. The purpose of this book is to give you the outer stimuli, the outer reminders, that can help you pass and integrate the lessons you receive at the etheric level when you attend my retreat at this level of this course of self-mastery. We will begin, in this first lesson, by looking at an aspect of the Fifth Ray that is normally seen as vision.

It has been said in ancient scriptures that: “Without vision, the people perish.” This is somewhat of a dubious statement, for is there anyone who does not have vision? All people have vision whether they are aware of it or not, whether they are classified as visionaries or not. Every human being has vision. The problem is that people are not aware that they have vision and they are not aware of what they do with it. It is not actually correct that without vision the people perish, we need to look at what kind of vision people have.

Vision is not passive

You who are familiar with our teachings know something about duality and non-duality. Therefore, it should be clear that the real statement should be that: “With a dualistic vision, people perish.” When they do not have the Christ vision, the vision based on oneness, then they will perish. Why is this so? Because it is through the faculty of vision that you project into the cosmic mirror. As we have said, now many, many times: “What can the cosmic mirror do except project back to you what you are projecting out?” This, then, brings us to the central initiation that you face at the first level of my retreat.

The vast majority of people on this planet have grown up with an incorrect vision about vision. They think that vision is passive. If you think back to what you learned in school, you learned that your eyes are receiving instruments. They take in the light that comes to them from your surroundings and then you see what is actually there. Nothing, my beloved, could be further from the truth. You do not see what is actually there.

We have attempted to explain this many, many times, but at this first level of my retreat you simply cannot move on to the next level until you actually, truly get this point. It is not enough to understand it theoretically and intellectually. You need to get it as this total experience that shifts your consciousness so you realize in all four of your lower bodies that vision is not a passive faculty. It is, indeed, an active faculty where you are constantly projecting out, and what you project out very much affects what you see.

It is really that what you are projecting out affects what you think is coming to you from without. What you see is not what is coming to you from without; what you see is (as the scientists of quantum physics have started to realize) something that is produced inside your mind. There is no way that you can ascend to the 96th level of consciousness without getting and integrating this reality. We might say that for the remainder of this course of self-mastery, one of the primary tasks is for you to clarify, to clear, your vision so that you are aware of what you are projecting out. You have mastery of what you are projecting out and therefore you have mastery of what is coming back from the cosmic mirror, which only reflects back what you are projecting out.

A subtle illusion on the path

This, incidentally, is a great hurdle for many of the students who come to my retreat. It is entirely possible that you can have walked the path up until this point, of having gone through the initiations under the first four Chohans, but you still have not let go of one of the most subtle illusions on the spiritual path. This is the illusion that comes directly from the fallen consciousness; it is the illusion that Jesus talked about when he said: “The kingdom of heaven suffers violence, and the violent take it by force.”

The fallen beings have for a very, very long time attempted to take heaven by force. Now, you cannot take heaven by force and therefore Jesus’ statement is not entirely transcribed correctly, for he knew, of course, the reality. You cannot take heaven by force because you cannot go beyond the four levels of this unascended sphere while you are in embodiment in any of those four levels. You cannot affect the spiritual realm.

What you can do, is that you can seek to force the flow of energy to go in such a direction that you take on certain powers, certain abilities, that are beyond what is considered normal on this planet. As we have said before, it is entirely possible to force certain abilities. As Serapis Bey discoursed on, there are certain false teachers who have set themselves up so that they have various abilities that can impress their students. Well, my beloved, if I was to select a spiritual teacher, I would not select one who had certain abilities, but I would select the one who had the purest vision. What do I mean with “pure vision?” Well, that will become clear as we go through the steps in this book.

For now, I want to stay with this idea that there are people who come to my retreat at the first level and they still have not let go of the idea that this course of self-mastery, that the spiritual path in general, is about acquiring certain abilities, certain extraordinary abilities. What is even more devastating is that many people have not understood, have not truly grasped, that the spiritual path is not about acquiring a mechanical ability. This is subtle, I know this very well, but I need you to ponder this very subtle difference.

Now, I have just told you that the universe is the cosmic mirror. It can only reflect back to you what you are projecting out. This does sound like the universe is functioning in a mechanical way. In a way, we could say that the universe is as mechanical as a mirror because what you are projecting upon the Mat-er Light, well the Mat-er Light will take on the form of the image you are projecting in a rather mechanical way. It is not like the Mat-er Light is creative in giving you back what you are sending out. It is giving you back exactly what you are sending out. The subtlety comes in because there is no way to cheat the system—you understand?

No way to cheat the system

There are many, many gurus and teachers out there in the field of New Age, Positive Mental Attitude, self-empowerment (or whatever they call it) who will attempt to make you believe that by following a few simple steps, by learning a certain formula, by giving certain affirmations, then you can, so to speak, turn your life around very quickly. In very simple ways, you can attract to you the most wonderful love partner, all the money you could ever need or whatever else it is that you desire. This is not so my beloved—right? There is no way to cheat the system.

You may go in with your conscious mind and select some kind of course that is offered out there and you may focus your conscious mind on a positive view of life. You may create treasure maps, you may write down exactly what you want, you may go through all of these exercises and you may focus your vision on something. You may put as much energy as you can muster into projecting that vision into the cosmic mirror, but if you only do this with your conscious mind, it can only have a limited effect. You are still projecting a different vision – and possibly a contrary vision – with your sub-conscious mind, the three levels of the emotional, mental and identity levels. What you are actually doing (as we have said before) is that instead of resolving the programs or the internal spirits in the three higher layers of the mind, you are creating a new program, a new spirit, and now it is only a matter of which spirit is stronger. Even if there is one spirit that is stronger, the others are still there and the others are still projecting out.

We might go back to the old statement: “Without vision, the people perish.” We might say: “Without a unified vision, the people perish.” What are you projecting out if you do not have a unified vision? You are sending “mixed signals,” as they say, and what will the cosmic mirror reflect back to you? Of course, an outer situation that is affected by this. This is why I say that there is no way to cheat the system, there is no mechanical way. You cannot create a mechanical formula that will give you the exact conditions you want. You may create some formulas (as I said) where you can temporarily get certain abilities. It is possible for people (and some people have done this) to attract to themselves, for example, great riches in this lifetime.

This does not mean that they have put aside the Law of Karma. Therefore, in a future lifetime they will have to experience the opposite polarity of the unbalanced vision that they projected out. What I am saying here is this: At this first level of my retreat, students need to come to the realization that all of these false promises out there are false. You also need to understand why they are false. They are false partly because what they make you do is create a program with the conscious mind but they do not resolve the other programs in the other layers of the mind. They are also false in the sense that you have to make a choice between what it is you want in life. Do you want self-mastery or do you want certain physical, material conditions or certain experiences on earth?

The rest of this dictation, along with an invocation based on the dictation, is found in the book: The Mystical Initiations of Vision.

Copyright © 2017 Kim Michaels

Guidance at the Temple of Truth

Ascended Master Hilarion through Kim Michaels, January 1, 2017.

Hilarion I AM, and I am indeed the Chohan, meaning the Head Teacher, of the Fifth Ray. The Fifth Ray has often been called the ray of truth or healing but it can also be seen as the ray of wholeness through enlightened vision, purified vision. 

The purity of your vision and God vision

Consider the old statement: “Without vision, the people perish.” The background for this statement is, of course, that your co-creative abilities are exercised by formulating a mental image, directing the stream of your self-awareness through that image, and thereby stirring the River of Life to take on the form of the image. Where do you formulate the image? Well, you formulate it in the totality of your being, which involves all of your seven chakras. It is in the third eye chakra that you finalize the image and then project consciousness through it. If there are impurities in your third eye chakra, you will not be able to formulate a pure image, an image that is in alignment with the higher principles used by the Elohim to create the material realm. 

If you formulate an impure image, then you will inevitably create circumstances in your life that are not the highest possible. It will cause you resistance, suffering, perhaps even physical disease. What is physical disease? It is in one sense when the cells of your body begin to vibrate with a vibration that is lower than a certain level. You have been brought up to think that the cells of your body are like miniature building blocks, small spheres with a membrane around it and complicated machinery inside. This is not an invalid view, but it is a partial view, for it focuses on that level of vision that sees everything in terms of matter—matter particles. As you know, or should know, in 1905 Albert Einstein formulated the theory of relativity. It says that even though your senses detect what you call the matter world, that matter world is made from a finer substance, called energy. Energy is vibration. 

The sound of your cells

Another valid way to look at the cells of your body is to see them as something that is akin to a musical instrument. Your cells are truly a kind of instrument, and they do not simply produce protein, they actually emit a vibration. It could be heard as a sound if your ears were sensitive enough. Or rather, they would never be audible to the physical ears, but to the inner ear of the mind it is possible to hear the vibration, the sound, emitted by the cells of your body. Now, you will know that before a musician plays his part in a symphony, he will first tune his

instrument. One of the technologies used by musicians to tune their instrument is a tuning fork that is constructed to always emit a certain tone. The question now becomes: What is the tuning fork that you have allowed to set the base vibration of certain cells in your body? You see, if you hold imperfect images and energies in any of your seven chakras, they produce lower energies, meaning energies that vibrate lower than the vibration of love and therefore vibrate in the spectrum of fear and the emotions that spring from fear. If these vibrations are your tuning fork, then your cells will emit a disharmonious sound. 

This sound will spread and influence other cells. Of course, the only way a cell can emit a disharmonious sound is by having that sound inside itself. This means that the extremely complex machinery of the cell cannot function at its highest potential. What happens now is that if a cell is emitting a disharmonious sound, it will start spreading that sound to other cells. Then, you can have a situation where each of the cells that make up a certain unit in your body, such as an organ, are now emitting a disharmonious sound. 

Over time, this will inevitably interfere with the function of that organ, causing it to either function below its potential or gradually even start to dysfunction, to stop functioning. Eventually, it fails to produce its task in the body, or even fails completely and causes the death of the body, if it is a vital enough organ. If it is not a vital enough part of the body, then you may live for an entire lifetime, or for the rest of that lifetime, with a lower capacity of the body. This will influence your wellbeing but also to some degree your ability to be an open door for spiritual light.  

The tightrope initiation at the Temple of Truth

At the Temple of Truth you will be given instructions in what it is that is most threatening to the functioning of your particular physical body, what it is in your mind and your chakras that causes parts of your body to be attuned to a lower frequency and therefore to emit a lower frequency. When you come to the Temple of Truth, you will first be taken, not to the main halls, but you will be taken to some of the side rooms where you will be given a special opportunity. The first room you will be allowed to enter is what we have jokingly called “The Tightrope Room” or “The High Wire Room.” When you enter this room, you will find yourself standing over a platform that extends over an abyss. At first you cannot see what is at the bottom of this abyss, for it is shrouded in mist or fog. 

What you can see is that from the platform on which you are standing extends a tightrope, it extends into the distance, but you cannot see the other end of the tightrope, for your vision is obscured by a fog. It is now your task to walk this tightrope. The width of the tightrope is carefully adjusted to your state of consciousness so that with your present state of consciousness it is possible for you to walk the tightrope without falling down. It is only possible if you are very concentrated and do not look to either side. On either side of the room in which you find yourself, there are large screens, and as you start walking the tightrope, images will be flashed on both screens. 

On the one side will be the images of what you see as evil, bad or impure manifestations with your current sense of vision. On the other side will be images that you see as beautiful, good, right or pure with your current sense of vision. Your challenge now is to walk the tightrope and to avoid looking to either side. If you do, you will soon slip and fall into the mist of the abyss. When you do fall, as most people do at first, you will, of course, be caught in a safety net. You will not know this in the beginning so it requires that you have the courage to walk out not knowing where you will end up, not knowing where you will fall, if you fall. The question of whether you fall or not is determined exclusively by your propensity to look to the images on one or the other side. What do you focus most on, the good, the bad or the ugly? What is it that draws your attention and causes you to fall off the tightrope, to miss your balance and therefore your ability to walk towards your ultimate goal in life, your spiritual goal in life, the fulfillment of your Divine plan?  

Once you have started this exercise and fallen for the first time, you will, of course, be given assistance by those of us who serve in the Temple of Truth. We will help you see what it is in your consciousness: Do you tend to focus only on the negatives, thinking that you must battle with the negatives, or that the negatives must be removed before you can be truly spiritual? Do you tend to ignore the negatives and only want to look at the positives, do not want to see problems, do not want to see that there are certain manifestations on earth that must be uncreated the same way they were created, namely through the power of vision?  

As you are willing to see this, you will transcend the tendency to have your conscious awareness pulled towards either what you see as good or what you see as bad. At least at a certain level, this means that you will now be able to walk further out on the tightrope. When you again enter the room, the tightrope is narrower. What happens now is that the first images that are flashed on the screens will no longer disturb you so you will be able to walk past them. Then, you will come to a part of the screen that will flash deeper images than the first ones you saw. 

Now again, your attention will be drawn to one side or the other. You will lose your balance and fall into the safety net that you now know is there. Again, you will, of course, be given guidance. If you are willing to see, then you will be given all the help you need in order to overcome what now pulls your vision into focusing on a matrix that is not the highest potential. 

The rest of this dictation, along with an invocation based on the dictation, is found in the book: The Mystical Initiations of Vision.

Copyright © 2017 Kim Michaels

Feeding or transcending your fear of the future

TOPICS: You cannot be truly happy in duality – Built into human happiness is fear for the future – Why many people felt 2016 was a difficult year – Seeing reality from the ascended perspective – The thoughtform for 2017 – What is the point of negative prophecies? – Prophecies as an excuse for postponing Christhood – How truth is sought to confirm preconceived ideas – Opening your mind and heart to receive higher truth – Fearing the future and progressive revelation – The need for more people to hold the balance in the coming years – Exposures can and will occur around the world in 2017 – Ascended master conferences in 2017 – The challenges for the next three years – Passing the initiations of 2017 –


Listen to the recording of this dictation (Subscribers only)

Ascended Master Gautama Buddha through Kim Michaels, December 31, 2016.

I am the Ascended Master Gautama Buddha, and I come with the joy of the Buddha. Many who have followed Buddhism for many years have not locked in to the fact that the Buddha carries a Flame of Joy, a deep sense of joy that nothing on this earth can disturb.

The Buddha’s joy does not come from this earth, does not come from seeing certain results being manifested on earth, for the Buddha has no attachments to earth. Therefore, the Buddha’s joy is not really what human beings call joy, for human joy is always contrasted with the opposite of joy, whether it be sadness or depression or whatever words you may attach to it. The Buddha’s joy has no opposite, has no contrast to it.

You cannot be truly happy in duality

Some human beings would say that it is not joy, for they cannot fathom that there can be a positive feeling that is not in contrast to a negative feeling. They would think that a feeling that has no contrast has no intensity, has no validity, has no perspective, has no value to them. They are still not in the state of having had enough of what the duality consciousness offers, which is, of course, always that every feeling has an opposite.

There may be a certain intensity of joy if you have had a long period of sadness and now suddenly experience something that gives you joy. It may feel more intense on the background of the sadness. Your happiness may feel more intense on the background of unhappiness. There are many, many people who will say that the Buddha cannot be happy because he is never unhappy. If you cannot be unhappy, you cannot be happy, so they will say, those who are still attached to the duality consciousness.

In a sense, you could say that they are right, my beloved, for when you are in duality, you cannot experience a joy that has no contrast, a happiness that has no contrast. Your feelings will always be seen in contrast to their opposites, and what does this mean? It means that you cannot be truly joyful or truly happy.

You may think of so many people who have experienced conditions that should make them happy. You will know, if you take a look at this, that people everywhere have a tendency to define certain conditions and they think that: “If I have this situation, if I find the perfect love partner, if I have the perfect house, if I have children, if I have money, if I can travel, if I can do this, if I can do that, then I should be happy.”

Built into human happiness is fear for the future

There are, indeed, many people who, especially in the more affluent part of the world, do experience, in a period of their lives, that one of the main conditions that they feel they need in order to be happy has been fulfilled. There are many people, even in this last year of 2016, who have actually felt happy in a human sense.

You may not have felt this way during 2016, but some of you surely have. If you have not, then you have surely experienced in some part of your life that you had the conditions that you thought were necessary for you to feel happy. If you will go into the feeling of human happiness and take a closer look, you will see that there is always an element of unhappiness lying built-into the human happiness.

Why is this so, my beloved? Because human happiness is in contrast to unhappiness. Most people have experienced being unhappy, maybe for the greater part of their lives, and then, now they are experiencing the conditions that should make them feel happy. They do feel happy, but their happiness is in contrast to unhappiness, and what does this mean? It means that built-into human happiness is always the fear that it cannot last, a fear for the future.

There may be brief intervals of time where you can be so almost intoxicated with human happiness that you are not consciously aware of your fear of the future. It is still there in the background, and once in a while, it will lift up its ugly head, and you will feel a twinge of this fear. “Can this happiness last? Could something happen that would take it away from me?”

Then, you can go into various spirals of worry or anxiety that can take away your ability to appreciate your situation, to appreciate what should be a happy time. You see many people who have the conditions that they need in order to be happy, yet after some time, the intoxication of their first happiness fades away, and now, there is this anxiety for the future.

Why many people felt 2016 was a difficult year

My beloved, if you look at this last year of 2016, what do you see? Some, even one of the world leaders, has said it was a difficult year. Many people would agree. Many would look at the conflicts that have been drawn up more closely or have even spilled into physical actions in this past year. Many would see this as a worrying sign, yet if you look aside from the areas where there was war at the beginning of the year, such as Syria or certain areas of Africa, was there really any major event in 2016 that could destroy people’s happiness?

Was there any huge natural disaster, any earth changes, any outbreaks of new large scale wars or conflicts, any collapse in the economy, any outbreak of infectious disease? When you look at this, you see that 2016 was not really a bad year, if you want to use that term. There was no major calamity that happened, although some in England might disagree or in other parts of the European Union. What I want to point out is that there was no outer event that really made 2016 a difficult year.

Why do so many people feel that it was a difficult year? Well, it has a lot to do with what I just talked about: the anxiety, the fear for the future. Do you see, my beloved, that there is a segment of the human population (and it is a growing segment) that has become more and more absorbed in this anxiety for the future, even though the world is not truly going from bad to worse?

We of the ascended masters have said several times that the earth is in an upward spiral, that we are moving closer and closer to the manifestation of the Golden Age of Saint Germain, that we are seeing that the earth is making progress every year, that the collective consciousness is being raised. This is the reality, if you can talk about reality on earth, so let us talk about reality.

Seeing reality from the ascended perspective

What is reality? Well, my beloved, my definition of reality would be that the reality for earth is what we perceive from the ascended realm. In contrast to this is what human beings perceive from inside the energetic system of earth, from inside the collective consciousness.

Of course, as I said in my discourse last year, most people think that what they perceive is reality, but from my perspective as an ascended master, I see that there is no human being on earth who can see what you see from an ascended perspective. You cannot be in embodiment (where you see life on earth through the perception filter of the four lower bodies) and, at the same time, see the perspective of the ascended realm.

This cannot be done, regardless of your state of consciousness. Even a person at the 144th level of consciousness, even a person who has what many people call enlightenment, cannot see from the ascended perspective. You may have brief glimpses of this by going out of the body, but you cannot come back into the body and put words on your experience that will fully describe the experience.

Nor can you actually put your own understanding or feelings upon the experience, because your four lower bodies cannot fathom the fullness of the ascended perspective. I would say that reality for earth is what we see from the ascended realm, and we see the earth in an upward spiral. We see the Golden Age of Saint Germain manifesting more and more.

The thoughtform for 2017

My beloved, what I want you to envision, and what I want you to envision for this coming year of 2017, is that you have two parallel, interlocked, interactive spirals. You have a spiral with the earth at its base, and this spiral is going upwards. The movement in that spiral is upwards, and I want you to envision that as we go through this coming year. The earth is moving up in this spiral for every day, every week, every month. It is moving higher and higher in this spiral.

At the same, time you have another spiral interlocked with it, interlaced with it, in the sense that it has a higher vibration, so it engulfs the earthly spiral.  It penetrates the earthly spiral so that in a way you could say that the earth is moving up in this other spiral, and this other spiral has a movement that goes down. This spiral is the descent of the matrices of Saint Germain’s Golden Age for every aspect of life on earth.

As the earth is moving upward because the collective consciousness is being raised, the descent of the Golden Age spiral is going downwards. This means that the earth is meeting this spiral and, therefore, is becoming more and more involved, immersed, intertwined with, this descending spiral of the Golden Age matrices.

This is the thoughtform for 2017, the two spirals, my beloved! The two spirals meeting each other, where you have the descent of the spiral from the ascended masters from Above, and the raising of the earth in another spiral from below. My beloved, we of the ascended masters are naturally providing the driving force for the descending spiral of the Golden Age matrix, but what is going to provide the driving force for the ascending spiral of the collective consciousness and the earth itself? What, my beloved? Well, you are; you, the people in embodiment.

How can you provide the driving force for an upward spiral if you fear for the future, if you are locked in to this collective consciousness of the many people who are so concerned about the future that they cannot enjoy the happiness of the moment? How can you, then, give this driving force?

I am talking to all of you who are spiritual people around the world, even those who will never hear or read this dictation, as they will receive it at inner levels. If you are a spiritual person, no matter what outer teaching, guru or organization you follow, you are the only ones who can provide the driving force for the ascending spiral. If there is no ascending spiral, then the descending spiral cannot go very far, for we cannot release that which cannot be received anyway.

If you want to fulfill the reason that you came into embodiment to fulfill, if you want to fulfill your Divine plans, you need to be willing to look at yourself and look at this anxiety. You need to look at this fear for the future, this fear that the present peace and happiness, the present, whatever positive state you have, can be taken away at any moment, even the fear that it is likely to be taken away because of this or that.

What is the point of negative prophecies?

My beloved, look at how many people around the world who are either spiritual or religious and who are using various means to come up with a dire prophecy about the future. It could be astrology. It could be some psychic medium. It could be ascended master teachings from the past. It could be the Cosmic Clock of Mother Mary. It could be this or that or the next thing.

My beloved, there are people who have found the teachings we give through this messenger and who have labelled them invalid because we do not give any prophecies, let alone dire prophecies, through this messenger. My beloved, what is the point of prophesying the negative events that might happen when we see that they are only bumps in the road and will not truly delay the descent of the Golden Age?

Have we not said, that the bumps in the road are only in order to intensify the experience people are having so that they can more quickly come to the point where they have had enough of the negative and can now embrace the descent of the Golden Age? Why should we, then, focus our messages on the negative portents? Is it not that people who want the negative are wanting this because they have a drama in their consciousness that they have not tired of?

Prophecies as an excuse for postponing Christhood

Do you see my beloved, we are the ascended masters. We see the reality that the earth is in an upward spiral. How can we then prophesy something else in order to accommodate those who have not been willing to take our teachings and overcome the epic mindset? Do you see, my beloved, the ascended masters do not say what we know people want to hear? We say what we see, and we say what we know people need to hear.

Those who do not value this are, of course, free to go elsewhere with no condemnation on our part. When you decide that you have had enough of whatever the experience is you desire, we, of course, welcome you back with open hearts and open arms. We cannot give you what you want, if you are tuned in to this collective anxiety and fear for the future that is simply the inevitable outcome of the duality consciousness.

It is, I must say, also for many an excuse for postponing their Christhood. They say (subconsciously, mind you) that they cannot focus on Christhood when there are so many negative portents for the Earth. My beloved, what is the essence of Christhood? Is it not that you attain mastery over the material realm?

How can you attain Christhood if you are letting the material realm master your state of consciousness? How can you turn back the negative portents without manifesting Christhood? How can you turn back anything, if you postpone your Christhood because you think negative events will happen?

You see, my beloved, there is a switch that can be made in the mind, and it can be made very easily when you come to that point of realizing that duality is contradictory. There is always a built-in contradiction, and when you come to the point where you are willing to look at yourself and see that you hold certain ideas, certain subtle beliefs and attitudes, that are actually contradicting themselves, that is when you can make the shift instantly and shift out of this.

That is when you can come to the ascended masters, and you have no perception filter of what you want us to say. You are not coming with a preconceived view of life that you want us to validate. You are coming to the point where you are now open, and you are saying: “I just want to know the highest truth I can see, and then I am willing to raise my consciousness on the scale of the 144 levels so I can see an even higher truth.”

How truth is sought to confirm preconceived ideas

As you know, 2017 will be the year where the earth will be receiving the energies and initiations of the 5th Ray of Truth. Do you know what will be the greatest initiation for this planet in the coming year, not only for the people but also for ascended master students?

It will simply be this: 99 point 9, 9, 9, 9 (and I could go on naming more decimals) percent of the people on this planet approach truth in this way: They have a preconceived idea of what truth is in their minds, and they are looking for validation of that truth. Some look to science. Some look to a political authority. Some look to a religious authority. A small but growing number are looking to the ascended masters.

You see, my beloved, if you are open to the ascended masters and their teachings, then in this coming year, you need to make the switch where you realize that you do not want us to validate your preconceived idea of truth. You want us to give you a higher truth than what you can conceive of right now. This, my beloved, is growth. This is what the spiritual path is all about. Do you not see, my beloved, that for each of the 144 possible levels of consciousness on earth there is a certain perception?

Opening your mind and heart to receive higher truth

As I said last year (and you might find time to re-read what I said last year) when you are at a certain level, when you have a certain experience, then the experience you are having will seem completely real to you. This means that whatever level of consciousness you are at right now, you can grasp a certain aspect of truth, and this aspect of truth will seem completely true to you.

My beloved, when you are looking at life through the perception filter of your four lower bodies, the truth you are capable of grasping at your present level of consciousness will seem completely true to you. You will think this is the ultimate truth. This is what you will experience.

As I said last year, you have a certain experience of reality. My beloved, how will you ever grow beyond that level of consciousness? Only when you are willing to question your sense of reality, question the truth that you think is real, and ask us, your ascended teachers, to give you a higher truth. If you are absolutely sure that what you know right now is the ultimate truth, how can you possibly open your mind to a higher truth? How can you, my beloved?

It cannot be done, and we have seen tens of thousands of students of the ascended masters find an ascended master teaching that was valid, that was given through a sponsored messenger. They have taken that teaching and used it to validate their preconceived truth. In some cases, they have used it to come up higher and grasp a higher truth, but they have still come to a point where they have used an outer teaching given by us to validate their preconceived truth, the highest truth they are able to grasp with their present level of consciousness.

This is where tens of thousands of students have stopped their growth towards Christhood because now they have no longer been open to having us give them a higher truth, a higher perception of truth. This does not necessarily mean that I am saying that everybody who has ever been an ascended master student needs to now come and study the teachings given through this messenger. We have given valid teachings through several messengers. It is possible to still grow by studying these teachings, but only if you come to the point where you stop seeking validation for your preconceived truth.

You are willing to question the truth you see. You are willing to question your sense of reality, and you are willing to open your mind and heart directly to us who are the ascended masters to give you something higher from within. If you can do this, it does not matter which outer teaching you are following.

There are even people who can do this while not following an ascended master teaching. There are Christians who have studied the Bible. There are Buddhists who have studied the Dhammapada. They have been open to receiving progressively higher revelations of truth and understanding from within, and therefore, they grow. This is what we desire for all who have ever found an ascended master teaching: that you continue to grow.

Fearing the future and progressive revelation

I will also say that there does come a point, my beloved, where you cannot grow any further unless you begin to truly grasp the concept of duality and the epic mindset. There are, of course, teachings on this that were given, some even given a very long time ago through some of the early Buddhist teachers and even in the Dhammapada itself and the teachings that I gave. There are even modern books written by modern teachers who talk about non-duality.

There is no teaching that is so vast and so profound about duality/non-duality, the epic mindset and the ego as what you will find given through this messenger over these past many years now. It just isn’t there because why would we repeat and repeat and repeat, as long as we have an instrument who can give progressively higher teachings? Again, I am not saying that everyone who has found the ascended masters need to study this, but I will put out the question to all ascended master students in their etheric bodies: “Why would you not open yourself to the progressive revelation we are bringing forth? Why not?” Ask yourself: “Is it because you are attached to your present understanding, grasp of truth, and the sense of reality it gives you?”

My beloved, I talked about the fear of the future. Do you understand that most of you, when you found an ascended master teaching, you had a certain need for validation? You had a need to find this ultimate truth. This is, as we have said many times, a need created by the fallen beings. It is an impossible need because there will never be an ultimate truth on earth.

You had it, and when you found the ascended master teachings (whichever teaching you found) you decided that this was the highest teaching available on the planet. Now you just needed to follow this teaching for the rest of your life, and then you would make your ascension. You have now taken this fear of the future that is out there in the collective consciousness, and you have transferred it to that ascended master teaching. You fear that, if you ever saw something beyond that teaching, it would invalidate the teaching or invalidate your sense of reality and the experience you had with the teaching, or the time you had spent following that teaching. You fear actually finding a new, higher, ascended master teaching.

My beloved, can you see that this is contradictory? You see yourself as an ascended master student. You claim that you are on the path to Christhood. You claim that you want to make your ascension after this lifetime, and you know that this requires constant growth. At the same time, you are actually taking a certain teaching and saying: “This is all I need,” and you are actually afraid of finding a higher teaching given by us, the ascended masters.

You may come up with all kinds of reasons about the false hierarchy and this and that. You may project onto this teaching that it must be the false hierarchy because it says this or it doesn’t say that, but these are just fears! Have you come to the point where you are open and you ask us to reveal what is the next step for you personally?

I am not asking you to follow a particular outer teaching. I am asking you to be open to asking. Ask the ascended masters that you know and then be open to accepting whatever answer comes to you. Do not filter it with the outer mind. Do not seek validation for the teaching you are following right now. Be open, my beloved!

Is that too much to ask of a person who calls himself or herself an ascended master student? I know it is too much to ask of most Christians, most Buddhists, most Muslims, most Hindus, but is it too much to ask of those who call themselves ascended master students?

The need for more people to hold the balance in the coming years

Why am I bringing this up? Because we need more people to hold the spiritual balance for the initiations that the earth will go through in 2017, 2018 and 2019, the 5th, 6th and 7th rays. These will be quite difficult initiations for the planet. We need more people to hold the balance for this, and therefore, we need you to be where you should be, according to your own Divine plan—not according to where you think you should be with your outer mind that is influenced by your sense of reality, your current perception filter, and the current truth that you think is the highest possible.

My beloved, we need you to step up in order to hold the balance for the earth in this coming year, otherwise it will be a very, very difficult challenge. You have already seen in 2016 how many things have been exposed, how many impurities have come up, as we said last year would happen. Can you not see that, with what has been happening on the 4th Ray of Purity, this will only accelerate with the 5th Ray of Truth?

It is entirely possible in this coming year that there are certain things that will receive such a dramatic exposure of what is going on behind the scenes or of the fallacy of certain beliefs that it will be far too much for many people to handle. If we have more people who can hold the balance, then the collective consciousness will be raised so fast, so quickly, that people will be able to cope with these exposures.

Exposures can and will occur around the world in 2017

My beloved, why did Vladimir Putin say that 2016 had been a difficult year? Well, partly, because certain things had been exposed about Russia that he would have preferred had not been exposed. This involves the hacking claim about the American presidential election. It involves the exposure of systematic doping of Russian athletes and other things that will be exposed in the coming year.

Do not think that the American nation will go free. We had the Panama Papers last year, but when was the last time you heard or read anything about them? They sort of faded into the background, but there will be other exposures of this.

You have, of course, seen in the past year, as we also said, that it would be not a good year to run for President if you had skeletons in the closet or emails in your hidden accounts. Does it really matter who exposed the emails? No matter who exposed them, it does not change the fact that there was something to expose. Do not think that the newly elected President will go free in this coming year of certain exposures about his personal life, about his business life, about his taxes or non-taxes.

Do not think that the American nation will be spared either, for there can, with a very high likelihood, be certain exposures of the fact of how a hidden elite is running things in America, and how the inequality between rich and poor in America has grown to a level that simply has never been seen before in the history of this nation (that is, unless you compare the slave owners of the South to their slaves). My beloved, the greatest challenge for America in this coming year will be that something needs to be done about the gap between rich and poor in the richest nation on earth.

Is America the richest nation on earth, or is it simply the nation on earth that has the richest power elite? That question needs to be brought out, but for many it will be extremely shocking to see how an elite has influenced every aspect of American society.

A big question will be whether a President who was, to some degree, elected by the poor people (who have lost their jobs as a result of the speculation of the elite), can help those poor people when he comes from a background of himself being part of the elite? He has taken full advantage of what the current American system allows businessmen to do when they have accumulated enough wealth that they can begin to define conditions rather than adapting to them.

There are, of course, many other parts of the world where exposures can and will take place. Great Britain faces a very difficult situation with how to implement the result of the vote on leaving the EU. There are many things here that could be exposed also about how elitist British society still is. I will tell you that, when it comes to mindset, there is no more elitist society than England itself. I do not say Great Britain but England.

You will also see that France could potentially face some exposures of how inconsistent the French view of themselves is, how unrealistic is their view of their importance in the world or in the EU. This may give certain humiliating exposures.

There may, of course, be events in many countries that will bring out an exposure of certain mindsets that show the inconsistencies and the attachment to a certain perception of the world. The Middle East, of course, especially with Israel but also several of the Arab countries, could potentially face an exposure that forces people to look at themselves and their society, especially Islam.

My beloved, is it really consistent to claim that Islam is the ultimate truth when the Islamic culture has produced the persistent fighting you see coming from IS or ISIS or other groups? When does it dawn upon the masses in the Arab world that it is inconsistent to claim that this is a superior religion inspired by God when it produces people who are willing to kill to the extent that you have seen in the Arab world?

Russia, of course, also faces potential humiliating exposures relating to the fact that you have the vast majority of the population living in poverty that is growing. At the same time, you have a small elite that are becoming increasingly rich off of the natural resources that should belong to the entire nation and the entire people.

Ascended master conferences in 2017

We look forward to a conference in Russia and to the coming together of so many ascended master students from Russia to give this great impetus for radiating the Golden Age consciousness in this beautiful country and to these beautiful people who unfortunately have not let go of the victim consciousness. My beloved, they cannot see that it is inconsistent to claim that you are the victim of the world, while, at the same time, you are committing what can only be seen as acts of aggression.

Then, of course, we look forward to another conference in Europe, for there is much need for healing of Europe, especially after the exit of Britain (or at least the nominal exit that has not yet begun), and therefore, there is much healing to be done here.

We look forward to the conference in Korea, again, where we have such a growth in the students we have seen that it truly gives us great hope that we can anchor the golden age consciousness in Korea and have it spread from there to many other nations in Asia.

Truly, we look to the year 2017 to be another breakthrough, as all the years have been since 2012 where we started this cycle of releasing the energy of the seven rays, one year at a time. The response from the students has been enough to create a significant upward spiral.

We look for many more students to join this and to help us hold the balance for these next three years that will be tricky, both on the personal level and the planetary level. As Serapis Bey said in his book [The Mystical Initiations of Intention], the 4th ray is the eye of the needle, the nexus in the initiations between the first three rays and the last three. Certainly, as you go up through the rays, the initiations can only accelerate, for you are moving towards the 7th ray of freedom, which is the ultimate acceleration.

The challenges for the next three years

I am, therefore, committed to rendering an extraordinary assistance to the earth for these next three years, but it will not be an assistance that I will give in a general way. It will be an assistance that I will only give through individuals who will take our teachings and make use of them.

When you take our teachings, our invocations, our decrees, when you take the books and apply them, then I will be able to assist you individually if you are willing, if you will but ask. It is only when you apply yourself to the path of passing the initiations of the seven rays on an individual level that I can and will give you this assistance.

My beloved, let me ask you to step back, even to the point where you are looking at earth from space. You might envision that you are floating with me in space and looking at the earth. What you will see, if you could see at the energetic level, is that through the center of the earth is an axis, of course, and around that axis is wound a serpent.

You know the symbol of the caduceus used by the medical profession, with one or even two serpents wrapped around a rod. This is what you see in the centre of the earth, and the serpent, of course, represents the serpentine consciousness, the duality consciousness, the fallen beings, and the many human beings who are trapped in this.

If you look closer, you will see that the serpent does not have simply one head, it has many heads. It is more than the seven-headed hydra because it has so many of these expressions, be it religions, be it scientific materialism, being political philosophies or other philosophies that each represent a head of the serpent. What will happen in these coming years is that these heads will penetrate from the center of the earth, and they will come out through the surface.

They will simply be pushed up through the surface of the earth, not, of course, physically but at an energetic level. This means that when such a serpent head breaks through, there will be an event that will expose the untruth, the fallacy, or the lack of peace, or the lack of freedom that is behind that particular philosophy, view of life, that particular “ultimate” truth.

In the next year, it will be shown how they are inconsistent in themselves. In 2018, it will be shown how they are not peaceful even though they claim to be. In 2019, it will be shown how they are not giving people freedom even though they claim to be doing so. These are initiations for the planet, and those who will pass these initiations are those who will see through the inconsistencies, who will see these inconsistencies for what they are and, therefore, not be fooled by them.

Passing the initiations of 2017

Will you, the ascended master students, pass these initiations? Well, you will if you do what I said earlier: If you will ask us with an open mind and heart that is willing to hear a higher expression of truth than the one you currently think is the highest possible and that gives you a sense of reality. Do you want to move higher in your ability to see reality during these next three years? Then, I have now given you the formula.

Of course, the books by the Chohans that have been released and will be released will also be essential for you to pass these initiations and to help the planet pass the initiations by holding the spiritual balance for the millions of people who simply are not ready to pass these initiations on their own. They need someone to hold that balance so that they are not overwhelmed but will be able to accelerate their perception of truth without completely losing their sense of reality, their sense of what is real and unreal. If not, they end up thinking that nothing is real and, therefore, they can literally lose their minds, can lose their bearings. If we do not see an acceleration of the number of students who are willing to use our teachings, to make themselves ready to hold this balance, then you will see a great acceleration in the number of people who lose their minds over these next three years, for the changes will be too much for them to handle.

Thus, I place before you an opportunity, a responsibility, and I place before you a challenge! Will you use this dictation to feed your fear of the future or to transcend your fear of the future?

Gautama, I AM, and I AM ever ready to help you transcend all fear! Ask me, and I will answer to the extent that you are open to receiving that answer, which will never be what your outer mind expects it to be.

 

Copyright © 2016 Kim Michaels

The unchanging and the ever-moving Buddha


TOPICS: Being stuck in the past or the future – Appreciating the moment – A frame of reference – No judgments in the child-like mind – Observing rather than judging – Having no opinions about other people – Most human interactions follow the same pattern – You are a timeless being – Your reactionary pattern determines your future – The immovable and the ever-changing Buddha – There is no state of no-self –


Listen to the recording of this dictation (Subscribers only)

Ascended Master Gautama Buddha through Kim Michaels, July 4, 2016 during a conference in Seoul, Korea.

I AM the Ascended Master Gautama Buddha and it is my privilege, as has been my privilege many times, to seal this ascended master conference in Korea. I want you to know that from the ascended realm we consider this conference an absolute success. You have shown incredible will to come together and to harmonize your beings with each other and with us. Thereby, we have been able to multiply the decrees and invocations, and you have been able to multiply with your chakras the release from our dictations so that they went into the collective consciousness with greater power. For this we are grateful and we congratulate you.

We have given you many, many teachings that I trust you will take and contemplate, discuss, perhaps even write and talk about with each other. That way you can, by using the outer teaching, come to a greater inner understanding of some of the things that were not said by words but were nevertheless said at the higher levels. It is necessary for you to understand that when we give a dictation, that which is spoken in the physical is only part of the total release. Not only is there, of course, light that is carried by the words but there is also an emotional, a mental and an identity level component of a dictation. If you are willing to use the physical words as your foundation, you can learn to tune in to the emotional, mental and identity components that cannot easily be translated into words. You can still get an intuitive feel, an intuitive experience of what is the total release of a dictation.

We do, of course, have many more things to say about and to both Korea and other nations in Asia. Therefore, we look forward to opportunities to bring this forth in the future. For now, I desire you to feel that this conference is complete in itself. As we have said before, there is always a high and a low potential for a conference and you have exceeded the high potential. What I desire to do here is to do something that perhaps has not quite happened at this conference because many of you are new to the teachings and because it is your first ascended master conference.

Being stuck in the past or the future

What I desire is to give you an appreciation for the moment, for the eternal now. As we have mentioned before, many people on earth have been brought up to not live in the now but to either be attached to the past or to be looking towards the future. Some people have become stuck at some point in the past. For some it was because they had such a traumatic event happen to them that they are so wounded emotionally that they cannot free themselves from the pain and the wound and they relive it again and again. For others it has been because they had such a high event in their life that they feel like nothing could surpass it later.

If you go to this Olympic Park and look at the names of the athletes that won medals at the 1988 Olympics, you will see that many of these athletes have felt that winning this medal, setting a record, standing on the podium and receiving their medal was the high point of their life. Many of them have felt like nothing could really compare and therefore the rest of their lives have been less than that peak moment. They are constantly longing back for that moment.

There are, of course, many other people who are not so attached to the past but are looking towards the future. Some look to the future with fear, fearing what might happen whether it be some calamity in their personal life (a disease or something else) or whether it might be a worldwide calamity, such as war or natural disaster. We even, of course, have those who are looking towards the end of the world as we have commented on before.

We also have many people who are dissatisfied with the current moment, with their current life, their current situation, and they are looking to the future with a hope that one day it will get better. Many hope that if they keep doing what they have been told to do, if they follow what their society and their parents have laid out for them, then one-day they will receive the reward they hope to receive.

As we have said, you are co-creators, so passively waiting for something to happen is not the constructive approach. If you are waiting for other people, society or some corporation to one day come in and change your life, then you are likely to be disappointed. If you are waiting for some Divine being to appear in your life and give you everything you want, then you are guaranteed to be disappointed.

Appreciating the moment

I, of course, would like you to understand that one of the key teachings of the Buddha, the true inner teachings of the Buddha, is precisely the ability to live in the moment. Now, you all have this ability to live in the moment, but again there are some people for whom it is very difficult to exercise it. If you have experienced very traumatic events in your life and you need psychological healing, then it can understandably be very difficult for you to live in the moment. We then encourage you to seek appropriate help in the form of various therapies. We, of course, encourage you to use our teachings and tools to heal your psychology. If you have experienced a high point at some point in the past and you are longing back to it, then the only real cure is to make a conscious decision where you decide that you will no longer look back to the past, but that you will open yourself up to receive the gift you can receive in the moment.

If you are looking to the future with fear of some calamity, then again I encourage you to use the appropriate tools to resolve this trauma, for it is a trauma that causes you to look to the future with fear. If you are looking to the future for some kind of reward, I encourage you to realize that you are a co-creator. If there is going to be a better future, you need to co-create it yourself instead of passively waiting for something outside yourself to manifest it.

You need to realize that in order to co-create that better future, you need to start by actually appreciating the moment, appreciating the situation you are in, as Saint Germain so wisely talked about. It is a key teaching of the Buddha to be present in the now. This is most obvious in the teachings of Zen Buddhism where they focus greatly on experiencing the now. I am not hereby telling you to become a Zen Buddhist, but I am telling you that it is valid to contemplate how to live in the now, how to at least experience the now at certain points in time.

A frame of reference

With this, I would like to take you through a little exercise. My purpose is to help you gain an experience of the now. My beloved, you have participated in this ascended master conference. You have been here, some of you, for the entire four days. You have participated in the rosaries, the invocations, the decrees. You have listened to the dictations. You have interacted with each other. For many of you, this has been seen as a process that leads towards a goal. There is always more invocations to give, there are more dictations to come. But now you have reached the final dictation, you have given the final invocation. There is nothing more to look towards in the future, and therefore I encourage you to recognize that the most valuable gift you could take with you from this conference was an experience of being completely present in the now, of appreciating the now.

Therefore, my beloved, I encourage you – in your own minds – to say to yourself: “STOP! I will stop my usual thought patterns.” I encourage you to step back and look at yourself and how there is usually always some pattern in your mind that is projecting thoughts or emotions on the screen of your conscious awareness. These thoughts and emotions are pulling your awareness into some reaction, into some sequence of thoughts and feelings, that is sometimes almost like a track that runs automatically. Your attention is pulled along with it without you really realizing what is happening.

Now, I call you to realize what is happening in your mind and to consciously realize that this is simply like a movie that is playing on the screen in a movie theatre or on your television set. I encourage you to realize that you do not actually need to stop the movie.

There are many Buddhists who think that during meditation you need to try to stop thoughts, but this is very difficult to achieve even for very seasoned practitioners. What I am telling you here is to say: “STOP! I will no longer be identified with the track of my thoughts and feelings. I will just let it run but I will step back and I will come to a new awareness that I am not the thoughts and feelings. I am not the mind. I am not the track playing in the mind. I am a formless being. I need nothing from the past in order to be complete in being who I am. I need not wait for anything in the future in order to be complete in who I am. I am complete right now! I am complete in this very moment! I am whole!”

You can therefore feel, that deep within you is a silence, the silence of the Buddha, your Buddha self. You may even be able to feel as the figures of the Buddhas sitting in meditative position in complete calmness and peace. You do not need to envision yourself as any form. You can actually, if this works better for you, see yourself as a formless being, feel yourself as a formless being, experience yourself as a formless being.

Now, I encourage you to realize that you are here in this room at this moment. You are not alone. You are many people here. Many of the other people in the room you do not know. Perhaps you have not talked to them during these four days. Perhaps you have not looked in their eyes. Perhaps you have not actually appreciated these other people, but I encourage you to open your eyes now and to look around. Dare to look at each other, to look each other in the eye and acknowledge each other. Dare to look at the messenger’s eyes, that are truly my eyes looking through his at you.

My beloved, let us acknowledge each other, for we have come together in a special unity that is very rarely seen on this earth: the horizontal unity of you below with us Above. This is a special moment. This is a rare moment. There are not many people who ever get to experience this in a lifetime, my beloved. Yet, you are here. You are experiencing that moment right now. When you recognize that you are here in unity with each other, you have performed a valuable, an invaluable, spiritual service. You are here in unity with an ascended master, a spiritual being. When you recognize this, what more can you ask of the present moment? When you recognize this, can you not be fully present in the now?

Be complete and feel that there is nothing you need from the past, nothing you need from the present, there is nothing you need from the world, for we are complete in our oneness now. Those of you who can experience this completeness, you now have a new frame of reference that you can take with you and use. When you have time in your busy lives (or when you decide to make time in your busy lives), you can use whatever means appeal to you, including playing this dictation or reading it, giving invocations, playing music, doing whatever works for you. But make that effort to tune in to my Presence as the Ascended Master Gautama Buddha. Then, based on your experience of this moment, you can experience the same completeness again. When you do this, perhaps many times, there can come a point where you begin to feel you can maintain your appreciation for the present moment on a continuous basis.

No judgments in the child-like mind

I understand that in the beginning there will be a contrast between your normal state of awareness and those times where you are fully present in the moment. There will be those moments where you are fully present and then there will the many moments of your normal life that demands your attention and pulls it into these patterns. As you experience more and more of these moments where you are fully alive, fully present, fully in appreciation, then you can begin to feel there is less and less contrast.

This does not mean that you are always sitting there being fully awake in a meditative posture, for surely there are many times that your normal lives demand your full attention. But you can come to a point where, at any moment where you think about this, you can tune in and you can be fully present in the moment even when you are doing certain activities that do not demand your full attention.

I am not telling you, as some Zen Buddhists want you to believe, that you can always be completely in appreciation of the present moment in the midst of busy activities. Life is very demanding and there is nothing whatsoever wrong with having these periods where you are focused on a particular activity and therefore you do not have attention left over for visualizing or feeling yourself as the complete Buddha who is detached from the situation and appreciating the situation from without.

What I am saying is that you can have a state of mind where your life is a constant process of appreciation. You are appreciating life in general, and at any moment you desire, you can tune in and appreciate the present moment fully when you have left-over awareness for it. This, of course, is part of that child-like mind.

What we can add to what Saint Germain said earlier is that the child-like mind has no judgments. It has no value judgments. It does not analyze. It does not compare. Essentially, when you are trapped in the past or trapped in the future you are constantly analyzing and comparing the present to the past or to the future. The past was better than the present. The past was worse than the present. The future will be better than the present. The future will be worse than the present. There is this constant analytical, comparative track running in the mind. When this is there, you are not present in the moment, your attention is pulled into focusing on the analysis. You can cultivate, and you need to do this consciously, the state of mind of not judging, not analyzing. This is a delicate process that will take time but by using our invocations and our teachings it is an attainable goal.

You can come to a point where you have no need to judge what is happening in life. You have no need to always express an opinion about this or that, about what other people are doing, what other people are saying, what the politicians are doing, what the politicians are not doing, what the local sports team did or what they did not do. All of these things, that are occupying most people, can fall away in importance to where you do not need them to feed this element in the mind that always wants to be judging, putting something down, putting something else up. There is always the comparison based on the dualistic scale of right and wrong, good and bad, up and down, this and that. You can deliberately and consciously decide to engage in a process of setting this aside.

You can make specific calls for the consuming of the energies in the emotional, mental and identity realms that are pulling your mind into repeating these patterns where so many people have such turmoil in their emotional body that they are constantly feeling a need to be angry at somebody. They need to have a scapegoat that they can direct their anger at because they will not acknowledge that it is truly anger against themselves. By working on yourself, you can come to this point where you no longer need to judge everything. You no longer need to evaluate everything and you do not need to have opinions about everything.

Observing rather than judging

What will you then do, you might say? What kind of a life is this? Does that mean that you become a person who has no thoughts? Nay, my beloved, it does not mean that you are not engaged in life. There is a state of mind that is beyond judging based on a dualistic scale and it is a state of mind where you are simply observing. This is not a dualistic, relative evaluation and judgment. It is an observation and you can begin with observing yourself based on a very simple standard, if you want to use the word standard.

This messenger many years ago tuned in to my Presence and received the thought that the goal of life was Buddhahood. He recognized that in order to attain Buddhahood, you need to overcome your attachments. He had a vision, that he received from me, where I went through the final initiation before I entered nirvana. I had to be confronted, while sitting under the Bo Tree, with the demons of Mara. He realized that what the demons of Mara were doing was attempting to reach into my mind and find some kind of pattern, some kind of attachment, that they could use to pull my attention into a reactionary pattern to what they were doing before my eyes.

He realized that what they were trying to do is to look at my lifestream, all of my embodiments, and look at the attachments I had had, and then try to use those attachments to engage me. It was only when I had no attachments, that I was able to remain completely unengaged by anything presented to me by the demons of Mara. This, of course, has its parallel in the teachings of Jesus where he said: “The Prince of this world comes and has nothing in me.”

While there certainly is a final initiation that you must go through before you enter nirvana or the ascended state, you can look at life as a continuous version of this initiation. You are always dealing with the Prince of this world, with the demons of Mara, who have only one goal: to reach into your being, discover an attachment and use it to pull you into a reactionary pattern that then consumes your conscious attention for a time. For some people it is not “for a time” but for a lifetime or many lifetimes that their attention has been completely consumed by a particular pattern, such as defeating those other people that they see as the enemy or having a particular experience or attaining a certain goal. Whatever it may be, there are many, many people whose attention has been consumed by something for lifetimes. You are not among those people or you would not be here. Your attention is not completely pulled into material life or you would not be open to the spiritual path.

Therefore, you can recognize this and you can recognize that the goal of the spiritual path is to gradually come to see and overcome your attachments so that there is less and less whereby the demons of Mara, the Prince of the world, can pull you into a reactionary pattern to the world. The measure for your own advancement on the path is how often your mind is pulled into these patterns, how intense they are, how emotional they are. The more you feel that these fall away, the more peace you begin to experience. As Saint Germain said, the more peace you have, the more you can play with life. When you attain some measure of this peace, you can begin this detachment, you can begin to look at life in a different way without the evaluation, without the judgment, without the analysis. Then, you also begin to look at other people and when you meet a person who is telling you about his or her life, you do not need to have an opinion about how that person should live.

Having no opinions about other people

Most of the time when people have opinions about what other people should do, it is because you yourself feel threatened by something that other people are doing. You have the opinion that they should stop doing what makes you feel threatened or what forces you into a reactionary pattern. Many, many people have the attitude that when they are reacting to other people, it is the other people’s fault. They are the cause of it. Such people have not been willing to look at the fact that no one can make you react unless you have an attachment in your being. When you are on the spiritual path, the path of Buddhahood, you of course acknowledge that it is up to you to overcome your attachments. When you do so, other people can no longer pull you into these reactionary patterns.

That is when you can begin to look at these other people and instead of having an opinion that is determined by your own wounds and attachments, you can now simply make an observation. You can observe: “Is my friend at peace?” If your friend is not at peace, then you can attempt to tune in intuitively to what it is that takes away your friend’s peace. Then, you might feel inspired to make a simple statement where you are not trying to tell the other person what to do. You are simply stating in your own words what you are observing and how this is taking away your friend’s peace. Perhaps your friend could find another way to look at life without being pulled into these patterns all the time. If your friend is receptive to this, you might then recount your own experience of how you overcame your attachments. In some cases, your friend will not be receptive and may even respond negatively and refute your observation, but you can then remain non-attached to this. You do not need to feel rejected. How can you feel rejected when you had no intention of changing your friend?

Most human interactions follow the same pattern

My beloved, most of the interactions that you see at the personal level between human beings can all be categorized under the same pattern. You see a person who has an inner attachment that is causing him to be in a constant reactionary pattern. This reactionary pattern is reinforced, triggered or stirred up by other people. When the person will not recognize the need to change himself by overcoming the reactionary pattern, he will seek to change other people in order to avoid them stirring up his inner pattern. You see that 98% of human interactions in this world are in this category where people are trying to change others in order to avoid having to change themselves. When you begin to see this and when you begin to free yourself from it, you will feel such a liberation, such a sense of peace, such a sense of bubbling joy!

My beloved, if you truly experienced completeness in the moment a little while ago when I took you through that exercise, then you have already experienced the peace that you will begin to feel on a continuous basis when you overcome these attachments. Then, you come to that conscious recognition: “But I don’t need to constantly be judging other people or judging life, and actually I don’t need to constantly be judging myself. Ah, I can stop judging myself. I don’t need to be judging myself.” Then, you can free yourself from the most subtle ploy of the devil or the demons of Mara, namely to get you to always judge yourself based on the idea that you are somehow flawed or deficient or you made some mistake in the past that you need to spend eternity seeking to compensate for. Instead, you can simply go into a state of mind, as the messenger described the other day, where you are at peace with being who you are right now.

You know you have not completed the spiritual path or you would be ascended. You are in embodiment, but you do not need to judge yourself for the fact that you have a ways to go before you can ascend and you have unresolved psychology. You can simply observe yourself. You observe your reaction. When you see yourself reacting, you do not need to judge yourself harshly, or feel bad, or feel that you have now made a mistake, or that you are a bad person, or that you are not a good spiritual student. You simply observe the pattern and then you say: “Why am I reacting this way, what is the pattern, what is the belief?” When you come to clarity, perhaps by using the invocations and by praying to your favourite ascended master to help you see this, then you can see the pattern. Then you can say: “Do I want to live the rest of this lifetime repeating this pattern?” If you feel: “No, I don’t,” then you look at the decision and then you consciously change that decision. Then, you have taken a step towards freedom but you remain in that state of not judging yourself.

You do not need to judge: “Am I a good spiritual student, have I reached an advanced level of the path?” You just need to wait for the next time you see a pattern and then without judging it you observe: “What is the effect of this pattern, what is it doing to my actions and my feelings about myself and life? Do I want to feel this way? Do I want to act this way?” Then, you follow the process and again you liberate yourself. You come up higher and you feel more free. As you begin to accelerate this process, you can come to that point where you are constantly at peace with flowing from one situation to the next. As we have said about the Tibetan Buddhists, you are locked in to the fact that life is a continuous flow.

You are a timeless being

You do not need to evaluate situations based on whether they were good or bad, whether they were a success or whether you made a mistake. You recognize that anything that happens in the material realm is a temporary manifestation. You realize that even though there can be physical consequences that you cannot undo (you cannot change, you cannot free yourself from because you cannot change what happened in the past), the physical consequences are not actually affecting your life experience, for your life experience takes place inside yourself. It happens in the mind. Therefore, you can recognize that whatever physical situation you are experiencing, it is an opportunity for you to see a reactionary pattern in yourself, to free yourself from that pattern and then move a step closer to Buddhahood.

What happens in this lifetime truly has no eternal, ongoing, timeless impact on your life. As you begin to escape judgment, as you begin to escape identification with your body and with your physical situation, you realize you are a timeless being, an ongoing being. You have had many lifetimes before this one and you will have a long existence after this lifetime. What does it then matter what happens to you in the physical when what happens in the physical has no impact on your life after this lifetime?

My beloved, if you could look back to what happened to you a thousand lifetimes ago, you might see that you might have experienced a terrible physical consequence, such as being killed in war. But it was a thousand lifetimes ago. Does it really matter today what happened so long ago? It is no more significant than when you were a child and you lost a cherished toy and could not find it again. What does it really matter today that you lost that toy in childhood?

You realize that the physical events have no significance in themselves. They can only affect you through the reaction you have in your mind. My beloved, whereas you cannot change the physical consequences, you can at any time change the reactionary pattern in the mind. This is the essential key to walking the path towards Buddhahood, namely that you recognize that you can always change what takes place inside your mind. It is what takes place inside your mind that determines your experience of the now, your life experience. It also determines your future, the course you take in the future.

Your reactionary pattern determines your future

You may look at people and you may see that many people who experience an undesirable event react the same way: disappointment, anger, negativity. They go into a reactionary pattern. My beloved, now consider this: Any event that happens to you in the physical is a single point. You are sitting here right now and your situation right now, in this moment is a single point. In front of you is a huge plane, a huge surface like the big square down here in the Olympic Park. You are sitting at one point, and in front of you is the entire open square and theoretically, you can walk in any direction you want on that square.

Even if you have experienced a certain event in life, there are still many paths that are open to you into the future. When you have a reactionary pattern in your mind, that pattern will prevent you from even seeing the many paths that are open. It will focus your attention on one path, and often the most negative one. You will think this is the only way you can react and this is the only path you can take into the future.

I tell you, that when you walk the path of Buddhahood and overcome your attachments, you will come to a point where you can experience an event and it may not be an ideal event from a certain viewpoint. It may not be what you actually desired, but nevertheless you will see that regardless of that event, you have many paths open to you that you can take into the future. Because you have overcome your reactionary pattern, you are free to choose among those many paths, and that is when you can flow with the River of Life. You realize that your life is an ongoing flow, and it is not a process where you can stop and be stuck in a certain point no matter how dramatic or traumatic of an event you experience. The flow does not stop. You might decide to take yourself in a certain direction that makes you feel like the flow has stopped or that you are going against the current of the River of Life and experiencing tremendous opposition but the flow has not stopped.

When you overcome your reactionary pattern, you can see that by a slight change of your view of life, your approach to life, your attitude to life, you can change the direction of your life. Then, in the future you will end up in an entirely different destination than the track you were on based on the negative pattern. My beloved, what does it really matter what has happened in your life here in the physical? What does it really matter which road you have taken, as long as you end up at your ascension point at the end of this lifetime? Or at least end up at the highest possible point you can reach so that you open up for a better incarnation in your next lifetime.

What does it really matter what happens to you, when anything that happens can be used to set a better course into the future? When you recognize this, you can avoid being pulled into these reactionary patterns. You can begin to observe the patterns. You can begin to dissolve your attachments, and for each attachment you dissolve, you move one step closer to Buddhahood. This is, of course, what I desire to see for you. That was what I attempted to teach, to demonstrate to my disciples 2,500 years ago. So few of them were able to get it. Nevertheless, some people have been able to use the teachings of the Buddha to get this, and many more, hopefully, will be able to use the teachings of the ascended masters in this age to lock in to the essence of the path to Buddhahood.

The immovable and the ever-changing Buddha

My beloved, I wish to give you some thoughts based on what I said the other day, namely that, I the Buddha, am an ever-changing being and that I have transcended myself many times since my last embodiment 2,500 years ago. I am aware, of course, that my statements were provocative to those who have the traditional view of the Buddha. They were deliberately made to be provocative because I do not want you to fix your minds on a static image of the Buddha.

Of course, it is true that there is an element of the Buddha that seems unchanging from the human perspective. What you need to understand – in order to resolve what might seem like a paradox – is that the human state of consciousness is what I called the “Sea of Samsara” where there is constant turmoil, constant movement. It is, of course, your attachments that pull you into reactionary patterns to what happens in your physical life, and this is what creates the turmoil that makes your life an entirely chaotic process.

In order to begin to chart a new course in your life, a systematic course towards Buddhahood, you need to overcome some of this chaos so that you find some peace, some silence, some moments to step back and look at life. This is where it can be valuable for you to focus on the Buddha as the immovable Buddha, the peaceful Buddha, the silent Buddha who offers you a refuge from the chaos of the Sea of Samsara. This is a valid image when it is used for this purpose.

When you come to a higher level of the path, and you have begun to establish some inner peace, then you need to recognize that even though the Buddha is immovable by any force in this world, it does not mean that the Buddha is static. It does not mean that the Buddha is never-changing. Silence, peace, immovability does not mean that there is no ongoingness. That is why we have given the teachings about the River of Life, which are beyond the teachings I gave 2,500 years ago in a certain way, or at least expressed with more modern words.

You need to recognize at the higher levels of the path, that even Buddhahood is not stillstand. You will see that there are some people in the East, both in the Buddhic and the Hindu tradition, who portray life as a wheel. Somehow, your soul emerges out of Nirvana and you go into embodiment, and you make karma that it necessitates that you come back into embodiment. Then, you can discover a path whereby you can free yourself from your karma so that you are not forced to come back into embodiment. Some people and some teachers teach that after you free yourself from the wheel of rebirth, you disappear back into Nirvana and you disappear as an individual being. Then, my beloved, what is really the point of emerging from a state of nothingness, going through all this turmoil on earth and then going back into the state of nothingness? What is the point? There is no point, and that is why many people have come to feel hopeless, to feel that life has no purpose if I just disappear after all this struggle.

There is no state of no-self

What we teach, as the ascended masters, is of course the reality that you are an ongoing being. After you escape the wheel of rebirth, you can ascend and continue your conscious evolution towards higher stages of consciousness. When you quiet the turmoil in the mind, it is important, it is essential, for you to begin to lock in to this ongoing nature of your own being and therefore also of the Being of the Buddha. How can you feel that you are striving towards Buddhahood, if you think this is a static state. Or a state of no self, as certain teachings teach, but here is no state of no-self, my beloved. There is, however, a state of no human self, no separate self. There is no state of no-self in the sense that there is always the Self created by God, your divine individuality that is ongoing.

It is not a matter of overcoming the human self and disappearing into nothingness, it is a matter of overcoming the human self and reconnecting to your true Self. The trick here is, my beloved, that overcoming the human self will, to the human self, feel as a state of no-self, a state of nothingness. The human self cannot envision a state that is conscious but does not have the dualistic polarities of the human self. To the human self, to the fallen beings, this seems as nothingness but it is not nothingness. It is not no-self. It is One Self. It is the Buddha Self.

The image I want to leave you with is again that of a river. When you look at a river that starts in the mountains, you see that at the first stages of the river, it drops in a very steep drop and the water moves very fast and the water is very turbulent. This is a symbol for the phase most people are in where they are so trapped in their own reactionary patterns, so trapped by their attachments, that they are caught in the Sea of Samsara, the whirlpools, the turmoil, the waves, the chaos. Everything in their life is chaotic and they are being flung to and fro by slings and arrows of an outrageous fortune. They have no control of their life and they cannot stop the rollercoaster of their life.

Then, when you walk the path and you discover the true inner peace of the Buddha, you are like the later stages of the river where it flows gently through the landscape. You begin to experience that even though there is movement in the river, there is an ongoingness of the river. You can still feel at peace for there is not the turmoil.

When you come to that point, you can get a different perspective on the Buddha. When you feel peace in yourself, even though you realize that you are still in embodiment and you are still moving with the River of Life, you can see that peace can actually be attained in movement. Then, you can realize that what seems like the immovability and the static state of peace of the Buddha is not actually static.

My beloved, think about the river. You are at a certain point in that river, and therefore you tend to look at the river from that viewpoint. Now step outside the river and then look at a river that starts in the mountains here in Eastern Korea and flows through this city of Seoul. Then, realize that this river can be looked at as a wholeness. It is made up of individual water molecules, but you can switch your perspective and you can realize that the entire river is one continuous mass of water. That, my beloved, is the Buddha, the entire river, the oneness of the river that flows. Some parts are turbulent and some parts are calm, but the entire river is one whole. That, my beloved, is the Buddha. That is silence in movement. That is the River of Life, and I AM that river and you are that river.

You will say: “But I am in the river,” and, yes, you are, but it does not prevent you from connecting to the totality and realizing that the entire river is the Buddha Nature. Therefore, you can tune in to the totality so that even though you are at a certain point in the river, you can still in glimpses experience the totality. This gives you a fundamentally different perspective on life. It is the ultimate key to overcoming those last attachments that you carry with you even on the higher stages of the path. They must be overcome before the river of your life can flow into the ultimate sea, the peaceful sea that is beyond the Sea of Samsara, or that is what I called the Other Shore.

Thus, my beloved, I wish you peace in movement and I seal you in the peace that I AM, and I seal this conference, this true breakthrough to a higher state of consciousness for you individually and for the collective state of consciousness of South Korea, North Korea and the larger Asian area. Be sealed in the ongoing, ever-flowing peace of the Buddha.

 

Copyright © 2016 Kim Michaels

The secret to manifesting a Golden Age


TOPICS: Each group has its own energetic burden – A new generation will build the Golden Age – Why did I embody in this culture? – Transferring a cultural bias to the ascended masters – Being conscious of the creative process – The Golden Age is not a burden – Making peace with the Mother realm – Making peace with your Divine plan – Making peace with the spiritual path – The key to moving on from difficult situations – Playing your way into the Golden Age – 


Listen to the recording of this dictation (Subscribers only)

Ascended Master Saint Germain, July 4, 2016 through Kim Michaels at a conference in Seoul, Korea.

I AM the Ascended Master Saint Germain, and I come to give you the secret to the Golden Age. This is not a grandiose or special secret. It is not even really a secret. It is what they call a public secret, for it has been in the public’s awareness for the past 2,000 years. Of course, Jesus gave you the secret to the Golden Age when he said that unless you receive the kingdom as a little child, you shall in no wise enter into it. This is, truly, the main secret to the Golden Age. The Golden Age will not be brought through force. The Golden Age will, of course, require work but it will not be brought through work alone. It is not a mechanical process of bringing the Golden Age. How will you bring the Golden Age? Not by working more but my playing more.

Each group has its own energetic burden

Bringing in the Golden Age is a creative endeavour and creativity has an element of play, of playfulness. Now, my beloved, step back from your own situation and look at people around the world, as you can do if you are around people from different nationalities. You can look at the people and try to look beyond what you see with the physical eye. You can use your inner eye, your intuitive sense of vision, and although you may not physically see their energy fields, many of you will be able to tune in with your heart and sense their energy fields.

When you do this, you will sense that each nation, each race, each culture, each group of people that is clearly defined has its own burden. Every group is carrying a yoke, as we might say, that weighs them down, that gives them a certain characteristic in the energy field. Although each group has its own characteristic, they all have the same effect: They make people take themselves and their lives very seriously.

If you will look at yourselves as the people in South Korea, you can see that you also have a certain national cultural or national psychological element that makes many people take life very seriously. This begins for many of you in childhood, even with your parents before you go to school, but certainly when you enter the school system where you are paced to perform a certain way in order to get good grades. You do this by working hard, by listening to what the teacher says, by learning by heart so you are able to repeat what the teacher wants to hear so you can get the good grades, and go to the right schools, and get the right jobs, and then live the life that has been defined for you.

I tell you, my beloved, many of you who are in the slightly younger generation have not come to live your entire lives according to the standard model of the Korean culture or any other culture around the earth. You have come because you wanted to be here to help bring the Golden Age. Of course, you do not bring the Golden Age by repeating the old patterns.

Now my beloved, I am not here trying to say that this is some major fault that all people have this burden. It is very understandable that many nations or other groupings of people have this burden. As an example, when you look at the people of South Korea, you see, of course, that in the slightly older generation, they experienced the war. They experienced that their country was eighty percent destroyed after the war and they experienced the major undertaking it was to rebuild their country. Surely, it was necessary to rebuild the country in order to set a foundation for the Golden Age. There is no dispute about this. There is no dispute about the fact that the older generation have done a magnificent job of rebuilding their country and creating a viable economy, a vibrant economy and raising the standard of living.

I am not here trying to put any culture, any nationality, down. You can go to every nationality and you can see that the burden they have is, of course, very understandable given their past, given their history. Is it any wonder that the Russian people have a certain burden? Is it any wonder that the German people, the Japanese people or the Chinese people have a certain burden, given their past? It is no wonder, it is very understandable.

What I am pointing out to you is that there was a certain generation of souls that came into embodiment in order to experience these very intense situations, some the second world war, others the later wars or the Cold War. They were part of that period, that phase, in the growth of the earth and the collective consciousness. This was their karma, it was their dharma, it was their role in life. It was therefore understandable that, due to the outer experiences they have had in their lifetime, they have taken on this national burden. It is understandable, my beloved.

A new generation will build the Golden Age

What I want to point out here is this: You, who are the spiritual people, regardless of your age, you do not need to live the rest of your lives with this burden. Many of you who are younger do not belong to the generation who had it as their karma and dharma to experience these traumatic events. You belong to a different generation who are here to bring the Golden Age forward. You do not do this by living your lives the way your parents did, by striving to learn and to work the way your parents did.

That is why there is a generation gap and a conflict between generations in many countries. The older generation wants the best for their children but they think the only way to get it is to do what they have done, only do it better, do it more intensely and that is why they are pacing their children. The children, of course, subconsciously (at inner levels), they know that this is not right for them. This is not the way that they can fulfill their dharma or balance their karma. They cannot fulfill their reason for taking embodiment by repeating what their parents did and doing it so intensely that it swallows up their lives. Therefore, you need to look at your own nation or group and see:  “What is it that they have taken on here and how can I avoid having it burden me to the point where I take life so seriously and take myself to seriously that I cannot fulfill my Divine plan and my role in bringing forth the Golden Age.”

Many of you, who are spiritual students and are very sincere spiritual students, have a tendency that when you find the teachings of the ascended masters (or any of the other spiritual teachings), you will approach the teaching with the same way you have approached life until the point you found the teaching. If you were brought up in a culture where people take themselves very seriously and they think they have to study hard and work hard, then you will approach a spiritual teaching the same way. You will use the teaching to justify your cultural perception filter. You will find elements of the teachings that make you think that the teaching, that the ascended masters, requires you to take life and the spiritual path very seriously, that they require you to take yourself very seriously, that they require you to study hard, to work hard, to apply yourself and to pace yourself.

Therefore, you continue the pattern you have been in before, of pacing yourself, of judging, evaluating, criticizing yourself, tearing yourself down, or whatever you have been doing, but now you think it is the ascended masters who are doing this to you. This, my beloved, is not true. It is a product of your perception filter that you have taken on based on your culture, based on the group of people and the mindset that they have put upon you. It is also often something you carry with you from past lifetimes, for there is, of course, a reason why you chose to be born into a certain nationality, culture or other grouping.

Why did I embody in this culture?

My beloved, if you will look at the group you are born into, the collective consciousness you are born into, you will be able to see that there is some element of that collective consciousness that was the reason you chose to be born there. You chose to be born there because in past lives you have not freed yourself from the consciousness that is embodied in the collective of your group. You know that you need to free yourself from it in this lifetime, you need to free yourself from it in order to be able to fulfill your Divine plan and bring your contribution to the Golden Age.

Many of you have gotten yourself into a state of mind where you feel burdened by your culture, by your upbringing and you rebel against it in a certain way. You feel that this is not right, that you do not want to be here, that you are not thriving here. This is very understandable, my beloved, but what I point out to you is that while something can be understandable, it does not mean that it is also constructive.

It can be very understandable why people are where they are in consciousness, but it is not constructive for them to think that they couldn’t help it or that there is nothing they could do about it. There is something you can do about it when you look at yourself, you look at your culture and you say: “Why did I choose to come into embodiment in this particular culture?” Then you can begin to look at what is the exact element of your collective culture that is irritating or burdening you the most. What is it that creates the strongest reaction in you? Then you will know that this is precisely the element that you need to overcome in order to fulfil your Divine plan. It was this element that was the reason you took embodiment in your particular culture.

There can be two reasons for it. Either you needed to resolve a certain burden in yourself because you have the same pattern. You have the same tendency to do to yourself what your culture is doing to you, and you need to come to see this. You need to see: “Why am I doing this to myself? Why do I feel I’m not good enough? Why do I feel like my worth is determined by my outer station in society? Why do I feel like I have to pace myself so hard in order to prove my worth? Why do I feel that I always have to be worried about what other people think or say about me?”

Indeed, there are many more of these mechanisms found around the world, but when you discover what it is, you can resolve the belief you have, which relates to where you do not see yourself as being worthy unless you live up to some outer standard. This is one element of why you chose to be in this culture. You want to resolve this particular burden or pattern in your psychology.

Another element is that there can be an element of the collective culture that you simply need to transcend, you need to move away from. You may have to resolve something in yourself before you can do this, but there comes a point where you simply need to look at the culture and you need to say: “No! I will not live this way. I will not judge myself this way. I will not take myself so seriously, based on the criteria defined in this culture.” The Alpha and Omega of transcending your culture is to resolve whatever attachments, whatever patterns, whatever beliefs, whatever wounds you have that correspond to the national culture.

The other element is to come to the point where you simply decide: “I will not submit to this pattern anymore. I will not submit to this culture. I will not let this culture stand in the way of me fulfilling my Divine plan and bringing the Golden Age.” That is when you can begin to look at two things: You can begin to tune in to what is your Divine plan, what are you here to bring forth? When you get some feel for this, you can begin to look at your culture and say: “How is my culture limiting or blocking my ability to bring forth what I can bring forth from above, from my higher being, from the ascended masters?”

Then you can begin to decide that you will transcend this. Some of you may need to move away from your culture for a time to get a different perspective, but others can do it while staying in your home country if that is where your mission is. Of course, it is entirely possible that you can be born in a certain country but your Divine plan is not in that country. Still, you need to overcome whatever was the reason you chose to be born in that country before you are free to move.

What I am pointing out to you here is that if you will make the effort, if you will stand back and look at yourself and look at your culture, then you can come to this point where you suddenly see why you have been taking yourself so seriously, why you have taken life so seriously, why you have taken the spiritual path so seriously. Then, you can begin to relax. You can begin to do what the messenger said: accept yourself for who you are. You can begin, my beloved, to enjoy being on the path, to enjoy being in embodiment, to enjoy fulfilling your Divine plan and making your contribution.

Transferring a cultural bias to the ascended masters

You see, my beloved, there is a tendency for people, as I said, to transfer their cultural bias, their cultural perception filter, to the ascended masters. Many people who come from a culture like, for example, South Korea believe that life is somewhat of a struggle, life requires hard work and hard study. Then, when you work hard, somehow there will be a reward in the end. Many people work their entire lives without realizing what the reward might be, and then when they lose their job or retire, they realize that this was not the reward they were hoping for. They are disappointed and many people end up feeling that their lives were wasted because they were striving for something and they never quite attained it.

Well, my beloved, I can assure you that when I look back at this almost a century where we have given ascended master teachings (going back to the time when I released the violet flame and the knowledge of the violet flame so many years ago), I can see that there is a certain percentage of the spiritual students who have approached the spiritual path according to their cultural bias. They have thought that we of the ascended masters are either like the god that they were brought up to see (such as the angry, judgmental being in the sky) or that we demanded the same of them that their culture demanded.

You come to the spiritual path and you are applying yourself to the spiritual path with your cultural bias and you project that it is we of the ascended masters that are demanding this of you. But you see, my beloved, we are demanding nothing from you. We are not the ones who are causing you to take yourself, life and the path seriously for we know, of course, what is the key to spiritual growth. It is to shift your consciousness, and it is not a mechanical but a creative process. With “creative” I mean something very specific.

When you look at a mechanical process, it is something that people can do mechanically, meaning they are conscious but they are not consciously aware of what they are doing. Take a look, for example, at the many factories where people are sitting at an assembly line and they have a few tasks to do to a product unit that is moving by them. They have to put a screw in here and a nut on here or they have to do something else. They sit there and repeat this process many times a day. This is something that they can do and, of course, they are conscious but they are not really aware, they are not really awake. They are mechanically doing this. Perhaps their mind is elsewhere or perhaps their mind is in some state that is almost a coma.

There are many people who go through their entire lives in this mechanical state of consciousness where they are never fully aware of what they are doing. There are many, many people who find the spiritual path and they apply themselves to the spiritual path with this mechanical mindset. They think it is a matter of studying a teaching, doing decrees, doing invocations, meditating, going to conferences, doing this, doing that. They think that if they do all the outer things, then one day there will be a reward, for somehow magically they will be transformed into beings with a higher state of consciousness.

Being conscious of the creative process

What we have attempted to point out for a long time (and what we have especially attempted to point out through this messenger because it is the core of the Aquarian message) is that this mechanical approach to the spiritual path will not work. It is those who, as Jesus said, attempt to take heaven by force, those who are like the scribes and Pharisees who think it is enough to do the outer things and that this is what the spiritual path is all about. We have seen ascended master students, my beloved, who have applied themselves very eagerly and with determination and with great effort to giving decrees and following the path in a certain way. Then, when they have done it for ten, twenty or thirty years, they have come to a point where they somehow can’t do it anymore and now they feel disappointed. They may even feel they have been deceived by the ascended masters and they begin to doubt whether the path is real, whether the masters are real, whether there is any point in trying to do anything.

The reason for this is that these people have not locked in to the inner path, the inner creative path, which is all about one thing: stepping outside of your normal state of awareness and looking at yourself, looking at life with a greater sense of awareness. Then coming to see that here is a pattern in your psychology that is holding you back. It is making you suffer, it is making you feel that life is not what it should be. It is making you take life seriously, it is causing you emotional pain or mental confusion. It is causing you to see yourself as a limited being who cannot go beyond certain boundaries. When you see this pattern consciously, when you really see it, when you see the decision behind it, then you can consciously make a different decision and then you have taken a decisive step forward on the spiritual path.

Now, my beloved, our decrees and invocations do indeed work in terms of transforming the energy that makes it difficult for you to step back and look at yourself with higher awareness. Nevertheless, stepping back and looking at yourself is not a mechanical process, it is something you need to do consciously. That is why I call it a creative process because it requires self-awareness, self-observation and the willingness to make a decision.

There are many people who have looked at creativity as an inspirational process. There are many writers or painters who feel like, at certain times, they are magically given inspiration from some source and then they can paint or then they can write or then they can play music or then they can come up with new ideas. My beloved, this is because these people are not consciously aware and they do not have conscious mastery of the creative process. What we are calling you, who are our students, to do is to step up to a higher approach where you seek to gain conscious awareness of the creative process so that you are not passively waiting for inspiration but you are actively seeking inspiration.

The Golden Age is not a burden

This messenger found the ascended master teachings many years ago and for a number of years he applied himself very eagerly and with great determination and great effort. Then, there came a point where he realized that it was time to step up to a different approach. In fact, he realized that it was not us, the ascended masters, who were demanding that he should work so hard. It was he himself who was making this demand upon himself, and therefore he could have continued to work so hard for the rest of his life without making progress. There was no external force, there was no external karma, that demanded that he should do it this way for a certain amount of time. He needed to do it this way until he inside himself came to the resolution that it was time to step up to a higher approach.

You, of course, all can follow the same process of coming to that inner realization that the true inner path is about self-observation and seeing these patterns and then overcoming them, letting something go and deciding to adopt a higher approach, deciding to adopt a higher reality, a higher view of life and of yourself. This is truly what I desire for all of you. I have said it before, my beloved, that I do not desire to see my students suffer and feel that the path is a burden for them for a lifetime. Then, at the end of their life, when they have left the body and they go through a life review, they realize that all of their striving, all of their suffering, all of their judging and pacing themselves had not actually enabled them to fulfill their Divine plans fully.

Therefore, I desire all of you to come to the realization of what is your gift to bring forth so that you can begin to bring it forth. You will not come to that realization if you feel that the path is just another work, is just another burden that I am putting on you. My beloved, bringing the Golden Age of Saint Germain is not a burden, it is not a duty, it is not something you absolutely have to do. I am not forcing anyone to work on bringing forth the Golden Age, my beloved.

I have no desire whatsoever to see you live the rest of your life feeling so burdened, taking yourself and the spiritual path and life so seriously. I have no desire to see you live the rest of your life in this state of not accepting yourself and always feeling like you are not doing enough or you are behind. I desire you to overcome this pattern in your psychology so that you can return to that state of being as the little child who is joyfully and lovingly experimenting with life.

Making peace with the Mother realm

Now, in order to return to that state, I wish to present you with two things for your consideration. There are, of course, many things that could be said for this, and probably many things will be said by us. Nevertheless, I wish to present you two things. One is that you need to overcome this sense that is so ingrained in many cultures that the material world, that the Mother realm, is deficient or is malicious or is opposing you, is not wanting to give you what you think you need or what you desire to have.

There are many, many cultures that have this consciousness of lack. Again, when you look at the history of those cultures, it is very understandable why the old generation had this sense. Certainly, when you look at your parents here in Korea, you can see that they had to struggle. Therefore, it is understandable that they have accepted this very subtle sense that there is a lack in nature and that they have to work very hard and almost force nature to give them more abundance.

You, who are the younger generation, you who are the spiritual people of any generation, you can look beyond this cultural bias. You can work on reconciling yourself with Mother Nature, with the Mother realm, with the matter realm. You can come to accept what was said by Jesus, namely that it is your Father’s good pleasure to give you the kingdom but that God the Father gives you the kingdom through God the Mother that is the material realm. You can then use the many teachings we have given, including Mother Mary’s teachings in A Course in Abundance, of how you can come to see that the Mother realm will give you what you desire, but she can only reflect back to you what you are projecting upon the mat-er light. Therefore, you need to overcome the consciousness of lack that has been put upon you by your parents and by your culture.

The same, of course, is true in so many other parts of the world where their parents or grandparents experienced the wars and experienced the struggle of building a more affluent society. Of course, I am well aware that there are many parts of the world where they still have not achieved an affluent society, but I am speaking specifically for those who have achieved some level of material abundance that allows you to actually focus on other aspects of life, rather than working so hard on physical, material survival.

Making peace with your Divine plan

You also, as a second thing, need to come to that point where you realize that your Divine plan was not something that was put upon you by an external force. There are many spiritual students who come to the spiritual path and then they hear us say: “Oh we need you to give these decrees and invocations to transform the negative energy that is burdening you personally or burdening the world. We need you to study, we need you to raise your consciousness, we need you to do this and we need you to do that.” Many people then apply their cultural bias and they think that we are now requiring you to work so hard on bringing forth the elements of your Divine plan.

My beloved, it is not that we do not need some spiritual students to do work and because there are not so many spiritual students who are open to our teachings, we very much appreciate when you do work and when you do many decrees and invocations because they have a positive effect. I am not saying that you should not make an effort, but I am saying that you should make a balanced effort so that your life is not swallowed up by either working to earn a living and then in your spare time giving decrees and invocations. You never have time to step back and look at your life and ask yourself: “Do I want to live this way the rest of my life? What is my Divine plan? What are the elements of my Divine plan?”

What I want to point out to you is that many people can have this sense that fulfilling your Divine plan is an obligation, it’s a duty, it’s hard work, it’s something you just have to do because some external force requires it of you. This is not true and you need to work consciously on reconciling yourself with your Divine plan and realizing that your Divine plan is not put upon you from any external source. It is what you chose.

It is just that when you chose your Divine plan, you had a broader perspective than you have right now when you are inside the four lower bodies and looking at life through that filter. When you made your Divine plan, you could look at a broader perspective and you could see what you wanted to do, what you wanted to bring forth. When you begin to lock in to this, my beloved, you can realize that there are two elements of your Divine plan.

There is the karma you needed to balance and the psychology you needed to resolve on one side. This, in a sense, could be seen as the work you have to do because it stands in the way of the second part of your Divine plan, which is to bring your gift to this planet. My beloved, bringing your gift is not a burden, it is not an obligation, it is not hard work. It is play. The key to bringing your gift is the childlike mind.

What does the childlike mind have? It has no worries about how it is going to receive a living, how it is going to get food or a roof over its head. It feels that this is taken care of, and you can come to a point where you have made peace with the Mother and you have taken practical steps to provide a living for yourself and therefore you can let this worry go away. You know that this can happen, that this is going to happen and it may require some amount of your time and energy, but it will not swallow up your life and so the rest of the time you can focus on your gift without having to worry about all these practical things.

Your gift is the other element of being a child, which is that you are not working, you are playing. Look at how many of you can barely remember a childhood where you were just allowed to play because for so many of you, even in early childhood it was put upon you: “You have to work, you have to do what is required, you have to fulfill your duty.” You can nevertheless come to a point where, again, you allow yourself to be the child. You allow yourself to play, and that is when you will begin to truly lock in to the gift aspect of your Divine plan. You will begin to realize that you chose to bring this gift because you knew it was what would give you the greatest joy, the greatest satisfaction, the greatest sense of purpose in life.

There may be many of you who have been brought up by your parents to always look at life in very practical terms, of how you need to get a good job. In order to get a good job, you need to get a good education. Therefore, you will need to look at what jobs are there in your society and what kind of education you need in order to get this job. For the first part of your life, you have focused on practical, outer measures. Now, for some of you, you will be able to use this − your skills, your experience − in providing a living for yourself so you do not have to worry about the practical aspects.

For others, you will come to a point where you realize that what you did in terms of getting an education really did not have anything to do with the gift of your Divine plan. This messenger is an example of this where he strove to get a certain education but then came to realize that this was not truly what he was meant to bring forth as his gift to this planet. He worked for a long time on discovering that gift, and then he realized that it was being a messenger for the ascended masters, being a writer and bringing forth all of these new ideas. Certainly, this has given him greater joy, greater sense of purpose, greater sense of fulfilment than anything else he could have done with his education, even though that could also have been creative work.

For many of you it is the same way. You will not do what this messenger is doing and many of you will find a way to be active in society, to be out there in the working life so you are provided a comfortable living. You can still find that there are ways whereby you can bring forth something new, something that gives you a sense of satisfaction of being creative. You will do this when you can play with whatever you are doing.

Many of you have had it put upon you from early childhood: “You need to get an education, you need to get a job, you need to work hard because this is the way you get ahead in life.” You tend to look upon your work life as a burden, something you have to get over with. Then, when you are off of work, you can have some enjoyment in your spare time. For many of you, it will be possible to make the switch in consciousness where you actually realize that you can express your gift, the gift aspect of your Divine plan, through your work. Therefore, you can begin to play with certain elements of your work. You can find a new way to approach work.

Maybe you can find a new job, a new position, but you are finding a way to make it playful instead of being this burden that you long to get away from. That is when you will feel that doors will begin to open up. You will begin to see something you could not see before. Suddenly, an opportunity will open and it just seems like the natural next step to walk through that door. You do it, and now you are in a different situation where you feel more free to express your creativity.

Making peace with the spiritual path

My beloved, what I am pointing out to you is this: the spiritual path has stages. There is a certain stage where you simply cannot see what is beyond that stage, you cannot see what is at the next stage. You can just think of what it feels like to go into the elevator in this tall building and you are in a closed room where you cannot see what is outside the windows. Then, you can ride up to a certain floor and when you get to that floor, you can see what you could not see from the ground level. You can see what is behind the trees, you can see what is behind the hill and then you can go even higher and then you can see what is behind the other buildings that are lower than the building you are in. That is the way it is on the spiritual path.

Right now, you are at a certain stage and you tend to take this stage seriously. You tend to feel certain limitations. This is understandable, my beloved, but is it constructive? If you could shift your awareness, you could begin to consciously decide that you will not take yourself and life so seriously, you will make an effort to play more. Or rather, you will make a conscious decision to stop making so much of an effort, to stop working so hard, to stop being so serious, so driven. Instead, you will step back and focus more on the playful aspects of your situation.

If you would do this, if you would make an effort to stop making an effort, then you would see that something would open up very gradually. You will begin to get a broader perspective and you can see, not necessarily where you are going ten years from now, but you can see a door opening that you had not seen before. Then, you can see that your next step is to walk through that door.

My beloved, there is no one who has ever been in embodiment who has had the full awareness of their Divine plan or how their life was going to unfold for the rest of that lifetime. Not even Jesus knew this ahead of time. We all have to start where we are and then open ourselves up to see the next step. Then, when that door opens, we move through the door without knowing what is behind that door, but we have confidence that this is the natural step to take. Then, when we are at that next level, we again work on increasing our perspective, increasing our vision and then we see the next door.

You can come to a point where you have made peace with the fact that this is the way life is. This is what we have called the River of Life where you are at peace with being where you are, you are at peace with flowing with the river because you know that the right doors will open at the right time. When you are in attunement, when you are playful, when you are willing to flow with life, you will get to the right place at the right time, including getting to your ascension point at the end of this lifetime.

This is what we call being in the River of Life. It is not that you know everything. It is not that you are guaranteed a certain result, but the results are no longer as important as the process because you are enjoying the process rather than being so focused on the result. I talked about the people who work their whole lives, always running like a donkey is running in front of the carrot that is hanging in front of its nose, but they are never catching up, they are never feeling that anything is enough or good enough. This is not what we desire to see for you.

The key to moving on from difficult situations

We desire to see you be at peace with being who you are, being where you are at on the path, being where you are at in life. My beloved, this messenger has realized many years ago that the key to moving on from a certain situation is to come to a point where there is nothing in the situation that causes a reaction in you. Therefore, you are not actually longing to get away from the situation, you are at peace with being in the situation. When you come to the point where you are at peace with being in a certain situation, that is when you are free to move on and that is when you will see doors opening.

As long as you are struggling, as long as you are rebelling against being where you are, you cannot move on. Why can’t you move on? Because, my beloved, you put yourself in your current situation because there is a lesson you have not learned. There is something in your psychology you have not seen. As long as you are struggling against the situation, the tension you are creating by struggling makes it impossible for you to step back and look at your reaction and say: “Why am I reacting this way? What is the mechanism in my psychology? What is the belief I have that causes me to react this way?”

It is only when you do step back that you can overcome the tension. When you see what the pattern is that is creating the tension, then you can resolve it. When you are standing there looking at the situation, which for example can be the way you react to your parents, then you can come to the point where now you have resolved the element in your psychology that caused you to react to your parents. Now you can look at your parents and say: “But now that I have no negative reaction to my parents, they are actually very nice people and I can live with them.” That is the moment where you are free to say: “But does the fact that I can live with them mean that I want to live with them?”

That is when you will find that, suddenly, a door will open up and you will see that maybe it is your Divine plan to move somewhere else, but you are not doing it to get away from your parents. You are not moving, you are not running away from something. You are moving to something higher. You are moving into a new situation. Maybe it isn’t even necessary for you to break off your relationship with your parents, your family or your society. Maybe it is just necessary for you to shift your perspective.

I can promise you that in many cases when you shift your perspective, the dynamic you have with other people will also shift, even if they are not consciously working on their psychology. You will treat them differently and in many cases this will cause them to treat you differently. If they are not able or willing to do that, then you can be at peace with moving on or maybe even recognizing that you will have a relationship with your parents at a certain level. It will be on their terms and it will be what it will be, but it is not going to limit you because you are going to walk your path in life, the path that you desire to walk, and you are going to be at peace with that.

Playing your way into the Golden Age

My beloved, what I point out to you is this: the key to fulfilling your Divine plan and the key to bringing the Golden Age is to see it as an act of playfulness. For this to happen for you, you need to look at: “What are the elements in my life and in my own psychology that prevent me from playing, that might even make me think that it is somehow wrong to play?”

It is ironic, my beloved, that your parents are the ones who give you life and they are the ones who take care of you during your childhood. Therefore, ideally, your parents should be the ones who give you a safe environment in which you can allow yourself to be children and allow yourself to play. Ironically, in many cases, it is precisely your parents that are the greatest limitation for the children because the parents destroy the children’s ability to play and to approach life from a playful perspective. The parents are the ones who are putting on their children something that makes it difficult for the children to relate to life with playfulness.

You who are spiritual students, you can consciously overcome this pattern of whatever was put upon you by your parents or your culture. You can come to the point where you can look at your parents, you can look at your culture but it is not limiting you. You are not forced into a reactionary pattern. You are still able to play.

If you can do this my beloved, you will make a major contribution to changing your culture and bringing it up to the Golden Age level. As I said, the culture that has brought many nations to their present level cannot bring them into the Golden Age. You will, of course, also make a big contribution to making your own life easier and more enjoyable, and this is truly what we all desire to see for you, namely that you can enjoy being in embodiment on this earth.

We know there are many problems and challenges on this earth but, my beloved, when you are in the Golden Age mindset, the challenges will not prevent you from being at peace with being in embodiment, being at peace with being who you are, being at peace with fulfilling your Divine plan. When you are at peace, you can be playful. How can you be playful when you are not at peace, my beloved?

This is what we desire to see for you. My beloved, think about Jesus’ statement: “Unless you become as a little child, you shall in no wise enter the kingdom.” Why is that my beloved? Because it is the childlike mind that makes you open to receiving a gift. For the Golden Age of Saint Germain to be manifest in the physical, the process required is this way:

  • I am an ascended master.
  • I am envisioning from my perspective the vision for the Golden Age.
  • I cannot force this into physical manifestation.
  • It can be brought into physical manifestation only when those of you who are in embodiment accept it as a gift, accept elements of it as a gift.
  • You cannot receive it as a gift unless you are open to receiving it.
  • If you think it requires a struggle and hard work and effort, how can you receive the gift, my beloved?

The Golden Age is a gift from me to humankind, and gifts must be received before they have an impact in the material realm. Only you, who are the spiritual people, can receive it, but you can receive it only when you have the childlike mind of a child that allows yourself to play with life, to play with the path. When you see that I am not a strict master that makes demands on you, but I am a loving master who is perfectly willing to give you the gift, then you can receive what I offer this planet.

I leave you with these many thoughts. I I hope you will ponder them and use them to step back and look at the elements in your life that have taken away your innocence and that are preventing you from playing with life from that wonderful state of mind that we have called the childlike mind, but it really is more than any child expresses on earth. It truly is that inner state, that inner sense, that innocence, of knowing that you are one with the ascended masters above and with all life below. Therefore, you are in the figure-eight flow between spirit and matter that truly is the River of Life.

I AM in that River, and for the next 2,000 years, one might even say that I AM the River of Life for planet Earth. You too can be in that River, even while you are in physical embodiment. The question I put before you is: “Will you continue to struggle against the current of the river, or will you make the conscious decision to flow with the River of Life that I AM?”

 

Copyright © 2016 Kim Michaels

Clearing the fanaticism that blocks the Golden Age


TOPICS: Why nations have been divided – Superiority as the basis for killing – Polarization in society – Fanaticism overrides the instinct not to kill – Fanaticism and denial – The desire to overcome fanaticism – The judgment of certain fallen beings –


Listen to the recording of this dictation (Subscribers only)

Ascended Master Sanat Kumara, July 3, 2016 through Kim Michaels at a conference in Seoul, Korea.

I AM the Ascended Master Sanat Kumara. I come to give you a teaching that goes far beyond the borders of Korea. So far, we have talked about what you can do to make calls on the fallen beings in Korea, South Korea, North Korea or even in the region here in Asia. Nevertheless, this in itself is not enough to bring forth the Golden Age in Korea or even on a planetary level.

Therefore, given my role of having come to earth and held the balance for this planet for such a long time, I hold the position in hierarchy where it is possible for me to bring forth the judgement of certain fallen beings who are standing in the way of the manifestation of the Golden Age on a planetary basis. The reason we are bringing this forth here is precisely because the divided Korea is one of the last remaining examples of the type of fallen beings and the consciousness they represent.

Why nations have been divided

You will see that within the last century or so there has been a number of incidents where a nation has been divided or even where a region has been divided. This is not only a phenomenon of the modern age. If you go back in history, especially to before recorded history, there has been many examples where there has been created such division that it was necessary to forcefully separate certain people and certain nations. When I say “necessary.” I do not mean necessary from an ascended perspective but it seemed necessary from the human perspective, it seemed unavoidable.

What I desire to give you is an understanding of the background of this phenomenon. The background is, of course, that there are certain fallen beings, as we have explained, who have an agenda to prove God wrong. One of the ways they seek to do this is to get human beings on earth to destroy themselves and each other, thereby making it (in their minds, mind you) seem as if free will has failed. Instead of using their free will to rise to higher levels of awareness and reach their ascension, human beings have used their free will to destroy themselves and each other and maybe even destroying the planet in the process.

This is literally the agenda of certain fallen beings who exist in the lower identity realm. They are supported by certain fallen beings in the mental realm, in the emotional realm and over time a few fallen beings have been in embodiment. The ones who have taken physical embodiment have not been as powerful as the ones in the identity realm who have avoided taking embodiment out of simple fear of the consequences of being in a physical body and not being able to escape the physical consequences of what they had set in motion themselves.

You need to understand that these beings have absolutely no similarity to the way you see yourselves as spiritual beings or even as human beings. They have absolutely no respect for human beings on earth. They consider the human beings who embody on earth to be far below them, to be far inferior to themselves. They consider themselves to be in a fundamental way different from human beings. That is why they have absolutely no sympathy, compassion, kinship or respect for human beings or the right of human beings to exercise their free will without interference from any external force.

Instead, they believe they have an absolute right to manipulate human beings and to treat them as things, as robots, as mechanical beings, who can be manipulated and controlled at their whim. There is, as we have said before, nothing that anyone, ascended or un-ascended could say to these beings that would convince them that they are wrong. You cannot reason with them, you cannot appeal to any kind of sympathy and therefore there is no power on earth that can stop these fallen beings from doing what they are doing.

There is, of course, a power on earth that can stop them from influencing life on earth and it is free will. Human beings in embodiment can choose not to be influenced by these fallen beings. They can choose not to be manipulated and controlled and deceived. They can choose not to surrender their free will to these fallen beings so that they become unwitting tools for their agenda of destruction. Mother Mary explains in her book [Help the Ascended Masters Stop War] that in order to get people to go to war, the fallen beings must find a way to override the natural built-in instinct not to kill your own species. They have found various ways to do this.

Superiority as the basis for killing

What I wish to discourse with you on is a certain aspect of how they seek to manipulate people into killing each other. This begins, you must understand, with the fallen beings who are in embodiment. You understand that when this planet had reached a low level of consciousness, it became possible that fallen beings would start taking physical embodiment. You now saw a phenomenon that was new on this planet. You saw a situation where the fallen beings who were in embodiment could be directed as robots by the fallen beings in the identity realm.

Even if the fallen beings in the identity realm could not take over the minds of human beings in the beginning, they could take over the minds of the fallen beings who had taken embodiment. Thereby, they could create specific scenarios that created such suffering among human beings that human beings eventually became open to the influence of these fallen beings in the identity realm. The fallen beings now saw the opportunity to manipulate human beings into these large scale insanity exercises that you call war.

You create a state of collective insanity so that groups of people, whether they are belonging to particular religions, nations, ethnic or racial groups will suddenly use all of the resources they have built up in an all-out effort to destroy whom they see as the enemy. You reach a state here that is a complete setting aside of the desire for the survival of the species, the instinct for the survival of the species. This manipulation begins with the fallen beings in embodiment who act upon and therefore spread the consciousness of superiority.

The fallen beings who are in embodiment, although they are not as high-ranking or as powerful as the fallen beings in the identity realm, nevertheless feel superior to the human beings who embody on this planet. They also feel no kinship, they feel no compassion, no respect for life and therefore it is very easy for them to act out on this concept of superiority. They believe in the concept but through their belief in the concept they are not actually acting on their own.

If you could see what I see from the ascended realm, you will see that although there have been many fallen beings in embodiment who truly thought they were powerful as individuals, none of them have actually had much power. When they acted out on a certain agenda, their minds were taken over and they were literally like robots being directed by the fallen beings in the identity realm. The fallen beings in the identity realm have been like the masters who are directing the marionettes. They are pulling on the strings and therefore making the fallen beings in embodiment do their bidding.

The fallen beings in embodiment have managed to set themselves up as leaders of various societies and they have then created the idea and spread the idea that their society was superior to any other society or to a specific other society. If you look at, for example, the fallen beings in one nation, these fallen beings have become completely convinced that they were superior to that other nation that was their enemy. They thought they were acting based on some higher authority because the fallen beings in the identity realm had managed to make the embodied fallen beings believe that they were directed by some Divine authority. It was because of their connection to this authority and their origin in a certain Divine way that they were superior to the other group.

What they did not realize was that the other group of people were also led by fallen beings in embodiment who had the exact same belief in their own authority and their own Divine lineage. They were also deceived and taken over by fallen beings in the identity realm. It was not two groups of fallen beings in the identity realm but one group that was directing both of the groups that were against each other on earth.

Polarization in society

You see how you have had many, many situations where there has been a polarization between two opposing polarities. In the modern age, you have seen it very prominently between the polarity of the Communist nations and the polarity of the capitalist nations, or at least the so-called capitalist nations. You have seen it in Nazism against all others but you have also seen many other examples of two groups that were forming this kind of polarity where there was no way to bring about reconciliation.

The mechanism that is used by the fallen beings is therefore first of all to introduce this belief in superiority and inferiority. As we have said before, in order for some to be superior, others must be inferior. There must be the contrast between the two or it is not possible for anyone to feel superior. You cannot raise yourself up above other human beings without putting others down. It cannot be done for there is no inherent superiority in God’s universe. Human beings were not created with some inferior and some superior. All men were created with equal rights and equal worth in the eyes of their Creator and, of course, all women as well. When I say “men,” I refer to both men and women.

You see, my beloved, all belief that some people are inferior to others is an artificial idea introduced by the fallen beings. There are no exceptions to this whatsoever. There never has been, there is not now and there never will be. You may have heard that there are certain highly developed spiritual beings, called avatars, who have taken embodiment on earth. But they do not see themselves as superior to other human beings. Why not? Because they are highly developed spiritually and therefore they know the oneness of all life. They know that the duality consciousness is a complete illusion and has no reality in God whatsoever.

Once this belief in inferiority and superiority spreads, then what happens is that people come to believe in it. It is important for you to understand why they come to believe in it, and it is because the fallen beings have first gone through a period where they have created much conflict and strife that has put people down. All of the societies we have talked about (where you had a very rigid structure, a very hierarchical society where most people were either the peasants or the workers who had little possibility of improving their lives), all such societies have had the purpose of putting the majority of the population down so that they would come to feel inferior.

You see, once again, that the fallen ones first create an unbalanced situation that makes most human beings feel that they are inferior, that they are not good enough, that there is something wrong with them. Religion has been used very skilfully by the fallen beings to do this, even by the concept you know today, believed by so many Christians, that you were created as sinners, that you were created with an inherent flaw. Once the fallen beings have induced this feeling of inferiority, they now offer human beings, or at least certain select human beings, a way out of it.

It is that if they belong to that certain group of people that are led by this certain group of fallen beings, then because they have these superior leaders, they themselves are a superior people compared to the enemy that is over there and is inferior because their leaders are inferior to your own leaders. Their leaders are evil, they are bad, they are working with the dark side or whatever excuse you can come up with for labelling other people as being wrong or of the devil or aligned with the devil or having a false religion or a false political ideology or whatever it may be.

Once this dynamic has been created (where people feel inherently inferior but they are offered a way out of this inferiority so that they can come to feel superior), then you have a built-in conflict. The one empire led by one group of fallen beings see themselves as superior and they have something (be it a religion, a political ideology or whatever) that they need to spread to the entire planet. If this can happen, their superiority will be proven and they will establish some ideal state on earth. If it cannot happen, then the consequences will be disastrous for the entire earth. Of course, in order for this group to establish its superiority and spread their idea to the entire earth, that “other” group that is their enemy must first be destroyed. You have now the seeds of a conflict between these two groups.

Fanaticism overrides the instinct not to kill

The inferiority/superiority dynamic can now be taken to the next level where it results in complete and utter fanaticism on both sides of the conflict. Fanaticism is a peculiar state of mind because it is almost the only state of mind known to human beings that can completely override the instinct not to kill your fellow man. As Mother Mary has said, anytime two sides (two groups of people) go to war, there is fanaticism on both sides, otherwise you cannot get people to kill each other at this large scale. You can (at a smaller scale) get people to kill each other as a matter of self-defence. When it comes to the large scale you see in a war between nations or groups of nations, you cannot get this to work without inducing this state of fanaticism on both sides.

I know very well that many will be reluctant to admit this. They will point to situations, such as the second world war, and they will say: “Surely, we can see fanaticism in the Nazis, but surely you cannot really mean that the Allied forces also acted from a fanatical state of mind.” It has always been so that when there has been a confrontation and one side won, then they have believed in their superiority. The fact that they won must mean that they are superior and therefore they could not be as bad as the side that lost. If the side that lost was clearly fanatical, then the winners could not be fanatical.

It is a complete illusion, it is a state of delusion that springs from fanaticism because fanaticism is based on a fundamental mechanism of denial. Psychologists have, for a long time now, operated with the concept of denial. It is an outcome of fanaticism, or you may say it is the foundation for fanaticism but actually both is the case. You cannot enter fanaticism without denying something, such as the humanity of those you see as your enemy. You cannot deal with fanaticism in the long run without also denying that you are or have been in a fanatical state of mind.

Fanaticism and denial

Now, my beloved, we have given many, many teachings on the duality consciousness. We have explained how it works psychologically and the essential element of this state of consciousness is denial. When you go towards one dualistic extreme, you will automatically be able to deny any validity to the other dualistic extreme. The further you go towards an unbalanced extreme, the stronger your denial becomes. When you look at a scale, you can see that the dualistic consciousness always has two extremes. In between the two extremes there is a certain gray zone where people may be affected by a dualistic viewpoint, but they have not taken such an extreme position that they have moved too far away from the centre point. Even in the duality consciousness, there is a zone in the middle where people are affected by duality but they have not gone so far towards either dualistic extreme that they have entered the fanatical mindset.

You will see, if you look back at history, how there was a time where all people on earth were affected by the dualistic conflict between Communism and Capitalism but there were many people who had not taken such an extreme view that they were in a state of fanaticism. In fact, the majority of the people were still in this zone in the middle where they were not fanatical and therefore they were not willing to kill from a fanatical state of mind. Then, as a conflict heats up there are two groups that form that see each other as the enemy and both of them see each other as being in an epic conflict with the other. Fro then on, more and more people are pulled into the extremes and now enter the fanatical mindset.

I know very well that you will look back at the second world war, surely this was started by Nazis out of pure fanaticism, anybody can see this. Well, then this is fine that anybody can see this, but what many people do not see today is that in order for there to be an actual war, an all-out war, then those who fought the Nazis also had to enter the fanatical mindset. There are many people who may be able to see the fanatical mindset on the part of the Russian forces and the Russian leaders, but there are many people who will be reluctant to admit the fanaticism in the minds of the leaders (and to some degree the people) of the Allied forces, England, America and others.

The desire to overcome fanaticism

Nevertheless, I can assure you that when you see what I see from the ascended realm, you see that on the part of both the leaders and many among the people, and certainly many of the people in the armed forces, there was fanaticism present. This has been the case numerous times in history. Fanaticism leads to an all-out conflict. What you have seen within the last century is that the fanatical mindset has led to such severe wars with such severe consequences that many people have begun to wake up and say: “We can nevermore allow this fanaticism to create such a large-scale war.”

Into this equation must be figured the fact that the technology was released to produce nuclear weapons so that people could see that if there was a third world war, it would inevitably be fought with nuclear weapons and then the consequences would be even more devastating than the first two world wars. This fear of consequences has (unfortunately, one might say) been one of the factors that has prevented a third world war. You see how the process of the mechanics of denial leads people to a state where the only way they can get out of the fanatical mindset is through the School of Hard Knocks whereby the fanatical mindset creates such severe consequences that people finally say: “We cannot allow this anymore.”

After the second world war, there was a certain awareness, a certain consciousness, that started growing in the world where (as people processed the war and the revelations of the holocaust and the many atrocities that were committed during the war) there was a certain awareness that we cannot allow this kind of confrontation to ever take place again in our lifetimes. What happened here was that, in a way, the fallen beings in the identity realm lost some ground. They lost some influence over humanity.

The judgment of certain fallen beings

Because of the actions of the ascended masters, of certain ascended master students and the growing awareness among many people on earth, it was possible to bring forth the judgment upon certain beings in the identity realm and of course certain beings in the other three realms, including the physical. This meant that there were certain fallen beings that were removed from the earth, which therefore made it less likely that there would be another situation where there was such fanaticism on both sides of a conflict that they were willing to enter an all-out war even with nuclear weapons and disregard the consequences.

I trust you can see that when people enter the fanatical mindset, they become so fixated on this goal of destroying the enemy that they are completely unaware or unable to recognize the consequences of this conflict. They disregard, they deny the consequences and they believe that no matter what the consequences, they must destroy the enemy for not destroying the enemy will lead to even worse consequences. You see that there has been a certain awareness in the world that this cannot be allowed to happen.

Nevertheless, this does not mean that all of the fallen beings in the identity realm were removed. Those that are left have, of course, not given up but have attempted to manipulate human beings ever since. What you see is that they have been able to manipulate human beings into creating these divisions.

When you look at the situation after the defeat of Nazi Germany, where you had the leaders of England and America and Russia who met to discuss the future of Europe, you saw how there was the division of Europe between East and West, even the division of Germany into two nations. There was then, after the war, the creation of the Iron Curtain that divided Europe for so many years into two separate spheres.

Now my beloved, why did this division come about? It came about because the fallen beings in the identity realm managed to manipulate fallen beings in embodiment into thinking that the only way to avoid a future all-out confrontation was to accept that you had these divisions between communism and capitalism. Instead of having an all-out conflict between the two, it was necessary to reach some kind of agreement to divide the territory between them. Unbeknownst to the people in embodiment, they were simply used as tools by the fallen beings in the identity realm.

Now you might say, my beloved, am I hereby saying that Churchill, Roosevelt and Stalin were all fallen beings? And yes, that is precisely what I am saying, despite the fact that many will be completely unwilling to acknowledge this (but this is a product of a psychological state that I have talked about and called “denial”). If you will not see that this was a product of the fallen consciousness and the fallen beings, then how can you move on? How can you escape the manipulation of the fallen beings, who ever since the ending of the second world war have been attempting to manipulate human beings?

What was their purpose of creating this division? It was to maintain the state of polarity between two opposite sides. They were hoping that they could then inflate this conflict to a point where again fanaticism on both sides had become so strong that the need to destroy the enemy was so big that they were willing to set aside the consequences.

When you look at the world and the development of the world since then, you see, of course, that there have been other such polarities, other such divisions that have occurred as a result of this division of the world between the Communist sphere and a so-called “free-world.” You saw it here in Korea, you saw it in Vietnam and you have seen other attempts at creating these polarities.

What you have the opportunity to do, based on this release of light and teaching from me, is that you have the opportunity to call forth the judgment of Christ upon the fallen beings in the identity realm who are creating these divisions based on superiority, based on fanaticism and the belief that one needs to destroy the enemy regardless of the consequences. It is not only the people here in Korea who have this opportunity but world-wide.

We are giving this teaching here because right now Korea is, of course, a focal point for this type of division even though it must be said that it is largely one-sided. You see, of course, this clear fanaticism in North Korea, both among many of the people but also among the leadership. They believe that in order for them to survive, they must fight for their survival regardless of the consequences. They are in such a state of denial that they actually think that they could wage a nuclear war (if only they had enough weapons) and still survive as a nation and still maintain their grip on the nation. They actually, some of them, are in such a state of denial, such a state of fanaticism, that they will not acknowledge that North Korea cannot stand against the entire world, cannot defeat or conquer the entire world and that they would indeed be against the entire world if they used nuclear weapons.

You can make the calls for the binding of the fallen beings in embodiment who have this state of consciousness, for the binding of the fallen beings in the emotional realm who are also encouraging people to just kill regardless of the consequences. You can call for the binding of the fallen beings in the mental realm who are using sophisticated mental theories to make people believe in these scenarios and also go into denial. You can, of course, call for the judgment and the binding of the fallen beings in the identity realm who are behind this entire scenario.

This is something that is important for people everywhere to make calls on because it is absolutely necessary that some of you in embodiment will ratify and call forth the judgment that I will now pronounce upon these fallen beings in all four levels of the material realm. Therefore I, Sanat Kumara, by the authority given to me by the Cosmic Hierarchy of Light, I pronounce the judgment of Sanat Kumara upon the fallen beings in the identity realm, in the mental realm, in the emotional realm and in physical embodiment who are behind this attempt to create a state of fanaticism that leads to the desire and the actions to destroy an enemy regardless of the consequences for oneself, for the enemy, for humanity or for the planet as a whole. These fallen beings are judged this day from the perspective of the ascended masters.

This Alpha action is therefore sent forth to the level of you who are in physical embodiment. You have the opportunity to ratify and affirm it and therefore anchor it in the physical octave so that it will be a manifest reality in all four octaves. We can therefore clear away these dark forces, these fallen beings, from this planet and overcome this major block to the manifestation of a Golden Age where. Indeed, fanaticism based on inferiority and superiority is a major block to the manifestation of a Golden Age and has been a major block in many past scenarios where a Golden Age was ready to be manifest but was blocked by this fanaticism.

There has even been cases where a Golden Age was manifest and it was destroyed by the emergence of the fanatical mindset. By the judging of these fallen beings and the consciousness behind them, we can make major progress towards setting the people on this planet free from the fanatical mindset whereby they can step back and reconnect to who they are as spiritual beings. When you reconnect to who you are as a spiritual being, you will be able to rise above the entire inferiority/superiority mechanics.

You will know that you have no need to feel superior compared to other people for the simple reason that you have no need, no reason, to feel inferior within yourself. Therefore, you do not need to compensate for the inner sense of inferiority by creating the illusion of an outer state of superiority. You can instead accept who you are. You can accept your fellow human beings for who they are and you can see that you are all spiritual beings who came from the same source.

This, then, is a significant dispensation, a significant turning point for the opportunity of the evolutions of this planet to be free, to do what the vast majority of the people on this planet truly desire to see, namely an age of peace, progress and prosperity. My beloved, there is no human being who would reject the abundant life if they truly believed it was possible to have it.

What can prevent them from believing that it is possible for them to have the abundant life? Only the state of mind of fanaticism that causes them to go into denial of what has been said so many times, for example by Jesus when he said: “Fear not little flock for it is your Father’s good pleasure to give you the kingdom.” You can deny this only through a state of fanaticism. When you overcome this, you know that it is actually true.

It IS God’s and the ascended master’s good pleasure to give you a Golden Age of peace, prosperity and progress. Therefore, it is indeed our good pleasure to support our beloved brother, Saint Germain, in manifesting his Golden Age for earth.

 

Copyright © 2016 Kim Michaels

Survival of the kindest, not the fittest


TOPICS: Corruption comes from the fallen beings – How to root out corruption – Business conglomerates in Korea – Business reform in Korea – A broader perspective on corruption – A hierarchy of fallen beings running society – Fallen beings in Korea – A new type of business – Flaws in the theory of evolution – Communism and capitalism are not natural or inevitable – From survival of the fittest to prosperity of the kindest – 


Listen to the recording of this dictation (Subscribers only)

Ascended Master Mother Mary, July 3, 2016 through Kim Michaels at a conference in Seoul, Korea.

I AM the Ascended Master Mother Mary, and I wish to give you some teachings on the phenomenon of corruption. There are organizations that are inspired by the ascended masters to be watchdogs over corruption worldwide. Some have created these corruption indexes where they use various criteria to rank the nations of the world based on how much corruption they have. One can, naturally, always discuss the criteria used and one can also see that by using different criteria, one could come to a different ranking. Nevertheless, when you look at some of these indexes, you will see that South Korea is the nation in South East Asia that has the lowest level of corruption whereas North Korea is the nation that has the highest level of corruption.

It is clear of course, or at least it should be clear, that in the Golden Age, the phenomenon of corruption cannot exist. It is not even that it cannot be tolerated, it is simply that it cannot exist when you move further into the Golden Age. Therefore, it is necessary for you, who are the spiritual people, to be aware of this phenomenon and to make calls on it for your particular society but of course also for other societies that you are seeking to transform. Therefore, you who are the spiritual people in South Korea cannot be lulled asleep by the relatively low level of corruption in the South, for you know, of course, that you need to make the calls for the transformation of the North and that means the exposure and the overcoming of corruption there.

Corruption comes from the fallen beings

Now, we might begin our look at this phenomenon by asking some simple questions. It has always been the claim of communism or Marxism that it is the creation of a society that is based on serving the interests of the common people, of the workers. How can it be, then, that North Korea, Venezuela, Cuba − the few countries left that are still clinging to a communist ideology − have the highest levels of corruption among the countries of the world? How can it be that Russia still has a very high level of corruption when it is so influenced by the Soviet past?

Is it not a contradiction in terms that the countries that claim to have a political system that looks after the interests of the common people, have such high levels of corruption? It is, or should be, known as a fact that corruption very much works against the interests of the common people. The common people do not have a position in society that makes it possible for them to accept bribes. They are, of course, not among the leadership who form an elite, even in communist nations, and who are therefore able to create corruption at a high level where it is not a matter of accepting bribes but there is an entirely different level of corruption that is much more subtle.

You see, again, that the explanation is quite simple. As we have already mentioned, a communist system simply gives free rein to the formation of a power elite that is led by the fallen beings. We have also said that an unrestrained capitalist country gives free rein to a small elite and they will also, of course, be the fallen beings who seek to take over that society.

What is the essence of corruption? It is self-interest, narrow fear-based self-interest.

The people who are in a position given to them by society are not fulfilling their position in society, which is to look after the interests of the people or the interests of the state. Instead, they are looking for their own narrow self-interest and then using their position to accept various forms of corruption, from monetary bribes to the exchange of favours. Who are the people who are willing to pay such bribes and extend such favours? They are also people who are looking out for their interests, for by paying the bribe, you can do something you cannot do otherwise. Therefore, you can get ahead of those who are not able or willing to pay the bribe. Again, you see self-interest. What you see at the higher levels is that you have a small clique, a small elite, of people who are exchanging favours in a much more subtle way. They are helping each other reach or maintain a certain position in society or gain certain personal advantages.

You see of course that the phenomenon of corruption is, in its essence, created by the fallen beings. I am not thereby saying that all who are engaged in corruption, whether receiving it or paying it, are fallen beings. I am saying that all who are engaged in any form of corruption have been deceived and pulled into the fallen consciousness and therefore they are part of the system. They have become seduced into thinking that in order to further their self-interest, they have to engage in this corruption. There is no other way for them to do what they think they have to do.

How to root out corruption

You might then ask yourself how there are nations in the world that have reached a very low level of corruption. Is it not, then, that the people in those nations have been willing to look beyond narrow self-interest and look at what is best for the All? They have created an attitude, a culture, where people are not willing to engage in corruption and where the government takes very strong measures to root out corruption, where the press seeks to expose it and where the people themselves seek to expose it whenever they encounter it.

You see from these nations that, of course, they do not have any kind of magic that has allowed them to root out corruption and something that cannot be copied in other nations. They have simply taken measures because there has been a growing awareness that by looking beyond narrow, fear-based self-interest, you can reach a broader, more enlightened self-interest where it is actually in the interest of the general population to create a society with as little corruption as possible.

This, then, means that you create a society where the power elite is not as strong. Therefore, even though there still may be a certain power elite in the countries with low corruption, those power elites will not, to the same degree, attract fallen beings or they will not attract fallen beings who are quite as ruthless. You see that these countries simply do not offer the fallen beings what they want.

When you look at a particular country and look at how you could root out corruption, you need to look at what institutions or structures in society are allowing the fallen beings to do what the fallen beings always do, namely attempt to set themselves up as an elite who can exercise power without responsibility, without personal accountability. They want to gain a personal advantage by any means possible without being held accountable for the means that they use and the suffering it causes the general population.

Business conglomerates in Korea

When you look with this perspective on South Korea, you will see that one of the major sources of corruption is, of course, the creation of these business conglomerates [Also called chaebol] that were created after the war. You may look at this historically and see that, while it was one possible measure of how to get the economy going and overcome the devastating effects of the war, it has also had a high cost for the Korean society and the Korean people. What the government did was essentially to give a position to certain families where they could look out for their narrow self-interest without being held accountable by the government, the media, or the people—and without being financially accountable because they were given these loans that the government would guarantee in case they failed.

What was created here was, in many ways, the dream of the capitalists and the dream of the fallen beings where a small group of people in these privileged families could exercise very great control over Korean society without ever being held accountable by that society for how they affected the people. You may, of course, look at history and see that what was done with these business conglomerates was to create great economic growth in South Korea. You may say that there was a period where this was beneficial to society. And I will not dispute this viewpoint, although I will point out that economic growth could have been attained in other ways, as it has been demonstrated in other countries of the world.

Nevertheless, this was the way that was chosen by the leaders back then and it must be, of course, acknowledged that they faced a very difficult situation. They made the choices they made based on the culture and the history and this is just the way it was. There is no point in lamenting it, placing blame or saying that this was wrong because of such-and-such. There is a need to look at this structure and look at the consequences it has had for society. There is a need to acknowledge very clearly that these business conglomerates simply cannot take South Korea into the Golden Age.

Business reform in Korea

Therefore, there is a need for drastic reform of the economy in South Korea. There is a need for the government to step in and create a different business structure that will spread the power so that it is not based on certain families but is much broader. You then create a new type of modern businesses that have a more professional leadership but also, first of all, a more transparent form of leadership. People will be held personally accountable for their decisions, actions and the consequence that it has for society, for the employees and for the people in general.

Of course, the government has already attempted to reform this structure but they have had limited success. As happens in any society, once you create an elite that has a privileged position, they will become like an octopus that has many tentacles that it spreads into all areas of society. It will seek to exercise influences through these tentacles, through these connections, and the overall purpose of this influence is to maintain the privileged position of the octopus itself so that it cannot lose its privileges.

Therefore, you need to make the calls to support those people in the government, in the media and in other institutions of society who can bring forth this reform, who have the strength of character and will to carry it through regardless of the opposition. We also need to make the calls that the people are enlightened to the organization of these business conglomerates and to their effect for society. Then, you need to make the calls that the people will stand up and support the efforts to reform the structure.

You also, of course, need to make the calls for North Korea to have the reform of what they have created, which is also a phenomenon that gives certain privileges to a very small group of people. These are the people who can be trusted as part of the party, whether they are families or whether they are not families but those who have shown absolute loyalty to the system and who seek to keep themselves in their positions of power.

A broader perspective on corruption

I would like to take you to a greater understanding so that you can look beyond the concrete situation in South and North Korea or even other Asian countries. I would indeed like to take you back in history and realize that the situation you have right now in South and North Korea is not actually unique in history. The outer characteristics may be unique, in the form that you have a communist system in North Korea and you have the business conglomerates in South Korea, but if you look behind the concrete specific situation, you see a pattern that can be seen in many previous ages, not only in Korea but in many of the nations in east and South East Asia. You will see that many of these past societies, that Jesus talked about, that had a very high level of organization, also had a high level of corruption. They also were very hierarchical societies that gave special privileges to a very small elite at the top of society.

Now there is, my beloved, as Jesus said, a certain awareness in the souls of all people that life is supposed to be a certain way and that there are certain manifestations that are not supposed to happen. Of course, one of these subconscious aspects of awareness that are found in all people is that the essence of life is free will. The essence of growth is that you exercise choices but in order to exercise choices, you have to have options. If you live in a society where you are born into a certain station in life and if your parents were peasants, you have no option other than to become a peasant, then the soul will know that it has not been given, by its society, the proper options for exercising its free will. There simply isn’t the freedom, the availability of options, for the soul to choose a path in life that will lead it to maximum growth in that lifetime. Instead, the soul only has the option to mechanically fulfil the station defined by society and this does not lead to maximum growth. The soul knows that this is not right.

What you see is a very strange phenomenon in such societies. Those who are at the lower levels of the society come to the acceptance that there is nothing they can do within the structure of that society. They need to accept their station and although they are dissatisfied with their station, they cannot see how to revolt. Then you see a certain middle class of people who feel that they have an opportunity to exercise certain options. They have certain options available to them for improving their lot in life. They cannot do this by working within the official system, even though they have a certain station in life. Even if they carry out that station to the best of their ability, they have no possibility of advancing to another station. They can only live the life that their station defines by following the official rules.

They see that, through corruption, they can change their lot in life within certain boundaries. They might get more money than they get paid by the state in that society so they can live a more comfortable lifestyle for themselves and their family. They might be able to give certain favours to certain people who can give favours to them or their family. There is a strange phenomenon where people’s natural drive to improve their lives can only be expressed in these hierarchical societies through corruption. This is something that then deceives the middle class of the people into thinking that this is not so bad after all and therefore they also have no drive to reform the system.

When you go to the highest levels of society − the elite that is sanctioned by the system itself (whatever the system may be) − you see that some of those are actually also deceived into using corruption to improve their lives. Others of them are, of course, fallen beings. What you need to recognize here is that anytime you have a highly structured society, a hierarchical society that has a small elite at the top of the pyramid, then you will have fallen beings who occupy all of the top positions. We might say that those in the top ten percent of the ruling elite in society will be fallen beings. This, of course, must not be confused with when we talk about the top ten percent as the spiritual people who have the highest level of spiritual development. What I am talking about here are those who are on top of the pyramid in terms of exercising power in a particular society.

A hierarchy of fallen beings running society

And so you have seen many societies in history where virtually all of the people in this ten percent of the ruling elite were fallen beings. What I desire you to understand here is that there is a peculiar phenomenon that takes places in such a ruling elite. The fallen beings are beings who are trapped in narrow, fear-based self-interest. There are some fallen beings that you can say they do not have a personal self-interest, in the sense that they are actually fighting for a cause or working for a cause. It is, of course, not the cause of God, not the cause of raising up all life. It is a cause, such as, for example, proving God wrong by causing destruction and by causing people to destroy their creativity and not exercise their Christhood.

There are also fallen beings who have a certain desire to attain power, great power over others. Then, there are some fallen beings who have a desire for great wealth, great privileges and a very comfortable, sensual, pleasure-based lifestyle. You can talk about roughly three classifications of fallen beings: those who are working for a destructive cause, those who want power and those who want pleasure.

When you have a country where all three of these categories of fallen beings exist in the ruling elite, then you will see a strange phenomenon where they work out a silent, unspoken agreement between them. There is an acceptance of a hierarchical structure. If there is a fallen being who is working for a destructive cause, then that being will always attain the top position. There is usually only one such being in embodiment in a given society, for they find it very difficult to coexist in the same society. There are few of these fallen beings in embodiment at any given time, for many of them exist in the identity realm or even in some of the lower realms of the astral realm. There are few also in the mental realm.

When one of these beings is in embodiment in a certain society, it will always attain the top position because it has this unfailing belief in its right to rule and it is extremely aggressive and ruthless in destroying anyone who stands in its way and in the way of its cause. It is very rare that those who are below this fallen being in society actually believe in the cause, but they accept it because they see that they can use it to get what they want. This means that you have certain fallen beings who want to exercise power and they realize they can get this power by playing along with the top fallen being who is working for a cause, thereby that fallen being, always a man, will give them power over others, the power they desire.

Then, there are the fallen beings who want pleasure or money and they see that they can fall in line with the two classes above them whereby they will get privileged positions that allow them to get all the money they need to buy the pleasure they want. You see the formation of this silent, unspoken rank between the fallen beings. This is something you can see in several modern societies.

One of the prominent examples is Germany in the 1930s where Hitler, of course, was the top fallen being who was working for his destructive cause. Then, below him were a group of people who had high positions in the Nazi party or in the armed forces and they were the ones who wanted power. Few of them truly believed in Hitler’s cause but they saw that if they supported him, as he needed to be supported, he would give them power over their area. Even though you had several fallen beings who normally would have been in a rivalry to get absolute power, they were able to align themselves under Hitler and therefore stop their internal rivalry, put it aside, while he was there keeping them at bay. Beneath those fallen beings, there was a class who took up positions in industry and business and banking, and they were the ones who wanted money to buy pleasure and privileges for themselves and their families.

Fallen beings in Korea

You will, of course, see a similar pattern in other societies, but the most common pattern you find in most societies is one where there is not a fallen being who belongs to the class that is working for a destructive cause like Hitler. You find only one or several of the type of fallen beings who want power for the sake of having power. In some cases, you will see that several of these beings can also create a rank between them so there is one at the top and others who put themselves underneath that one. You will also see in many cases that the fallen beings who want power form different groupings, for example people who lead different corporations, different companies, who are in a certain state of competition.

Then, of course, you will in all cases see a group of fallen beings who are simply in it for the money and the privileges and pleasure it can buy them. They are willing to do whatever those above them in rank tell them as long as they can get money. What you will also see is that, in some cases, the fallen beings who want power can find a way to accept a certain rank or a certain position amongst themselves even when they are competing for power.

You will see in South Korea how some of the very powerful families behind the business conglomerates have been fallen beings and still are fallen beings in embodiment. They have found a way so that even though they are competing by making the same products, they are not directly seeking to destroy each other. They are accepting that they must all have a certain piece of the cake because they realize that instead of seeking to destroy each other so that one conglomerate takes over and eliminates or takes over the others, and therefore gains the top position, it is more important for all of them to maintain the current structure that allows them to take advantage of society and of the people. This way they can extract power and wealth beyond what they could achieve if they went into war with each other so that one of them would be destroyed and another would emerge as the only one.

I tell you this so you can make the calls for the judgment of Christ upon the fallen beings who are embodied in South Korean society and who are leading these business conglomerates. You can, of course, make calls also for the judgment of Christ upon the fallen beings in North Korea who are the leaders of that country. Here, of course, you have the structure of certain people who want power but you do not actually have a fallen being at the top of North Korean society who belongs to the class that I mentioned that are working for a destructive cause. You actually have a being who belongs to the class that wants power, for he simply does not have the vision to even work for a particular cause, as there is no real cause that has meaning to him, not even communism or Marxism. You can make calls for the judgment of not only the people who are in the top of North Korean society but of the demons behind them and, of course, for the binding of demons in South Korea as well.

When you have this awareness and when you use it to make the precise calls, you will see that changes will begin to happen. Suddenly, the government of South Korea will begin to be more successful in reforming the big business conglomerates and creating a much more diversified economy. You will also see that gradually changes will begin to happen in North Korea where those who have power will start a greater rivalry amongst each other than you have seen so far. This is indeed one of the factors that could create change in North Korea by destabilizing the system so that there is no one who can maintain control over it. When the centralized control begins to slip away so that one person at the top and the few people that he trusts beneath him cannot maintain power, then you can begin to see changes happen.

A new type of business

What I desire to give you next is a vision of the type of businesses that you need to see emerge, not only here in South Korea but in many other nations in Southeast Asia and, of course, in all nations around the world. My beloved, you have the theory of Charles Darwin about the emergence of life through a process of evolution that is based on survival of the fittest. We have before given teachings about the limitations of this theory but I wish to comment on it again.

The basis for the theory of evolution is that all beings who live on earth must find a way to adapt to their environment. Those who are best at adapting to their environment, are the most fit and therefore they will survive. It is not that this theory is completely wrong in the sense that you do see this process taking place in nature. When it comes to human beings, it simply cannot explain the phenomenon that any astute observer can see in society.

The deeper reality is that the situation you have seen in many societies of the past is not a natural phenomenon that was created as the result of an unconscious evolutionary process. It was an unnatural phenomenon created through a conscious evolutionary process that was affected by the fallen beings. The fallen beings have created such a state of imbalance on earth and they have done this through their unbridled, unrestricted aggression, their willingness to exercise power and to destroy anyone who challenged them and to suppress or even destroy the people below them.

This has created a situation where you have had many societies in history, and you have societies today, where the only way to get ahead in that society is to be extremely aggressive and extremely ruthless. This is what you see in the emergence of communism in Russia where the Bolsheviks won the Russian Revolution because they were the most ruthless, the most willing to kill. They maintained their power and they maintained Russia as a communist nation because they had a virtually unlimited willingness to kill their fellow human beings.

You see also in the West, especially in America, how unrestricted capitalism can lead to the formation of these large corporations that seek to establish a monopoly. They are very ruthless in destroying any business that might compete with them or in suppressing new ideas and technologies that might challenge their monopoly position.

Flaws in the theory of evolution

When you look at this and compare it to the theory of Charles Darwin, anyone who is willing to look at reality can see that Darwin’s theory simply cannot explain this phenomenon. If you were to apply the theory to human society, then you must say that it is not simply the fittest, those who are able to adapt to their outer situation, that will survive. It is the most ruthless, the most aggressive, the most destructive. Then you are left with a very delicate question of explaining how those who are the most destructive in the short run can be the ones who survive in the long run. This cannot be explained by the theory of adaptability and the survival of the fittest.

You are, of course, also left having to explain how an unconscious process of evolution based on random genetic mutations could create an entire class of human beings who are so ruthless that they are willing to kill such large numbers of their own species. How can this secure the survival of the species? How could this particular trait arise as a random genetic mutation and how could it be selected for survival for so long without eventually being selected out, as unable to secure the survival of the species?

The greater truth that you can, of course, learn from the teachings of the ascended masters is that the fallen beings are not the most fit because they are adapting to a certain situation. They have actually created the situation in the past. They have created these societies where only the most aggressive can get ahead. They also have the ability to adapt to that situation because they still have greater aggression than the vast majority of the population who simply would never exercise this level of aggression in order to get a position in society.

Communism and capitalism are not natural or inevitable

You need to recognize that this is an entirely artificial situation and therefore you need to recognize that neither communism nor capitalism is an inevitable stage for society to go through. Neither is communism or capitalism justified by the laws of nature or by any other principle created by God or created by nature or defined by the laws of nature. It is an entirely artificial phenomenon that is created by a small elite and has only one purpose, namely to allow the elite to always maintain a privileged position at the top of society.

Then, you need to realize that, in the Golden Age that we are rapidly moving into, this situation in society simply cannot survive. It cannot survive for a variety of reasons. Part of it is that the Karmic Board, the overseers of the evolution of earth, have decided that this will no longer be allowed. There are a great number of lifestreams who have volunteered to take embodiment at this time so that they, from their authority of being in embodiment, can recognize and accept and make the calls for this phenomenon to no longer continue. You can serve to be the physical anchor points for the judgment of the fallen beings who are upholding this very unbalanced state in society.

Those who are astute observers will see that in the Golden Age it simply will not be possible to get ahead in the global competition if you maintain a society that allows a small elite to take such power and such privileges away from the general population. Again, there is the necessity to find a new structure for society that is neither communism nor capitalism but transcends both. You have a broader form of ownership so that all people are sharing in the ownership of the means of production. They are not owned by a small elite of capitalists. They are not owned by the state. They are owned by all of the people who are giving their labour to produce what society is producing.

This can be done in various ways and we will find ways to bring forth the ideas to the people who have the knowledge to receive them and to implement them. You, as the spiritual people, can make the calls for the clearing of the opposition to the descent of these ideas through the four levels of the material universe. You can make the calls for the binding of the demons and dark forces who are opposing this descent. You can make the calls for the judgment of Christ upon the people in embodiment who are likewise opposing the change in society. Without wishing to go further in depth with this topic at this point, I want to leave you with one final idea.

From survival of the fittest to prosperity of the kindest

My beloved, in the Golden Age, you will see a great change in the international political and economic landscape. You will see that there will be a new current flowing. Those nations who can tune in to this current and make the necessary changes, will grow in political power and strength and in economic power and strength. Those nations who cannot or will not tune into this change, will decline in political, economic and military power. Even the nations who may seem to be very powerful today, will decline if they do not tune in to this.

You may look at what is considered by many to be the greatest, most powerful nation on earth, namely the United States and I can assure you that if the United States does not make progress in terms of tuning in to the Aquarian Age current, then you will, within two to three decades, see the United States lose its current position as the most powerful nation, economically, politically and militarily. You will see other nations emerge who know how to tune in to the new current and who are willing to implement it.

The main current that will dominate the Golden Age is that a society serves its own people. This is, as Jesus said, the consciousness he demonstrated. You recognize that you are part of the whole and that your enlightened self-interest is to raise up the whole, to serve all life. Therefore, you realize that the purpose of a society is to serve the people and allow those people to express their creativity.

Thus you can see now that for more than a century, the power elite in many societies have used Darwin’s theories to justify their power and their privilege. They have promoted the idea of survival of the fittest, but this idea is dead. Its time is up. It has long ago lost its usefulness, and in the Golden Age, the idea of survival of the fittest will be replaced by another idea, namely, the prosperity of the kindest.

This is the concept I leave you to ponder, as I seal you in the love of my heart. I pour out my gratitude to you for being here and being willing to be the open doors for the multiplication of my release into the collective consciousness of both South Korea, North Korea, many other nations around the world. Be sealed therefore, in the love of the Mother’s heart.

 

Copyright © 2016 Kim Michaels

Sacred geometry in Asian societies


TOPICS: False Christianity in Asia – Judgment of Christ upon the false Christianity – People with individual Christhood will bring the Golden Age – The courage to question authority – When everybody wins – Using people’s ideals for growth – Community without the abuse of power – The ability of Asian people to organize society – Sacred geometry in multiple dimensions – Sacred geometry beyond the linear mind – A society organized for the soul – The abundant life is a creative life – How Christ evaluates nations – 


Listen to the recording of this dictation (Subscribers only)

Ascended Master Jesus Christ, July 3, 2016, through Kim Michaels at a conference in Seoul, Korea.

I AM the Ascended Master Jesus Christ. I come this day for multiple purposes. One is to bring forth the judgment of Christ directly from my Being upon the false Christianity that is spreading in Asia and that is attempting to insert itself into all levels of society. It seeks to spread the form of Christianity that has been so prominent in the West and which they now see an opportunity to spread in other parts of the world.

Therefore I, Jesus Christ, pronounce the judgment of Christ upon the Catholic Church in Korea and other Asian nations. I, Jesus Christ, pronounce the judgment of Christ upon the Protestant churches in Korea and other nations in Asia. I, Jesus Christ, pronounce the judgment of Christ upon the Fundamentalist churches in Korea and other nations in Asia. I, Jesus Christ, pronounce the judgment of Christ upon the Mormon Church in Korea and other nations in Asia.

It, then, has a number of ramifications that I have been able to pronounce this judgment in the physical. Of course, it needs to be reinforced by your calls and your acceptance that the judgment of Christ can also work through you when you are in alignment with my Being. Therefore, I ask you, of course, to make the calls on this.

False Christianity in Asia

I also pronounce the judgment of Christ upon the demons behind the false Christianity, the top demons of all the major churches and branches of Christianity and the many supporting demons. They are judged this day and as you reinforce this judgment with your calls, Archangel Michael will bind and take them gradually until the area can be cleared of this falsity of religion that has inserted itself in the West now for so many hundreds of years and is attempting to establish a dominant position here in Asia as well.

Truly, how will we bring Korea and Asia into the Golden Age? Well, we will not do so through the false Christianity that is out of touch with my message and my teachings. How will you bring the Golden Age anywhere? Only when a critical mass of people begin to wake up and realize and accept that the Christ is in them, each one and therefore the flow of the Christ Spirit, the Holy Spirit, can flow through anyone who is willing to open his or her heart to that flow of the Spirit.

This, truly, was one of the central messages that I brought to earth now so long ago, namely that it is a complete lie that there is only a small elite who has access to the kingdom of God and can act as emissaries for the flow of the Spirit. The reality that I demonstrated and that my disciples and apostles demonstrated is that the Holy Spirit bloweth where it listeth. It does not accept or respect the rank that human beings have put up in their societies where they have created this artificial pyramid of authority with those in the top having almost god-like power on earth.

Judgment of Christ upon the false Christianity

Instead, the flow of the Holy Spirit works through those who have open minds and hearts, who have purified their beings of the ill intentions of wanting to manipulate and control other people, even being willing to use peoples’ belief in God to manipulate and control them. What greater manipulation could there be: Claiming you are representative of God while in reality you are manipulating the people for the purposes of those who oppose God, namely the fallen beings. What was it I said to Peter? I said: “Get thee behind me Satan.” I say to the false Christianity that claims to represent me toda:, “Get thee behind me Satan for thou art an offence to me. Thou savorest not the things that be of God but the things that be of men, and therefore you have no part with me. You may claim to represent me, you may use my name, you may call to Jesus as many times as you want, but you are not eliciting a response from me but only from the prince of darkness to whom you have sworn allegiance while claiming to have sworn allegiance to Christ”.

If I sound harsh, it is not harshness but simple realism. The development of Christianity into the religions you see today is indeed an offence to me. It is the opposite of what I called people to do, namely to be the guardians of their brothers and sisters and to do onto their brothers and sisters not just what you want them to do to you but what you saw me do to your brothers and sisters and to yourselves.

Do unto others as Jesus would do to them, would be a better slogan for this age. Therefore, you may see many Christians who wonder “What would Jesus do?” Well, why are you wondering when you can tune in to my heart and know (each one individually) what the Christ would do through you. The Christ is also in you when you acknowledge and accept this. So stop pretending that you are representing me when indeed you have not been willing to attune to my heart within your hearts and therefore there is no oneness of heart and so how can you possibly represent Jesus Christ?

People with individual Christhood will bring the Golden Age

Now then, it is clear that the Golden Age will not be brought in Asia through false Christianity. What then will bring the Golden Age? Well, it will be that there are people in Korea and other nations in Asia who go within and manifest their own Christhood. This, of course, is the purpose of the teachings we are giving in this age.

I am not envisioning that all people in Korea or Asia will one day wake up and acknowledge ascended master teachings. It will certainly take a long time before they will be generally accepted but, my beloved, we do not have time to wait that long, for Saint Germain has the plan for the Golden Age. In order for us to avoid delaying it, we need you who are the spiritual people to make the calls for your brothers and sisters to be awakened to the Christ within them even if they do not consciously know how to put words on it.

They are nevertheless willing to exercise their Christhood even if they do not know what they are doing, even if they do not know of ascended masters. Do you not see that the beauty of the plan that was laid by the ascended masters before my embodiment is that there is truly no force on earth who can stop the movement, the flow of the Spirit? Certainly, there has been a certain deflection and a certain delay in our plans to raise up 10,000 and millions of people to Christhood. You must understand that even though there is no conscious awareness of my inner message, there are still many people who have at inner levels developed a measure of Christhood over these past 2,000 years.

They are found in all nations including, of course, here in Asia. As we have said, many are in South Korea and so these people do not need to know consciously what you know, they do not need to be able to put words on it. You can make the calls that they will take that last step whereby they begin to exercise their Christhood as many have indeed have already done.

The courage to question authority

What is one characteristic that you need to call for? It is that people will begin to exercise precisely the aspect of Christhood that you saw me demonstrate so many times in my embodiment 2,000 years ago. I actually demonstrated it many more times than are recorded in the scriptures, and it is the characteristic where you have the courage and the willingness to openly question authority.

When you look at what other masters have said before me about some of the characteristics here in Asia that are standing in the way of the Golden Age, you have seen them talk about these very centralized societies that have a very top-down power structure. You will see that it is prevalent in Asian culture, and certainly in Korea as well, that everyone accepts their station in society and that none who are at a lower station dares to question the authority of those who are above them.

We have talked about the problem that there are many people who get promoted to a certain station of authority without having the ability to exercise that position. They are promoted because they are from a “good” family and because they know someone who knows someone. Therefore, everyone is doing each other favours and promoting those people who are belonging to the certain families regardless of their abilities to fill a certain position.

Once a person is in a position of authority, the person realizes, of course, that he does not have the ability to truly fulfil the position but does he admit this and resign from the position? Nay, because this would be such a disappointment to his family, and such a loss of honour and a loss of face for himself, that instead he stays in the position and then what does he do in order to hide his inability to exercise the position. Well, he hides behind the outer authority of the position. He counts on the fact that no one below him dares to question him, and then he hopes that he will not make such a severe mistake that those who are above him in hierarchy will have to do something to either discipline or correct him or even remove him from the position.

There are many, many people who are in these positions in society who are living a life of constant anxiety. They know they are not really qualified for their position and they are just hoping that they will not make such a mistake that those above them would have to come down upon them. They live their entire lives in this state of mind and it is, of course, agony for themselves. It is also detrimental to society because you have all these people in positions who are really not competent to fulfil that position and it holds the entire society back from making the progress that needs to be made for us to manifest the Golden Age.

You, who are the spiritual people, can overcome this consciousness in yourself and dare to speak out in the face of authority when you see things that are not right. You dare to speak out, not in the sense of necessarily saying that this is wrong but of pointing out that there is a different way to do it, there is a better way to do it, there is a way to do it that would produce better consequences for all people involved. You can, of course, also make the calls that those of your brothers and sisters, who are not yet consciously aware of their attainment and their spirituality, will be set free to also exercise this aspect of Christhood where they dare to question authority.

When everybody wins

As we have said, it is not a matter of necessarily pointing out what is wrong with society. It is, certainly, a matter of having the courage to say that there is something here that could be done better and there is something that needs to be done better if we are to compete in the global business climate that is emerging. If we are to stay at the forefront of development here in Asia, then the Korean nation needs to take these measures.

When more and more people dare to speak out, then you will see that things can shift relatively quickly so that there is a different climate where people now are not afraid to say what they observe, to say what they think. Therefore, there can be a new openness. Aas we have said, those who are in positions of authority can see that if they run with some of these new ideas, they will actually do the right thing for those below them and they will also thereby strengthen their position in their station of authority.  Many people can actually come to see that it can be a relief for them to embrace some of these new ideas instead of holding onto the old, because it can relieve some of the anxiety they have felt.

My beloved, there is a concept of the “win-win” where everybody wins by changing. This might be a concept that you can also begin to embrace and you can make the calls that society will begin to embrace this from a new awareness that it is necessary to go to a higher level, to go to an entirely higher level, if we are to stay competitive in the global environment. You see, my beloved, when you look at a particular nation or a particular people (or even a group of people or a corporation), you can look at what are the ideals they have set for themselves and then you have two options here.

You may decide that their ideas are completely wrong and they need to be overturned and thrown away. This is an option that has often been taken in the past. For example, you have seen many revolutions where those who were behind the revolutionary forces thought that the leaders of society were doing something completely wrong and needed to be overturned. This was the driving force behind the Communist Revolution but also many others and you have seen it even here in South Korea.

Using people’s ideals for growth

What I point out to you is that there is an aspect of Christhood that is devoted to seeing the Christ within everyone and therefore appealing to that Christ in order to create a win-win situation. It is not a matter of saying that the existing ideals are wrong, but it is a matter of realizing that when we understand peoples’ ideals (the way they would like to be, the way they would like to see themselves and they would like others to see them), then you can actually appeal to these ideals and give them a slight turn so that they are bringing society in a new direction.

You see, for example, here in South Korea a certain national sense of wanting to be one of the most developed countries in Asia, wanting to be on the forefront of new developments, wanting to be a more advanced society than China and Japan with whom you often compare yourselves. Even though I will tell you that you do not need to compare yourselves, for you are a unique people and you do not need to think in terms of better or worse, higher or lower, but you can be fully content in being who you are and expressing that. Nevertheless, you can look at this desire and you can give it a slight turn and say: “If we are to stay in the forefront of development, not only in Asia but in the world, then we need to dare to embrace new ideas. We need to do dare to do what others have not done. We need to dare to openly think about these ideas. We need to question the way we have done things so far and see if there are certain aspects of our culture and our approach that are actually holding us back from staying in the forefront or moving even further ahead.”

This way, you can create a positive climate where it is not a matter of placing blame. It is not a matter of appointing a scapegoat. It is not a matter of tearing people down, my beloved. Then, you can create a more open dialogue where suddenly people dare to bring forth new ideas, for now it is not a matter of bringing forth a new idea in stark opposition to the old and to the people in authority. It is a matter of creating an impersonal discussion where we look at what can society do to leap ahead in the global competition. How can we leapfrog some of the older nations, the other nations that have stagnated, that are standing still?

How can we do what the Japanese nation has not dared to do and how can we avoid the stagnation that we see there? This can create a different climate, and you will, of course, see that there will be certain fallen beings or those in the fallen consciousness who will oppose this change. In doing so, they will also expose themselves. In the end, will it not become obvious to more and more people that these people are against progress because they are seeking to protect their privileged positions?

Community without the abuse of power

My beloved, one of the messages that I gave 2,000 years ago was that when you realize who you are, as a person who has a Christ potential, then you realize that all other people have that Christ potential. When you begin to exercise it, you can come together in a true spirit of community. This is what you saw some of my early disciples manifest. Although they manifested it in a certain way that was suitable for those times, you can still manifest a different form of community that is suitable for modern times. It is a sense of community where you realize that you are here to take care of each other, to help each other, to raise up each other and thereby raise up the whole.

As we have said, there needs to be a shift in society where you begin to see the value of people, the value of the individual. You see people as the most important resource in society, as the most important purpose of society, namely to serve the people. This is an aspect of Christhood that relates to society where society serves the people, and people, of course, serve each other. Thereby, the individual serves the whole and the whole serves the individual and it serves all of the people.

You can create a new sense of community, and it will then become obvious there are some people who are working against this sense of community. They are not willing to raise up the All, for they want to keep the privileged positions that they have taken through force. When this becomes known, then you can see a shift in the debate in society where you realize that no society can enter the Golden Age while allowing people in this state of consciousness to remain in leadership positions.

Therefore, you can begin to create a new awareness where people become aware that there are certain people in society who have abused their positions of power. They have been entrusted by society or by corporations with a certain status, a certain position, but they have abused this to serve themselves or a small elite rather than serving the people. You can then create an awareness that the true measure of a leader is whether he serves the people or serves the narrow interests of a small elite.

There are already many people who at inner levels are very close to breaking through to this realization. When you make the calls for this to happen, then they will begin to break through and the awareness will begin to shift. You will see that there will be a growing awareness (and it is an awareness that will happen not only here but it will happen worldwide) that the only way for a society to truly stay at the forefront of development is to create a society that serves the people, that serves the greatest number of people without allowing an elite to take advantage of that society and the population.

The ability of Asian people to organize society

My beloved, I wish to take you on a little journey where to you look into the past of this region and of the nation of Korea. I wish to bring to your attention that there are certain qualities that are found in this area, in the people of this area, and that they have a potential to be used for bringing the Golden Age.

You may look upon the messages we have given you so far where we have focused on: here is this problem that needs to change, here is that problem that needs to change, here is this that needs to be overcome. You may get the impression that there are so many problems standing in the way of the Golden Age that it seems overwhelming. You may also get the impression that bringing the Golden Age is a matter eradicating problems, but this, of course, is not the case.

The reality of the matter is that you are living on a planet that has been very, very severely influenced by the fallen consciousness, by the duality consciousness, the consciousness of separation that leads to conflict. Therefore, there are indeed certain problems that need to be seen for what they are and overcome.

Of course, this is only one aspect of bringing the Golden Age. It is what we might call the Omega aspect where we look at conditions as they are, we apply the wisdom of the Mother to see how things need to change. There is also the Alpha aspect where (once we have cleared away some of the problems that are blocking a new awareness and that new awareness begins to dawn) we can activate some of the positive qualities that are found in all peoples and in all nations. Let me take you on this journey and have you look at the fact that here is Southeast Asia you have for thousands upon thousands of years going into the past seen some very advanced civilizations.

You have all seen these pictures of ruins that are very, very large, very large complexes of temples and buildings with streets that are completely straight. The streets are laid out in a square pattern and there is obviously a very high level of organization. This is one of the positive qualities that are present in the people of this region. There is a certain ability to organize and to organize things very well. This is a positive quality but it can, of course, as everything else, be taken to a unbalanced extreme by the fallen consciousness.

Now, we have in previous years given certain teachings about what we have called the mechanization concept or the mechanization consciousness. It is a consciousness that comes from the fallen beings who are attempting to control everything on earth. When I say everything on earth, I mean, of course, first of all the people on earth. The fallen beings are facing a fundamental challenge because they know that their numbers are very limited compared to the total population. The question for them always is: “How can such a small number of people gain control over so many?”

One of the ways they have attempted to do this is to reduce the people so that they are not acknowledging their Christhood and therefore they are not able to bring forth creative solutions. They begin to function in a more and more mechanical manner. This ties in with what other masters have talked about where a soul can become so afraid of making bad decisions that lead to very severe consequences that it no longer wants to make decisions. The fallen beings can then take this and use it to create a society that is very organized in the sense that it defines specific stations for people. Then it causes people to accept that: “This is my station in life, and as long as I fulfil the requirements of that station in a mechanical way, then I will avoid the negative consequences that I fear.”

This also means that people have a tendency to become somewhat robotic, somewhat mechanical. What you see here is that the fallen beings have taken the ability to organize a society and they have turned it into the ability to organize a society based on control, based on reducing everyone to robots, who are mechanically performing the predefined functions of their role, their station. This is what you also see in most large corporations, namely that they are attempting to reduce their workers to mechanical robots. This, of course, stems from the fact that, again, you have many people who have been promoted to leadership positions who are not competent to fill that position. They are afraid of making a mistake and therefore, again, if they follow the rules, if they do what they are told, then they should never make a mistake. As we have pointed out this cannot bring forth a Golden Age society.

Now my beloved, what is the positive potential for this ability to organize that you see in this region? Well, it is that you can begin to create a society that is organized, but instead of being based on a mechanization concept that wants to make everyone the same, it is based on the Christ consciousness that wants to allow every individual to bring forth the creativity that comes from its I Am Presence.

Sacred geometry in multiple dimensions

My beloved, just as a visual illustration of what this means, you can look at these past societies and how they have often been laid out in a completely regular grid based on simple geometric forms: the square, the rectangle, the straight line, perhaps the circle but it has been based on these simple geometric forms. Now, if you have studied philosophy, you will know that the ancient Greek philosopher Plato talked about that the world was organized in such a way that beyond the material world was a realm of what he called ideal forms, ideal geometric shapes. What has happened since then is that many people have come to believe that the ideal geometric shapes are the square, the rectangle, the circle, the triangle, all of these lines that are very simple and that can be defined in very simple ways mathematically.

My beloved, these are not the ideal geometric forms that Plato was talking about. Therefore, I bring to your attention that what the fallen beings have done with their mechanization concept is that they have made use of a lower form of geometry, but there is a higher (sacred or divine) geometry that is beyond these very simple forms based on simple, two-dimensional lines.

These are multi-dimensional geometric shapes. Not only do they exist in the three dimensions of width, breadth, and depth, they also exist in the fourth dimension of time, even in dimensions that are not currently known. I bring to your attention that in order to bring forth a higher form of organization, a higher organizing principle in society, you need to look beyond this simple geometry to a more complex geometry, which you are fully capable of making use of in this age of greater awareness of science and scientific principles. Of course, the technology you have in the form of computers makes it much more simple to perform these complex calculations that were simply beyond the ability of people even a hundred years ago and certainly a thousand or several thousand years ago.

What is this more complex geometry that I am talking about? It can be accessed through the principles of Feng Shui, which seek to work with the natural forms that are there and create a greater harmony. You can take this to a much higher level, and there are people in embodiment who are already working on this and who are capable of bringing it forth. They can be helped by your calls to bring forth this higher geometry.

Sacred geometry beyond the linear mind

As a contrast to show you what is possible you may look at the plan of one of these ancient civilizations and how the buildings were laid out in a very regular grid based on lines and squares and rectangles. Then, you may look at these societies and you may see that in a sense they were highly organized. You may even look at your own societies and your own cities today and see that they are not nearly as regular. You might get the idea that these ancient people had access to some higher level of organization than what you are able to do today. I do not want to reason this way because it is not correct, my beloved.

Of course, I am not thereby saying that current societies are at the highest possible level of organization. What I want to point out to you is that if you look at these ancient civilizations and all of the regularity in their plans, you can see that although there was a certain complexity, it was actually not a very sophisticated complexity. If you want an example of a much more sophisticated complexity based on a higher level of geometry than these simple squares and triangles, you need to look no further than your own bodies.

The human body is not square, has no straight lines, has none of these simple geometric shapes that the ancients saw as the ideal because it was all they could deal with, with their level of mathematical understanding. The reality is that the human body is to some degree based on sacred geometry. You will see that the body has symmetry. Even though it does not have any straight lines, yet there is symmetry. This is the kind of higher geometry that I am talking about. It can be brought forth, it can be applied to many areas of society where you begin to realize that there is a higher way to organize things that does not require you to reduce everything to these simple geometric shapes. Therefore, you can begin to free your minds from what we have called the linear mind.

The linear mind is very much tied to these very simple geometric shapes. It can only think, it can only envision, in these very simple shapes that it can reduce to the mechanical components that can be dealt with, with simple mathematics. You today, have much more complex mathematics. There is more to be brought forth, but nevertheless it is not a matter of reducing everything to mathematics. It is a matter of realizing that the human mind is not a mechanical device in its higher form.

A society organized for the soul

The human mind has the Christ potential, and the Christ potential is not a mechanical mind. Therefore, it cannot be reduced to simple geometric shapes, it cannot be reduced to mathematics. My beloved, you may be able to create a building or an entire city that is laid out in a completely regular organized geometric shape where everything is symmetrical, everything is created according to a certain proportion. You have seen the attempts of doing this even in the modern age where you see in North Korea, in China and other communist countries how they have created these huge buildings and building complexes where everything has been reduced to mathematics, to mechanics.

When you go there and experience these buildings, does your soul leap for joy? Nay, it does not, it actually feels uncomfortable in an environment like that. This simple measure should tell you that there is something missing here. What is missing is that you have not realized that the soul cannot be reduced to mechanics. In order to create a society that serves the people, that serves the growth of the people, you cannot approach planning from a strictly mechanical or mathematical viewpoint.

You need to go into these much more subtle considerations that you see in Feng Shui, but you can take this much, much further. You can begin to create a new form of organization, a new form of city planning, a new form of structure in corporations, in governments and bureaucracies. There is room for creativity, there is room for the unfoldment of the soul. There is created an environment that stimulates the soul rather than oppressing the soul and seeking to reduce it to a mechanical device, which it will never become.

You may look to communist nations and you may look at people who have been brought up in this environment and who from their early childhood have been brainwashed into thinking they live in the most sophisticated society and they should be proud, as was said yesterday, to be soviet citizens. You will see, as was also demonstrated yesterday, that you cannot be fully satisfied in an environment like that. Many people will know from within that something is not right. Those who are not aware enough to even acknowledge that something is not right, will still feel a certain discontent, a certain dissatisfaction. Some of them may be content in their misery because they have accepted that they could never be more than this, but nevertheless this does not mean that they are happy, that they are fulfilled, that they feel like they are living in the best possible society. They may think this with the outer mind but they do not feel it in their hearts.

The abundant life is a creative life

My beloved, what I point out to you is that I, Jesus Christ, came that all might have life and that they might have it more abundantly. How do you have life? Only through the Christ consciousness, not through the mechanization consciousness, for it cannot give you a higher form of life. Certainly, those who are living as robots are not truly alive, even though their hearts are beating and their lungs are breathing.

My beloved, the higher form of life that I came to give people is indeed the awareness of the Christ consciousness. The abundant life that I talked about was not simply material abundance but first of all the spiritual abundance, the soul abundance, of knowing that you are growing on the path, you are able to express your Divine individuality, your Divine creativity in serving your society, in serving other people. You are not expressing your Divine creativity for your own personal gain in terms of financial or physical gain, for you realize that the greater value is to be fulfilled in life, to feel that you are being who you are, that you are expressing who you are.

This is the abundant life, my beloved. It is a creative life. Certainly, it is not realistic that all people will experience this within the next few decades. It is realistic that a greater and greater portion of the people in the more developed societies will begin to feel this kind of inner satisfaction. It comes from knowing that they are exactly where they need to be, that they are doing exactly what they need to be doing in bringing forth from within the new ideas that can in some measure bring their society forward.

How Christ evaluates nations

This is the ultimate value for any society. If you were to truly look at the nations of the world and see which nations are the most developed in terms of having the greatest number of people who can express their inner beings, who can express their Christhood, then you would see an entirely different configuration than what you see today. You often evaluate nations based on simple numbers, the number of people, the number of the gross national product, the number of the army, the size and the power of the armed forces, the size of the economy, the power of corporations and all of these outer measures. These measures are like nothing when seen from the perspective of the Christ consciousness. They are, as I said, the consciousness of Satan that savours the things of the world and not the things of God.

You would see that the nations that will be the forerunners for the Golden Age will be those who give the greatest creative freedom to the greatest number of people. They allow the new ideas brought forth through this creativity to have an actual impact on society.

This my, beloved, is the potential that is here in Asia. It is here in Korea, and it will be unfolded through the Christ consciousness that will not be controlled by any institution on earth, be it a Christian church or communist state or some other organization that you might see. It is not something that can be forced. You cannot create a mechanical program that educates people in Christhood and therefore controls the flow of their creativity to support a certain direction in society.

The Holy Spirit bloweth where it listeth and it will overturn those structures of the high and the mighty. When I walked into the temple in Jerusalem and overturned the tables of the money changers, it was a symbol for how the Holy Spirit will overturn the tables of the money changers in all areas of society, namely those who are seeking to control the people and to actually control society in order to shut out the flow of the Spirit. The Holy Spirit bloweth where it listeth. It cannot be controlled in a mechanical way and that is why the fallen beings are mortally afraid of the flow of the Spirit through the individual.

That is why they will do anything they can to stop that flow of the Holy Spirit through the individual. That is why they have created a false Christianity that denies the Christ in all people except Jesus Christ who is no longer here on earth, meaning that the Christ consciousness has no opening on earth if you believe official Christian doctrines. They also created communism, which of course also denies the Christ in the individual and the value of the individual and raises the state up as the all and in all.

This is what you see in many past societies in this region where they had various philosophies that denied the Christ in all people except maybe a certain leader. Of course, the fallen ones would like to deny the Christ in everyone and would like no one to be aware that there is such a thing as the Christ consciousness or the flow of the Spirit. But they would also accept a society where there is awareness of the Christ and the Christ potential but they have set themselves up as the only ones who can be the open door for the Spirit and they have caused all of the population to deny it in themselves. This is the consciousness that you can make calls on so that you can reinforce the judgment that I have brought forth this day upon this consciousness

Once again I, Jesus Christ, pronounce the judgment of the mechanization concept here in Korea and Asia. I, Jesus Christ, pronounce the judgment of the consciousness that denies Christ in the individual here in Korea and Asia. You can reinforce this with your calls and it will have a tremendous impact of creating a shift whereby many, many people who have attained Christhood in previous lifetimes will begin to wake up and dare to express that Christhood. They will dare to question authority, dare to be the open door for new ideas that will bring forth a society with a higher level of organization based on a higher level of geometry, a sacred geometry, an organic geometry, a Christ-like geometry.

With this I thank you for providing me this platform. I seal you in the Living Joy and the Living Peace of my heart.

 

Copyright © 2016 Kim Michaels

The Golden Age potential for South Korea


TOPICS: South Korea is in the beginning stages of the Golden Age – The desire for an orderly society – The fallen beings manipulated people into accepting roles – Dissatisfaction with life – Resentment from within – Potential conflicts in Asian nations – Conflict between young and old – The individual has inherent worth – Youth unemployment – Neither communism nor unrestricted capitalism – A new approach to the economy – Preserving face – Going beyond the risk of failure –


Listen to the recording of this dictation (Subscribers only)

Ascender Master Saint Germain, July 2, 2016 through Kim Michaels at a conference in Seoul, Korea

South Korea is in the beginning stages of the Golden Age

I AM the Ascender Master Saint Germain, and I am very grateful for being provided a platform whereby I can speak the perspective of the Seventh Ray on how we can bring Korea and Asia into the Golden Age. Now, bringing something into the Golden Age implies, of course, that we are not already there, but this is a statement that might be cause for consideration. In many respects South Korea is already in the Golden Age because you have achieved so much progress since the devastation that followed after the war. You have shown such a willingness to improve, such a willingness to work hard and such a willingness to move forward that in many ways you are in the Golden Age already.

As I have said, the Golden Age is not a static society, it is an ongoing process of growth. Therefore, you can say that South Korea is in the beginning stages of the Golden Age and there is much more to come. Nevertheless, I wish to have you acknowledge that I do not in any way consider South Korea a deficient society or a society that is behind the times or behind the plan for bringing forth the Golden Age. You are in many ways right on schedule for bringing forth the vision I have for this nation and this I think deserves my gratitude and my congratulations.

Those of you who are the spiritual people can, of course, see that there are still things that are not according to a Golden Age matrix in your society. Nevertheless, you should not go into a negative state of mind and feel like you are coming from a deficit. You should not look at your own nation with mistrust. You should not go into this state of consciousness, that we see in America so much, with many who go into these conspiracy theories and believe that everything is bad and there is a manipulation behind the scenes and so forth and so on.

Of course, there is manipulation behind the scenes in the sense that there are fallen beings everywhere, and they are always trying to do what they are always trying to do. Nevertheless, my point is this: There has been so much progress in South Korea that you can consider yourself in the beginning stages of the Golden Age. Therefore, you can move forward with the attitude, with the consciousness, that we are building upon a good foundation and therefore we do not look at ourselves or our society as being deficient or behind.

This, of course, is not the case in North Korea, which is behind. It is not the case in many other nations in Asia that are also behind, but South Korea is not behind and that is why I said in Holland that I consider South Korea the key to Asia, the key to changing the mindset of Asia.

The desire for an orderly society

Now, what is it that I, as the Chohan of the Seventh Ray, envision needs to happen for the Golden Age to be brought into manifestation in the greater Asian area? Well, it is, of course, that from my perspective the absolute key to bringing the Golden Age is freedom, to bring freedom. Without freedom how can there be a Golden Age? How can there be a new era of innovation and inventions that will bring forth all of the thought matrixes, all of the ideas, all of the practical technologies that are needed to manifest the Golden Age? It cannot happen without freedom and with freedom I do not mean only physical or political freedom, not only economic freedom, I mean first of all freedom of the mind. Therefore, there must be a freedom to think in new terms, to think outside the box, to think outside of these matrices, these traditional ways of looking at life, that actually is one of the greatest hindrances to the manifestation of the Golden Age especially here in Asia.

What is it that I wish to give you in this instalment? Well, it is simply that there needs to be a new awareness that people in Asia need to gain a freedom from a certain mindset that has been very dominant in this part of the world for a long time. The mindset I am talking about is somewhat subtle but it can be described in this way. There is a great desire among the people in Asia to live in a very orderly, structured society where everything can be predicted, everything can be controlled and therefore there are no surprises.

You can see, for example, how many past societies (and even present societies) have attempted to accomplish this kind of society by creating a very centralized society that has a very strict, orderly form of government. This society has defined specific roles for all of its citizens. There is a role for the peasant, for the worker, for the soldier, for the administrator, for the leaders and so forth and so on. This goes somewhat back to the Confucian philosophy that has in many cases been taken to an extreme, but it must be said in all fairness that while Confucius was in embodiment as Confucius, he also had a desire to create a very orderly, structured society.

The fallen beings manipulated people into accepting roles

The fallen beings, of course, have taken these ideas to an extreme because they have used the desire for a structured society to reason or argue that in order to create a structured society, you need to create a society where everything is predictable. In order to make everything predictable, we need to define these very strict, narrow roles for all of the people in society. Therefore, when you are born in a certain family, you are automatically born into a certain role. You need to educate yourself to fulfil that role, you need to accept that this is your role and then you need to carry out that role for the rest of your lifetime. We might say that, as there is the saying that some people sell their souls to the devil, in a sense many people in this area have sold their soul to security, to living in a secure society.

There are many, many people who have accepted these roles because they have, as we have said before, come to the point where they were not willing to make their own decisions. They were so afraid of being wrong, of creating dire consequences for themselves, that they were wanting to be in a situation where their life was predictable. They wanted to look at the rest of their lifespan and they could see that if they kept carrying out the task that they had been assigned in their society, then their life was secure. There would be no great surprises, there would be nothing that would shock them, there would be no undesirable consequences.

The fallen beings have understood how to take advantage of this situation. However, if you go further back and ask how this situation could arise, you see precisely, as we have also mentioned many times, that the fallen beings are the ones who have created such an unbalanced state on the planet that people experience these very severe consequences of their choices. It is actually the fallen beings who have created the situation where people’s choices lead to such drastic consequences that people become afraid of making choices.

The fallen beings then come in and take advantage of the imbalance they have created, and they take society to a point where they can set themselves up as having almost total, almost God-like, control over society. When I say God-like control, I of course mean this according to the definition of God also created by the fallen beings, where it is seen as if God is this remote being in the sky who wants to control everything.

This, naturally, is a false God, as we have explained, but nevertheless, how many people have been able to see this? How many people have been able to free themselves from the image of God, the image of the spiritual realm, that has been put upon them by the fallen beings? Therefore, many people have come to believe (especially in past ages) that the rulers of their society had some authority or were ordained by God to be rulers. Whatever they said was a divine edict, a divine decree, and if the people did not follow it, they would go against God himself. They would go against the will of God if they went against the will of the leaders of their society.

Dissatisfaction with life

What is it that happens as a result of living in such a society? On the one hand, you may say that people have great security. You know from modern times how many people in communist countries have felt that after communism was abandoned there is such insecurity in their societies that they do not want to deal with it. A certain percentage of the population longs back to the security they had where they knew that they had a certain standard of living, a certain job that was guaranteed for life. Many people, also in this area of Asia, have sold their souls to this god of security and they have looked forward to a life that was predictable.

What is it that happens in the deep psychology of the soul when it is in this situation? Well, the soul knows (even though the person does not know this consciously), the inner being of the person knows that it is not growing, it is not fulfilling its reason for being. You are, as we have explained, self-aware spiritual beings, your purpose is not to live a secure life for sixty or seventy years in this embodiment. Your purpose is to live a life so that when you leave that embodiment you have risen to a higher level of consciousness than when you entered that embodiment.

If you leave at the same level at which you entered, or if you even go below the level at which you entered, then you will have some inner knowledge of this. You will therefore know that you are falling behind, that something is missing, something is not right. This is the inner knowing that has caused many of you to discover the spiritual path and to put forth great effort to walk the spiritual path. My beloved, when the soul knows within itself that something is missing, that it is not growing, then what the outer person feels at the conscious level is a certain discontent with life.

You are constantly dissatisfied with life, no matter what position you have in society. Even though you may be one of the privileged elite who has a privileged position, you are still dissatisfied. It is not quite enough, you are not quite where you need to be. This creates a very conflicted psychology where on the one hand you have the desire for security but on the other hand you have from deep within, this deep dissatisfaction that wells up.

Resentment from within

As you become older in such a structured society, you come to realize that you are actually boxed in, you have no possibility of changing your station in society, you cannot transcend it, you cannot go beyond it. It is not a matter of how hard you work, how innovative you are, how creative you are in coming up with new ideas. If you are a peasant or a soldier or an administrator that is what you will be for the rest of this lifetime, and so what starts growing within the soul is a certain resentment. This resentment must be directed out from itself because the soul is not willing to make its own decisions.

You understand that there is the outer limitations of society that are put upon you so that even if you did change, you could not really change your station in that society. There is also the inner limitation where when you have a fear of making decisions that lead to undesirable consequences, how can you even decide to do anything different. If you are not willing to acknowledge your unwillingness to make decisions, then you reason (with your outer mind) that it is society that is limiting you and so you must direct your resentment outwards.

You now have two possible scenarios for people living in such a society. One is that they stay in the station that they are assigned to for the rest of their lives and their society is orderly, is predictable, so that nothing dramatic happens in that society. In that case the resentment continues to grow and can very quickly become a form of anger that is directed at anyone where it seems appropriate or risk-free to direct that anger. This means that in any society you will see that people will direct anger against those they feel are below them. The top leader may direct anger at anyone. Those who are at the next level of leadership down may direct anger at those below them and so on. Even the one that is at the lowest station in society in terms of his outer occupation may direct anger against his wife and children.

Of course, the women – who often have no job or no occupation, no station in society other than being wives and housewives and mothers – they might direct anger at their husbands. You see a society where even though everyone has security in having a certain lifestyle, they are all more or less angry with each other and they are often interacting with each other based on this anger, resentment and irritation.

The other scenario that is possible in such a society is that something happens that disturbs the sense of security. This has in the past in many many cases been war but it has also been natural disasters. It has also been the overthrow of a certain political leader or even a political system, the bringing forth of something new that upset the order in society. The people who thought they had a secure station for the rest of their lives suddenly lost their position, lost their privileges, or they had to change their station, they had to change to a different occupation. They had to adjust to new circumstances and, again, when you feel you have lost something, when you feel you have to adjust to the new, then many people become angry. They, after all, had made this deal where they thought that if they submitted themselves to their station in life, then they should not have to change, they should not have to adjust.

What you often see is that when there is some kind of change that is unexpected, then you see anger as a result. You will see this in many of the Asian societies where it is beginning to dawn on the people that times are changing, that the way they were brought up to see their lives and their station in life cannot be maintained over time.

Potential conflicts in Asian nations

You see, for example, in China, how there is a very strong resentment among certain parts of the population. This is partly those who have seen their lives as being in a certain box, based on the old communist system. Now this is changing and therefore they feel they are losing their grip on society. It is entirely possible that there will be a major confrontation in China within the next decade between those who are trying to hold on to the communist system and the communist structure and those who have moved into the new and seeing the opportunity and who are focused on making money and raising their station in life through their making of money.

There will be an established power elite of the communist party officials and administrators and the aspiring power elite of those who have taken and are taking the economic power. This has the potential to create a major, major disaster in the Chinese society. It may not lead to a violent revolution but it certainly can lead to very great tension.

You see a similar pattern in Japan. Not quite the same way because of the lack of the communist influence, but you still see an old established power elite that is seeking to hold on to the old ways and a newer power elite that wants to take over and wants to bring society in a new direction.

What you also see in a number of Asian nations, including South Korea, is that you have a growing inequality between rich and poor. You see that there are those who are becoming increasingly rich even beyond any kind of reasonability because they have taken advantage of the system. They have taken advantage of the growth and they have used the privileged positions that they attained in the corporate structure, sometimes even in the government, through corruption to hold back those below them. Therefore, instead of sharing the wealth with the people, they have concentrated the earnings of a company to go to the shareholders instead of being shared with the employees. There are people who have worked their whole lives who feel that their standard of living is slowly being eroded and they feel this is unjust.

Conflict between young and old

Then, the next conflict that is lurking in many societies is the conflict between young people and the older more established people who are still having their prime positions in society and in the corporate structure. Many young people have been brought up, from when they were small, that they needed to get an education, they needed to get a good job, they needed to get a certain kind of job. They have focused their lives entirely on going through this very, very strict very, very demanding educational system in order to get the good grades and in order to get a degree. Then they come out with their degree and their paper and they suddenly are faced with the reality that there is not a job for every graduate and therefore they cannot be guaranteed the secure life that their parents had and that they were brought up to think that they would have.

Again, you see that because of the rigidity in society, because of this structure where everyone felt that if only they had a certain station in life and if only they accepted that station and met the demands of that station, then their lives would be secure, their lives would be predictable. Because of this very structure, when people realize that the security that they had seen as their right in life is not there, then the reaction is anger. Of course, anger does not lead to growth and anger does not lead to progress in society. It is therefore very important for you, who are the spiritual people, to be the forerunners, to overcome this consciousness in yourself but also to make the calls that society will find a way to deal with these issues without going into this state where everything is so inflated and every problem is so inflated by anger that it is impossible to talk rationally about this.

What you, of course, see in many areas of the world (and which you saw in the West, for example, with the discontent among the youth in the 1960’s) is that in many cases the older generation, who feel their lives are secure, do not want to listen to the young people until the young people go to an extreme and become very angry. This unfortunately sets the debate in society on a non-constructive track that often leads to bad decisions that are not actually to the advantage of anyone and that often allows the power elite to go in and manipulate the situation. It is important for you to hold the vision and make the calls that the South Korean society can find a more constructive way to deal with this issue. I know that this is a very big challenge and it will be very difficult to deal with this issue but I also know it is possible.

The individual has inherent worth

You see, my beloved, what other masters have talked about is that there has not been the value or the worth of the individual; it has not been seen by society. It has not been seen by the people nor has it been seen that there is a necessity for a society or corporation to invest in the people and see them as a resource. The only way to really deal with the situation of young people, as it is today and as it will become even more pronounced in the coming years, is to shift the way you look at life where you begin to realize the purpose of life is not security. The purpose of life is not to find a station, to accept a station, to educate yourself to fill a certain station and then work in that station for the rest of your life until you retire and then eventually die.

What you need to make the calls for is that people in South Korea begin to shift their view of life, their view of what it means to be a human being. You begin to realize that as a human being you have worth in yourself because you are not a human being but a spiritual being. This is a transition that has to some degree happened in the West, and that is why I say it is possible to begin this transition. I am not saying that any Western country has completed this transition because there is still much confusion and much problems in the West in terms of shifting the view of life.

I am only saying it is possible. It has been demonstrated that you can learn as a society to put greater value on the individual. This will also help many of the young people to see that their value as a human being does not depend on them having a job or having a certain kind of job. It can even help society come to the realization that it is not only acceptable but can actually be a benefit to society that there is a certain amount of people who are not following the traditional model of educating themselves to hold a certain job and then holding that for the rest of their lives. There is value in having a society where a certain percentage of the people can step back from letting their lives and their attention being swallowed up by the very demanding work in the current situation. There is value in having some people who have free time and free energy and free attention to focus on other aspects of life.

This is what you have seen traditionally in the many monks and nuns, both in the Buddhist religion and in other religions, who have withdrawn from society and focused on a more religious or even spiritual lifestyle. Yet because of the way modern times have developed, this is not so common anymore. You see in many Western nations that there is a certain percentage of the people who are not having a job and who are living a sort of in-between existence where they have not discovered the spiritual side of life, they are just coasting along living off of whatever welfare benefits their society offers. If there can be a shift where people can come to see this as an opportunity to focus on their spiritual nature or to focus on developing their creativity, then it can change the equation so that society can begin to deal with this problem in a more constructive way.

Youth unemployment

I can assure you that on a world-wide basis the issue of youth unemployment is not likely to improve in the near future. There are many, many countries around the world that deal with a large unemployment among young people, in some nations up to 25%, and this is an issue that needs to be dealt with by shifting perception of what it means to be a human being, what it means to be a good member of society, what it means to have worth.

You cannot continue a situation where people’s sense of worth is defined by their outer station in society. This is, of course, the way it has been in the rigid structure I have described but it is not the way it can be in the Aquarian age. In the Aquarian age the growth that will happen is that people will begin to see their inherent value as spiritual beings. There will be a transition period, and it is inevitable that there will be a stage where people must begin to question whether you really get your value through your outer station in life, especially through your job. You will see that this will require great adjustment throughout the world, and it is unfortunately so, my beloved, that this is an absolute necessary requirement for the bringing forth of the Golden Age but it is also something that many people are reluctant to consider.

As we have explained, when people are reluctant to learn from divine direction, they must learn from the School of Hard Knocks and the hard knocks are coming in various ways but one of the ways is precisely this growing phenomenon of unemployment among young people. When you see that people have been brought up to strive for a certain station in life and been promised security in return for it and then suddenly the security promised is not delivered, then you will see discontent. You will see that many of these young people will not remain silent and they will speak up and they will demand change in their society. This will unfortunately lead to various conflicts, but what I ask you to do is make the calls that your society can overcome this problem and overcome the anger and the resentment and find a more constructive way to deal with the issue.

Neither communism nor unrestricted capitalism

There are, of course, ways to deal with this issue, among them first of all is to look at the situation where you have allowed these corporations who focus wealth in the hands of a very small elite. I know well that whenever I talk about sharing wealth, there are some (especially in the United States but also elsewhere) who will immediately yell: “Communism.” But what I am talking about here is not communism. What I am not talking about either is, of extreme, uncontrolled capitalism. As we have said before, when the Soviet Union collapsed, what collapsed was the age of isms. It was not just communism that collapsed it was also capitalism and any other form of ism.

What collapsed was the age where it is enough for a society to adopt a certain philosophy and then think that this philosophy will solve all of their problems. This will no longer work in the Golden Age, and therefore a society needs to go beyond these systems that are thought up either by the human mind or the fallen mind and that wants reality to conform to a set of ideas. In the Golden Age there needs to be an awareness that we need to use what Mother Mary has called the wisdom of the mother to ask ourselves how life actually works. Therefore, we can look at a society, for example, as South Korea. You have had the division of Korea with a communist North and a South that was not communist. There has been a tendency to think in South Korea that capitalism is superior to communism and therefore if only you allow capitalism to run its course then you will create a more prosperous society.

Indeed, my beloved, by allowing capitalism to run its course you have created great wealth in society, but precisely because capitalism has been allowed to run its course, that wealth has been increasingly concentrated in the control of a smaller and smaller elite of people. That is precisely what capitalism as a system is designed to do, just as communism is designed to concentrate control in the hand of a small elite. In a communist system that control is gained through the party, but in a capitalist system it is gained through control of the economic apparatus whereby the wealth becomes concentrated. And through the wealth, you can control society.

You need to step back from this situation and say: “Now that we recognize that there is a growing gap between rich and poor, that there is a growing youth unemployment, it is necessary for us to acknowledge that the form of capitalism we have had has reached the end of its useful lifespan. It is time for us to take a critical look at it and see its limitations and then create a new approach.” We are not here talking about creating a communist system, for communism is dead. We are talking about reaching for a new approach to the economy where you realize that a society that is a free society cannot remain free if it allows a small elite to gain absolute control of the economy.

A capitalist system is a system where a small elite demands to be given unrestricted freedom to take over the economy. This cannot secure freedom for the population, and that is why you need to recognize that despite all of the rhetoric that has been put out there since the advent of communism, capitalism cannot and will not produce a free society. It will produce a society that is as unfree as a communist society, only it will be achieved in a different way.

A new approach to the economy

You need to recognize that there is a need to find a new approach to the economy. I do not say a new economic model or system for we are not looking for a system or a model. We are looking for the growing awareness that if a society is free (and claims to be a free society and wants to be a free society and wants to be a democratic society), then it must make sure that a small elite cannot take the freedom and the privileges away from the greater population. It needs to secure the greatest amount of freedom, the greatest amount of prosperity, for the greatest possible number of people.

Therefore, it needs to be recognized that the wealth that has been brought forth in the South Korean nation does not belong to a small elite of shareholders in large corporations. It belongs to the people because it is the work of the people that has created that wealth. Therefore, society needs to find a way – and each nation needs to do this in its individual way according to its culture – to limit how much wealth can be concentrated in the hands of a few people so that the wealth brought forth will be shared among the people. This can happen in a number of ways, but one way is to create a new way of organizing corporations so that the profit that is generated will not just go to shareholders. Or rather, it may go to shareholders because everyone who works for the corporation becomes a shareholder.

It is not enough to simply buy shares, but you have to actually make an effort and work for the corporation in order to earn shares. There are, of course, other ways that are too complex for me to explain in this discourse, but surely there are people in society, including in South Korea, right now who have the attunement with me to bring forth the specific ideas that are needed for South Korea to transition into a more Golden Age structure for society and corporations.

Preserving face

If you, who are the spiritual people, hold that vision and make the calls, then it can indeed happen if people are willing. You can, of course, make the calls that people will be set free from the old matrices. You can make the calls to reinforce the action of Shiva where you realize that the demons that were created in the South Korean nation are precisely those created by the power elite who are upholding the current status quo where the corporations have free reign. By calling for them to be bound and consumed, you will set people free to suddenly feel like a weight has lifted from them and now they are able to think clearly. They are able to step back and say: “Something is missing here, something cannot continue the way it has been, we need to look for a new approach, we need to look for new ideas for we cannot continue on this track.” When that happens at a certain scale, at a certain critical mass, then you will begin to see change.

In the beginning, it will not happen publicly because there is a certain tendency in all Asian nations, and in Korea as well, that we must maintain the facade, we must maintain the outer impression. Of course, you find this everywhere around the world, but you do find a variation of this in Asia, in Korea, where it is very important to maintain appearances, to maintain face, to preserve face. This, of course, will mean that, just as we talked about with the mind of the dictator who cannot admit that he was wrong, it will also be very difficult for the South Korean nation and its leadership to admit that they were wrong.

You are all aware of the disaster with the ferry that was wrecked not so long ago. You all know that there is some kind of cover up here, but I can tell you that there is no conspiracy that caused the crash. It was actually a failure of the system and the approach of the people, their attitude to their job. They were so concerned about following rules, maintaining an appearance all throughout the system, from the design and building, to the operation of the ship. Therefore, it was a failure of the system and there is no one who is willing to stand forward and admit this. It is judged by those who know that it would be too damaging to the trust of the people and to the reputation of the Korean society.

There is this consciousness (and it is a very strong consciousness and there is of course a demon on top of it that needs to be bound through your calls) that absolutely wants to maintain the appearances that all is well, all is under control and there has not been a failure of the system. You see, my beloved, as we have attempted to explain, it is not a matter of thinking in terms of failure. I know it may seem as if there are so many things that need to change, there must be something wrong somewhere, there must be a failure somewhere but as I started out by saying, I do not consider South Korea to be a deficient nation that is behind. You have made such great progress. It is not a matter of suddenly beginning to think you have failed. It is a matter of simply realizing that you have risen to a certain stage in the development of your society and in order to continue to grow, in order to rise to the next stage, you need to let go of some of the old patterns, some of the old ways of thinking, some of the old patterns of action.

Going beyond the risk of failure

You need to look at the old and you do not need to label it as a failure, my beloved. You do not need to appoint a scapegoat. You just need to recognize this is no longer the best approach. We need to look for a better one that can take us to the next stage. When there is that openness to look for a better approach, I promise you that I will release it through the people who are open. You can therefore make the calls that society will begin to overcome this almost obsession with maintaining appearances and making it seem like everything is just perfect.

My beloved, if everything was perfect why are so many people dissatisfied? The reason why they are dissatisfied is what I have explained, namely the consciousness. You see a tension in society because (as I explained) when people sell their souls for the sake of security, there is a growing discontent in the soul and it must be directed outwards. That is why so many people direct it at society. At the same time you also see that society as such wants to maintain appearances that everything is good and so there is no outlet here.

There is no outlet for the tension, and you know how the old steam engines had a boiler, a kettle, where you lit a fire and you poured in water that created steam, that created a pressure. The pressure was needed to make the engine produce work, but there had to be a safety valve so you could release pressure because if the pressure became too great, there would be an explosion. You need to make the calls that society will find a way to look at itself and to deal with the various issues that come up in such a way that pressure can be released.

Or actually a better way to look at it is that the pressure is not just released into the air but is released into giving momentum and direction to a new way of approaching society’s issues. Instead of looking at failure, instead of resisting growth until something breaks down so that it becomes obvious that there is a failure, you can transition in a new direction without having this very embarrassing, very shocking realization that something has failed. You all know that this very incident, as shocking as it was and as terrible it was for the people involved, has become much more than the incident itself. It has become a symbol and it has become a symbol of this dynamic I am describing where more and more people know that something needs to change. But there is a resistance to changing because of the belief that if something has to change, there must have been a failure in the old. You need to make the calls that there is a new approach. It is not a matter of appointing a failure to the old but simply realizing that in order to grow to the next level, we need a new approach, we need new ideas and new methods.

This, my beloved, has been a big mouthful and I have given you many things to contemplate but as you clearly know from my history of giving dictations, once I get started it is not easy to stop because I am indeed so eager to see progress in all societies. I am indeed very eager to see progress in South Korea because it is a nation that is dear to my heart. There are many souls embodied here who are among my own, those who are attuned to me and who have embodied here precisely because they see the potential for bringing forth aspects of the Golden Age in South Korea that can be an inspiration for other nations.

With this, I thank you for your attention. I thank you for creating this gathering where you have come together and made it possible that I could speak this message. Surely, I have much more to bring forth to the Korean nation, and I will find ways to bring forth these ideas through the people in various positions in society who can receive an idea. Maybe many people can receive only one idea but there are enough people who can receive these ideas that everything that I desire to bring forth can be brought forth. Of course, not everything can be brought forth through a messenger no matter how educated or knowledgeable this messenger is.

We desire to bring forth many ideas from the people who are in positions to implement them. How we can use a messenger, such as this one, is to inspire those of you who are spiritual people to make the calls and to hold the overall vision so that the Golden Age matrix can be brought down through the four levels and become manifest in the physical through those people who can implement an idea in society.

So with my great joy and my great gratitude for your presence, for your calls, I seal you in the Flame of Joyful Freedom that I AM.

 

Copyright © 2016 Kim Michaels